1 Introduction
Let $S_{g,n}$ be the connected and oriented surface of genus g and with n punctures, and let $\mathcal {M}_{g,n}$ be the moduli space of unmarked complex structures on $S_{g,n}$ . For a complex structure $X\in \mathcal {M}_{g,n}$ , let $\Omega (X)$ denote the space of holomorphic abelian differentials with at most finite-order poles at the punctures that we refer as meromorphic differentials on X. Let $\Omega \mathcal {M}_{g,n}$ denote the moduli space of pairs $(X,\omega )$ , where X is a punctured Riemann surface and $\omega \in \Omega (X)$ is an abelian differential on X. Such a moduli space admits a natural stratification, given by the strata $\mathcal {H}_g(m_1,\dots ,m_k; -p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ , enumerated by unordered partitions of $2g-2$ where we allow negative integers corresponding to the orders of poles.
A stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(m_1,\dots ,m_k; -p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ consists of equivalent classes of pairs $(X,\omega )$ , where $\omega $ has k zeros and n poles of orders $m_1,\dots , m_k, -p_1,\dots ,-p_n$ , respectively. We call $(m_1,\dots , m_k, -p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ the signature of the stratum. Sometimes, when necessary, we shall adopt an ‘exponential’ notation to denote multiple zeros or poles of the same order, for example $\mathcal H_1(2,2;\,-2,-2)=\mathcal H_1(2^2;\,-2^2)$ .
Note that a stratum of differentials can be disconnected. For $g\ge 2$ , a stratum can have up to three connected components according to the presence of a hyperelliptic involution or a topological invariant known as spin structure, while the number of connected components of a stratum in genus one depends on the greatest common divisor of the signature due to a structure called rotation number. For holomorphic differentials on compact Riemann surfaces, the connected components of the strata have been classified by Kontsevich–Zorich in [Reference Kontsevich and ZorichKZ03] and subsequently by Boissy in [Reference BoissyBoi15] in the case of meromorphic differentials.
The period character of an abelian differential $\omega $ on a Riemann surface X is defined as the homomorphism
For holomorphic differentials on compact Riemann surfaces (i.e., $n=0$ ), in [Reference HauptHau20] Haupt provided necessary and sufficient conditions for a representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow \mathbb C$ to arise as the period character of some pair $(X,\omega )$ . The same result has been subsequently rediscovered by Kapovich in [Reference KapovichKap20] by using Ratner’s theory. It turns out that there are two obstructions for a representation $\chi $ to be realized as the period character of an abelian differential. In the following, we shall refer to these conditions as Haupt’s conditions; see Section §2.1. Realizing a representation as a character in a prescribed stratum turns out to be a more subtle problem because, in the realizing process, the orders of zeros can no longer be ignored. In the same spirit of [Reference KapovichKap20], Le Fils has provided in [Reference Le FilsLF22] necessary and sufficient conditions for a representation $\chi $ to be a character in a given stratum. Around the same time, Bainbridge–Johnson–Judge–Park in [Reference Bainbridge, Johnson, Judge and ParkBJJP22] have provided, with an independent and alternative approach, necessary and sufficient conditions for a representation to be realized in a connected component of a prescribed stratum.
For meromorphic differentials on compact Riemann surfaces, equivalently holomorphic differentials on punctured complex curves (i.e., $n\ge 1$ ), in [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem A] Chenakkod–Faraco–Gupta provided conditions for a representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow \mathbb C$ to arise as a period character. In this case, no obstructions appear for realizing a representation $\chi $ as the period character of some meromorphic differential. Moreover, they have described necessary and sufficient conditions for realizing $\chi $ as the period of some $(X,\omega )$ in a prescribed stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ ; see [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorems B, C, D]. Around the same time, a slightly different version of [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem A] has been proved in [Reference Faraco and GuptaFG24, Theorem C] in which the authors been provided necessary and sufficient condition for a representation $\chi $ to be the period character of some translation surface $(X,\omega )$ in which all zeros and poles are at the punctures. Finally, in [Reference FaracoFar24] the author determined conditions under which a representation appears as the period character of some $(X,\omega )$ with nontrivial group of translations, namely automorphisms of the underlying complex structure that preserves the abelian differential $\omega $ . See [Reference FaracoFar24] for further details.
The aim of the present paper is to extend the results in the [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22] study of the period map (7) to connected components of the strata of meromorphic differentials whenever they are not connected. Our first result states as follows.
Theorem A. Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow \mathbb C$ be a nontrivial representation arising as the period character of some meromorphic genus-g differential in a stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ . Then $\chi $ can be realized in each of its connected components.
The trivial representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow \mathbb C$ is the homomorphism such that $\chi (\gamma )\!=\!0$ for all $\gamma \!\in \! \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})$ . Our second result handles this special representation which is exceptional as follows.
Theorem B. Suppose the trivial representation arises as the period character of some genus-g meromorphic differential in a stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ . Then $\chi $ can be realized in each of its connected components with the only exceptions being the strata:
-
1. $\mathcal {H}_1(3,3;\,-3,-3)$ ,
-
2. $\mathcal H_g(2^{g+2};\,-2^3)\,$ , for $\,g\ge 1$ ,
-
3. $\mathcal H_g(2^{g+1};\,-4)\,$ , for $\,g\ge 1$ .
Moreover, in these exceptional strata, for $g=1$ these strata exhibit two connected components, one of which is primitive and the other is not. The trivial representation can only be realized in the nonprimitive component. For $g\ge 2$ , the strata $\mathcal H_g(2^{g+2};\,-2^3)$ and $\mathcal H_g(2^{g+1};\,-4)$ have two connected components distinguished by the spin parity. The trivial representation can only be realized in the connected component with parity equal to $g\,(\mathrm {mod}\,2)$ .
For the reader’s convenience, in what follows we recall the main results of [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22] in §1.1 and then explain the new challenges as well as strategies to overcome them in §1.2.
1.1 Realizable representations in a given stratum
As already alluded above, the earlier work [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22] focuses on the study of which representations can be realized in a given stratum. As in the holomorphic case, to realize a given representation $\chi $ as the period character of some meromorphic differential in a given stratum is a subtle problem because the order of zeros and poles can be no longer ignored. Broadly speaking, we have three kinds of representations, namely $\chi $ can be
-
- the trivial representation if $\chi (\gamma )=0$ for all $\gamma $ ,
-
- integral representations if $\text {Im}(\,\chi \,)\cong \mathbb Z$ ,
-
- generic if $\chi $ is not trivial nor integral.
We remark that being generic is a fairly general condition. In principle, the realization process consists of finding a pair $(X,\omega )$ having the given representation $\chi $ as the period character. According to [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem C], a generic representation can be realized in a given stratum with signature $(m_1,\dots ,m_k; -p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ if the residues of simple poles are nonzero. Aside this restriction, for a generic representation there are no other obstructions in the realization process. More precisely,
Theorem (Chenakkod - F. - Gupta, 2022)
Let $\chi $ be a generic representation. Then $\chi $ can be realized in a stratum with signature $(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ if $p_i\ge 2$ whenever $\chi (\gamma _i)=0$ , where $\gamma _i$ denotes a peripheral loop around the $i^{th}$ puncture.
Note that this formulation is slightly different from that in [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22]. On the other hand, the trivial representation as well as integral representations cannot be realized in every stratum.
Let us consider first integral representations. For an integral representation $\chi $ , obstructions appear only if we aim to realize $\chi $ in a stratum with all simple poles, that is, a stratum with signature $(m_1,\dots ,m_k; -1^n)$ . This happens because every translation surface $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal H_g(m_1,\dots ,m_k; -1^n)$ with integral periods is always determined by a branched covering $f\colon X\longrightarrow \mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ and $\omega $ is defined as the pull-back of the meromorphic differential $\frac {1}{2\pi i}\frac {dz}{z}$ on $\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ with two simple poles at $\{0,\infty \}$ . Therefore, the realization of $(X,\omega )$ with integral periods in a stratum with signature $(m_1,\dots ,m_k; -1^n)$ is subject to the realization of a branched covering f with prescribed data. In particular, f is subject to the condition $m_i+1\le \deg (f)$ , coming from the Riemann–Hurwitz formula, and $\deg (f)$ is equal to the sum of the positive residues. As a consequence, the maximum zero order must be lower than $\deg (f)$ . In [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22] this is precisely stated as
Theorem (Chenakkod - F. - Gupta, 2022)
Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z}) \longrightarrow \mathbb {Z}$ be an integral representation. Let the residues around the positive punctures be given by the integer-tuple $\lambda \in \mathbb {Z}_+^r$ and the residues around the negative punctures be given by $-\mu $ , where $\mu \in \mathbb {Z}_+^l$ . Then $\chi $ can be realized in a stratum with signature $(m_1,\dots ,m_k; -1^n)$ , where $(m_1,\ldots , m_k)$ satisfies the degree condition
if and only if
Finally, the other special case concerns the trivial representation, that is, $\text {Im}(\chi )=\{0\}$ . Every translation surface with poles and trivial periods, say $(X,\omega )$ , is always determined by a rational map, namely a branched covering map, $f\colon X\longrightarrow \mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ and $\omega =f^*dz$ is an exact differential. Necessary conditions to realize the trivial representation in a stratum with signature $(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ are naturally imposed by this branched covering. [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem B] states that these conditions are also sufficient, that is
Theorem (Chenakkod - F. - Gupta, 2022)
Let $g\geq 0$ , and let $(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ be a signature satisfying
There exists a meromorphic differential in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ with trivial periods if and only if
-
(i) $p_j\ge 2$ for each $1 \leq j \leq n$ ,
-
(ii) $m_i +1 \le \displaystyle \sum _{i=1}^n \Big (\,p_j - 1\,\Big )$ for each $1 \leq i \leq k$ , and
-
(iii) if $g>0$ , $k>1$ whenever $n>1$ .
We remark that the third condition arises from the fact that a meromorphic differential $(X,\omega )$ with trivial periods has a single zero if and only if $(X,\omega )=(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1, z^mdz)$ ; see [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Proposition 8.1]. In particular, the trivial representation cannot be realized in strata of meromorphic differentials with simple poles.
Since every pair $(X,\omega )$ always determines a translation structure on $X\setminus \{\text { poles of }\omega \,\}$ , the realization process boils down to find a suitable collection of polygons such that, once glued together properly along slits, it provides a translation surface in a stratum with a single zero of maximal order and prescribed orders of poles. Then, by breaking the single zero into zeros of lower order, realizing a representation in a stratum with several zeros becomes a straightforward consequence of the former construction.
1.2 Realizing representations in connected components of strata
In the present paper, a series of new challenges that require distinct techniques appear for dealing with connected components of strata. In fact, for dealing with connected components, the gist of the idea is still the same, but now the way these polygons are glued together also does matter. This is particularly evident in Section §5 where, in order to realize a genus-one differential with prescribed rotation number, several copies of the standard differential $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ need to be glued together by following a certain pattern. Different ways of gluing provide structures in the same stratum but lying in different connected components. This motivates the several constructions summarized in Appendix A. A similar phenomenon can be seen in Section §6 in which we aim to realize a hyperelliptic translation surface with prescribed period character in a given stratum. Although realizing genus-one differential requires a deeper and more detailed argument, realizing higher genus surfaces with prescribed parity simplifies considerably due to a double inductive foundation starting from minimal strata with fixed polar part, for example, the signature $(m; -2^n)$ ; see Section §7 for more details.
Let us now discuss the trivial representation. Theorem A states that whenever a nontrivial representation can be realized in a given stratum, then the same representation can be realized in every connected component of the stratum. On the other hand, the trivial representation is exceptional in the following sense: To realize an exact differential in a given stratum with prescribed rotation number (if $g=1$ ), parity or hyperelliptic involution (if $g\ge 2$ ) turns out to be an arduous challenge and not always possible. In other words, the trivial representation may appear in a stratum without being realizable in each connected component of the same stratum; see Theorem B for the exceptional cases. The case of higher genus surfaces with prescribed parity relies on the realization of genus-one differentials with prescribed rotation number in a certain stratum. Even in this case we use an inductive foundation having genus-one exact differentials as the base case. Despite a geometric argument works for realizing an exact differential with prescribed invariants, it fails to show that the trivial representation cannot be realized in certain connected components of certain strata. In order to prove the second part of Theorem B we shall use an argument from the viewpoint of algebraic geometry. In fact, an exact differential $(X,\omega )$ yields a rational map $f\colon X\longrightarrow \mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ (i.e. a branched cover of the sphere) and we shall use a monodromy argument associated to the cover to determine whether the trivial representation can be realized in certain connected components of the exceptional strata listed above.
Remark. A few comments are in order. In the first place we point out that, in each section, we assume the representation satisfies the necessary conditions to be realized in a given stratum, for example, for a generic representation we shall assume the residue at simple poles to be nonzero. The crucial point is that all necessary conditions for a representation to appear in a certain stratum are also sufficient. In other words, one of the main results of [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22] is that a representation can be realized in a certain stratum if the necessary conditions hold. Despite relying on this result, most of our constructions are new and independent of those proposed in the earlier work [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22].
A second noteworthy comment is about the realization of integral representations in strata with all simple poles, that is, $\mathcal H_g(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-1^n)$ . According to Boissy (see [Reference BoissyBoi15]), if $g=1$ or $g\ge 2$ and $n\ge 3$ , these strata are all connected, and hence, Theorem A is nothing but [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem D]. On the other hand, if $g\ge 2$ and $n=2$ then strata with signature $(m_1,\dots ,m_k; -1^2)$ may have two connected components depending on the type of the signature; see §2.3. This leads us to consider a few special cases in separated subsections, that is, §6.4 and §7.2.3 of Sections §6 and §7 respectively. In fact, these are very specific to the realization of integral representations in these strata.
1.3 Period map and isoperiodic fibers
Besides strata, there is another type of subspaces in $\Omega \mathcal {M}_{g,n}$ which is worth studying, called isoperiodic foliations. These are defined as the (projections of) nonempty fibers of the so-called period map defined as the association that maps an abelian differential $\omega $ to its period character; see Equation (7). Unfortunately, for every $n\ge 0$ , such a map is not well defined on $\Omega \mathcal M_{g,n}$ ; see the discussion in [Reference NagNag85, Section §4.1.1] for $n=0$ . In order to have a well-defined period map we need to consider a suitable covering space that we denote with $\mathcal S_{g,n}$ .
It follows from the classical theory that the orbifold universal cover of $\mathcal M_{g,n}$ of the moduli space of unmarked complex structures on $S_{g,n}$ is biholomorphic to the Teichmüller space $\mathcal T_{g,n}$ . The fiber over every point X identifies with the different possible identifications of the fundamental group of X with the fundamental group of a reference topological surface $S_{g,n}$ . Under this perspective the covering group turns out to be isomorphic to the mapping class group $\mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ . Since in what follows we only want to keep the information of the identification at the homology level of the complex curve we consider the quotient of the Teichmüller space $\mathcal T_{g,n}$ with the subgroup $\mathcal I\,(S_{g,n}\,)\subset \mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ formed by elements that act trivially in homology, that is, on $\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})$ . We then define the following space:
Remark. For $n=0$ , the group $\mathcal I\,(S_{g,n}\,)\subset \mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ is known as the Torelli group and the space $\mathcal S_{g,n}$ is thus named as the Torelli space.
Every point in $\mathcal S_{g,n}$ thus corresponds to an equivalent class of tuples $(X,\, m)$ , where X is an unmarked complex structure on $S_{g,n}$ and $m\colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow \mathrm {H}_1(X,\, \mathbb Z)$ is an identification. Here two tuples $(X,\,m_X)$ and $(Y,\,m_Y)$ are equivalent if there exists a biholomorphism of marked Riemann surfaces, say $f\colon X \longrightarrow Y$ , such that $m_Y=f_*\circ m_X$ . The mapping class group $\mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ acts on $\mathcal S_{g,n}$ by precomposition on the marking and such an action yields a covering map
by construction. The moduli space of differentials $\Omega \mathcal M_{g,n}\longrightarrow \mathcal M_{g,n}$ pulls back to $\mathcal S_{g,n}$ , and hence, it defines $\Omega \mathcal S_{g,n}\longrightarrow \mathcal S_{g,n}$ , where $\Omega \mathcal S_{g,n}$ denotes the moduli space of homologically marked translation surfaces or homologically marked differentials. The period map is then defined as the association
that maps a marked translation surface $(X,\omega ,m)$ to its period character. If $n\ge 1$ , [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem A] states that, unlike the holomorphic case corresponding to $n=0$ , such a map is surjective. Our Theorems A and B thus provide a better characterization of the period map.
An isoperiodic fiber is defined as the nonempty preimage of a representation $\chi $ via the period map (7) These are also known in literature as absolute kernel foliations. We call a fiber of the period map an isoperiodic fiber. These fibers clearly project to $\Omega \mathcal M_{g,n}$ and then define a foliation that, with a little abuse of notation, we may still call isoperiodic. Since these latter along with strata are both subspaces of $\Omega \mathcal M_{g,n}$ , it sounds natural to inquire about their mutual intersections. As a corollary of our main Theorems A and B, we obtain the following result:
Corollary C. For a nontrivial representation its isoperiodic fiber in $\Omega \mathcal M_{g,n}$ intersects each connected component of each stratum of meromorphic differentials. The same statement holds for the trivial representation except for the strata in Theorem B.
We conclude with some additional comments. In the first place it is worth mentioning that $\Omega \mathcal S_{g,n}$ also admit a natural stratification given by strata, sometimes denoted by $\Omega \mathcal {S}_g(\,\mu \,)$ , enumerated by unordered partitions $\mu =\big (\,m_1,\dots ,m_k; -p_1,\dots ,-p_n\,\big )$ of $2g-2$ where, even in this case, negative integers are allowed and correspond to the orders of poles. Moreover, for every signature $\mu $ , the covering map (6) induces a natural covering map $\pi (\,\mu \,)\colon \Omega \mathcal {S}_g(\,\mu \,)\longrightarrow \mathcal H_g(\,\mu \,)$ between strata.
The period map restricted to strata of marked structures
The period map (7) just defined naturally restricts to a mapping
for every signature $\mu $ and [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorems B,C, D] provide a full characterization of the image of $\text {Per}(\,\mu \,)$ . In fact, a representation $\chi $ can be realized in a stratum $\mathcal H_g(\,\mu \,)$ if and only if it can be realized in the marked stratum $\Omega \mathcal {S}_g(\,\mu \,)$ . In one direction, if a triple $(X,\omega ,m)$ has period character $\chi $ then $(X,\omega )$ has the same period character. Vice versa, let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be any representation, fix a system of handle generators, say $\{\,\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\,\}_{1\le i\le g}$ , for $\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})$ (see Definitions 4.1 and 4.2), and complete it with a collection $\{\delta _1,\dots ,\delta _n\}$ of n simple closed curves, where $\delta _i$ is a simple loop around the $i^{th}$ puncture. Assume that $\chi $ appears as the period character of some pair $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal H_g(\,\mu \,)$ . Then, in the realization process, we determine a system of handle generators $\{\,\alpha _i^{\prime },\,\beta _i^{\prime }\,\}_{1\le i\le g}$ and n curves, say $\{\delta _1^{\prime },\dots ,\delta _n^{\prime }\}$ that generates $\mathrm {H}_1(X,\,\mathbb {Z})$ and such that
The association $m(\,\alpha _i\,)=\alpha _i^{\prime }$ , $m(\,\beta _i\,)=\beta _i^{\prime }$ and $m(\,\delta _i\,)=\delta _i^{\prime }$ naturally extends to an isomorphism in homology, that is, a map $m\colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow \mathrm {H}_1(X,\,\mathbb {Z})$ that provides the desired marking. Thus the triple $(X,\omega ,m)$ has period character $\chi $ and belongs to $\Omega \mathcal S_g(\,\mu \,)$ .
Notice that the stratum of marked differentials $\Omega \mathcal S_g(\,\mu \,)$ is generally disconnected; for example, if the underneat space $\mathcal H_g(\,\mu \,)$ itself is disconnected. In any case the isoperiodic fiber in $\Omega \mathcal S_g(\,\mu \,)$ intersects at least as many connected components as the isoperiodic fiber in $\mathcal H_g(\,\mu \,)$ does. In other words, Theorems A and B do not provide a full description of the mutual relations between strata in $\Omega \mathcal S_{g,n}$ and isoperiodic fibers. It naturally arises the following:
Question: Let $\mu $ be a signature and let $\pi (\,\mu \,)\colon \Omega \mathcal {S}_g(\,\mu \,)\longrightarrow \mathcal H_g(\,\mu \,)$ be the associated covering projection. If a representation $\chi $ can be realized in a connected component, say C, of $\mathcal H_g(\,\mu \,)$ , then can $\chi $ be realized in every connected component of $\pi (\,\mu \,)^{-1}\big (\,C\,\big )\subset \Omega \mathcal {S}_g(\,\mu \,)$ ?
Although a stratum $\mathcal H_g(\,\mu \,)$ has at most three connected components with the only exception being strata of genus-one meromorphic differentials, the corresponding stratum $\Omega \mathcal {S}_g(\,\mu \,)$ may have more connected components. This is the case of strata in $\Omega \mathcal T_g$ defined by pulling back the moduli space of differentials $\Omega \mathcal M_g\to \mathcal M_g$ to $\mathcal T_g$ . For a signature $\mu $ made only of positive integers, the connected components of $\Omega \mathcal T(\,\mu \,)$ have been classified by Calderon in [Reference CalderonCal20] and Calderon-Salter in [Reference Calderon and SalterCS21]. No classification is known for marked and homologically marked differentials on Riemann surfaces.
Geometry and topology of isoperiodic fibers
It is interesting to study under which conditions an isoperiodic fiber is connected. For holomorphic differentials it is known that the isoperiodic fibers in $\Omega \mathcal S_g$ are generically connected up to a few exceptions; see [Reference Calsamiglia, Deroin and FrancavigliaCDF23, Theorems 1.2 and 1.3]. In [Reference WinsorWin21], Winsor have studied the connectedness of the isoperiodic foliation for nonprincipal strata of holomorphic differentials in $\Omega \mathcal M_g$ . For meromorphic differentials with two simple poles an analogous result has recently been obtained in [Reference Calsamiglia and DeroinCD24]. It is worth mentioning that in [Reference Calsamiglia, Deroin and FrancavigliaCDF23, Reference Calsamiglia and DeroinCD24] the authors work with strata that have all simple zeros. It remains to study connected components of isoperiodic fibers for meromorphic differentials with general pole orders. The following statement is straightforward and follows by the fact that all strata of genus-zero differentials are connected.
Corollary D. Let $\chi $ be the trivial representation. Then its isoperiodic fiber in $\Omega \mathcal M_{0,n}$ is disconnected with the connected components being strata $\mathcal H_0(\,\mu \,)$ where $\mu $ is an integer partition of $-2$ .
For nontrivial representation less is known. In [Reference Faraco, Tahar and ZhangFTZ24], the second named author with Guillaume Tahar and Yongquan Zhang aims to study the isoperiodic foliations for $\mathcal H_1(1,1;\,-2)$ . Another direction is to study period realization of k-differentials for $k> 1$ , for example, $k=2$ is the case of quadratic differentials that is, half-translation surfaces. We plan to treat these questions in future works.
1.4 Isoresidual fibrations
Beyond the period map (7) defined above, we can define the so-called residual map that associates every translation surface $(X,\omega )$ its $n-$ tuple of residues of $\omega $ at the punctures. Recall that according to our convention $X\in \mathcal M_{g,n}$ and $\omega $ is a holomorphic differential on X with at most finite-order poles at the punctures. More precisely, for a signature $(\mu; \kappa )=(m_1,\dots ,m_k; -1^s, -p_1,\dots , -p_{n-s})$ , where $p_j\ge 2$ for $j=1,\dots ,n-s$ , we may consider the following space:
The residual map is thus defined as
that associates $(X,\omega )$ to $\big (\,\text {Res}_{P_i}(\omega )\,\big )_{i=1,\dots ,n}$ where the $\{\,P_i\,\}_{i=1,\dots ,n}$ is the set of punctures of X. In [Reference Gendron and TaharGT21], the authors showed that the restriction of the residual map $\mathfrak R_g(\mu; \kappa )$ to each connected component of $\mathcal H_g(\mu ;\kappa )$ is surjective provided that $g\ge 1$ ; see [Reference Gendron and TaharGT21, Theorem 1.1].
Remark. The residual map, however, generally fails to be surjective on strata of genus-zero differentials. [Reference Gendron and TaharGT21, Theorem 1.2] provides necessary conditions for a tuple $\big (\,r_1,\dots ,r_n\,\big )$ to lie in the image of $\mathfrak R_0(\mu ;\kappa )$ . The latter has been extended by the recent work [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorems B,C,D].
The main results of the work [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22] along with Theorem A provides another, independent, proof of [Reference Gendron and TaharGT21, Theorem 1.1]; that is,
Corollary E. Let $g\ge 1$ . The residual map restricted to each connected component of $\mathcal H_g(\mu ;\kappa )$ is surjective.
Proof of Corollary E provided Theorem A holds
Let $\kappa =(-1^s, -p_1,\dots , -p_{n-s})$ be the polar part of some signature $(\mu ;\kappa )$ and let $(r_1,\dots ,r_n)\in \mathcal R_g(\mu; \kappa )$ . Recall that $\pi _1\big (\,\mathbb S^2\setminus \{P_1,\dots ,P_n\}\,\big )\cong \mathbb Z^{n-1}$ is generated by a collection of peripheral loops $\gamma _1,\dots ,\gamma _{n}$ such that $\gamma _1\cdots \gamma _{n-1}\gamma _n^{-1}=1$ . Define $\chi _n$ as the unique character such that $\chi _n(\gamma _i)=r_i$ . Following [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem B,C,D], $\chi _n$ can be realized as the period character of some translation surface in the stratum $\mathcal H_0(m_1,m_2; -1^s, -p_1,\dots , -p_{n-s})$ . We next bubble g handles with positive volume (see Section §3.2) to realize a translation surface in $\mathcal H_g(\,m_1+m_2+2g\,;\, -1^s, -p_1,\dots , -p_{n-s}\,)$ . Finally break the zero (see Section §3.1), to get $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal H_g(\,\mu \,;\, -1^s, -p_1,\dots , -p_{n-s}\,)$ as desired.
By construction $(X,\omega )$ belongs to the fibre of $(r_1,\dots ,r_n)$ via the residual map $\mathfrak R_g(\mu ;\kappa )$ . Let $\chi $ be the period character of $(X,\omega )$ and notice that $\chi $ is not trivial. Since Theorem A ensures that it can be realized in every connected component of $\mathcal H_g(\,\mu \,;\, -1^s, -p_1,\dots , -p_{n-s}\,)$ , the result thus follows.
1.5 Structure of the paper
This paper is organized as follows. In Section §2 we review basic concepts about differentials and translation surfaces, their strata with prescribed orders of zeros and poles, and the geometric invariants that can distinguish connected components of the strata. In Section §3 we introduce several surgery operations that can be used to construct translation surfaces of higher genera and study how the concerned invariants change under these operations. In Section §4 we discuss a system of handle generators for the period domain in order to carry out inductive constructions. In Sections §5, we first prove Theorem A for surfaces of genus one. More precisely, for a nontrivial representation $\chi $ we provide a direct construction to realize a meromorphic genus-one differential with period character $\chi $ and prescribed invariants. The proof involves a case-by-case discussion according to Table 1; see Appendix A. In Section §6, we consider higher genus surfaces; that is, we shall suppose $g\ge 2$ . This section is entirely devoted to realize a representation as the period character of some hyperelliptic translation surface with poles in a give stratum. Next, in Section §7 we still consider higher genus surfaces and we aim to realize a given nontrivial representation as the period character of some translation structure with spin parity. The proof is based on an induction foundation having genus-one differentials as the base case. Therefore, this section is mainly devoted to show how to run the inductive process. We finally consider the trivial representation on its own right. In Section §8 we shall prove Theorem B for the cases of genus-one, hyperelliptic surfaces, surfaces with spin parity, and the trivial representation (which corresponds to exact differentials), respectively. Along the way we shall encounter and classify some exceptional strata in which the trivial representation cannot be realized for certain connected components. Finally in Appendix §A we provide a flowchart to illustrate the relations of the various cases in the course of the proof.
2 Translation surfaces with poles and meromorphic differentials
We begin by recalling the notion of translation structure on a topological surface by providing a geometric and a complex-analytic perspective.
A translation structure on a surface $S_{g,n}$ is a branched $({\mathbb C},{\mathbb C})$ -structure; that is, the datum of a maximal atlas where local charts in ${\mathbb C}$ have the form $z\longmapsto z^k$ , for $k\ge 1$ , and transition maps given by translations on their overlappings. Any such an atlas defines an underlying complex structure X and the pullbacks of the $1$ -form $dz$ on ${\mathbb C}$ via local charts globalize to a holomorphic differential $\omega $ on X. Vice versa, a holomorphic differential $\omega $ on a complex structure X defines a singular Euclidean metric with isolated singularities corresponding to the zeros of $\omega $ . In a neighborhood of a point P which is not a zero of $\omega $ , a local coordinate is defined as
in which $\omega =dz$ , and the coordinates of two overlapping neighborhoods differ by a translation $z\mapsto z+c$ for some $c\in \mathbb C$ . Around a zero, say P of order $k\ge 1$ , there exists a local coordinate z such that $\omega =z^kdz$ . The point P is also called a branch point because any local chart around it is locally a branched $k+1$ covering over ${\mathbb C}$ which is totally ramified at P.
Definition 2.1 (Translation surfaces with poles)
Let $\omega $ be a meromorphic differential on a compact Riemann surface $\overline {X}\in \mathcal {M}_g$ . We define a translation surface with poles to be the structure induced by $\omega $ on the surface $X = \overline {X}\setminus \Sigma $ , where $\Sigma $ is the set of poles of $\omega $ .
Given a translation structure $(X,\omega )$ on a surface $S_{g,n}$ , the local charts globalize to a holomorphic mapping $\text {dev}\colon \widetilde {S}_{g,n}\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ called the developing map, where $\widetilde {S}_{g,n}$ is the universal cover of $S_{g,n}$ . The translation structure on $S_{g,n}$ lifts to a translation structure $(\widetilde {X},\widetilde {\omega })$ and the developing map turns out to be locally univalent away from the zeros of $\widetilde {\omega }$ . The developing map, in particular, satisfies an equivariant property with respect to a representation $\chi \colon \text {H}_1(X,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ called holonomy of the translation structure. The following lemma establishes the relation between holonomy representations and period characters.
Lemma 2.2. A representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ is the period of some abelian differential $\omega \in \Omega (X)$ with respect to some complex structure X on $S_{g,n}$ if and only if it is the holonomy of the translation structure on $S_{g,n}$ determined by $\omega $ .
This twofold nature of a representation $\chi $ permits us to tackle our problem by adopting a geometric approach. More precisely, in order to realize a representation $\chi $ on a prescribed connected component of some stratum of differentials, we shall realize it as the holonomy of some translation surface with poles $(X,\omega )$ with prescribed zeros and poles and, whenever they are defined, with prescribed spin structure or hyperelliptic involution. Some remarks are in order.
Remark 2.3. Let $\omega $ be a meromorphic differential on a compact Riemann surface $\overline {X}\in \mathcal {M}_g$ which yields a translation surface $(X,\omega )$ with poles of finite orders $p_1,\dots ,p_n$ , $n\ge 1$ . Let $m_1,\dots ,m_k$ be the orders of zeros of $\omega $ . Then it is well known that the following equality holds:
Remark 2.4. Let $(X,\omega )$ be a translation surface, possibly with poles, and let us denote $X^*=X\setminus \{\text {zeros of }\omega \}$ and pick any point $x_0\in X^*$ . Since the structure is flat, the parallel transport induced by the flat connection yields a homomorphism from $\pi _1(X^*,\,x_0)$ to $\mathrm {SO}(2,\mathbb R)\cong \mathbb S^1$ which acts on the tangent space of $x_0$ . Since $\mathbb S^1$ is abelian, such a homomorphism factors through the homology group, and hence, we have a well-defined homomorphism $\text {PT}\colon \mathrm {H}_1(X^*,\,\mathbb Z)\to \mathrm {SO}(2,\mathbb R)\cong \mathbb S^1$ . For translation surfaces this homomorphism turns out to be trivial in the sense that a parallel transport of a vector tangent to the Riemann surface X along any closed path avoiding the zeros of $\omega $ brings the vector back to itself.
Remark 2.5. Let $x_0\in (X,\omega )$ be a regular point; that is, $x_0$ is not a zero for $\omega $ . A given tangent direction at $x_0$ can be extended to all other regular points by means of the parallel transport. This yields a nonsingular foliation which extends to a singular foliation with singularities at the branch points. Let $z=x+iy$ be a local coordinate at $x_0$ . The horizontal foliation is the oriented foliation determined by the positive real direction in the coordinate z. Notice that this is well defined because different local coordinates differ by a translation. In the same fashion, the vertical foliation is the oriented foliation determined by the positive purely imaginary direction in the coordinate z.
2.1 Volume
We now discuss the notion of volume which plays an important role in the theory. For our purposes, we shall mostly interested in the algebraic volume which is a topological invariant associated to a representation $\chi $ .
Let us recall this notion in the holomorphic case. For a symplectic basis $\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ of $\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g},\mathbb {Z})$ we define the volume of a representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ as the quantity
where $\Im (\overline {z}w)$ is the usual symplectic form on ${\mathbb C}$ . As a consequence, this algebraic definition of volume of a character $\chi $ is invariant under precomposition with any automorphisms in $\mathrm {Aut}\,\big (\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g},\mathbb {Z})\big )\cong \mathrm {Sp}(2g,{\mathbb Z})$ . The image of $\chi $ , provided it has rank $2g$ , turns out to be a polarized module.
Haupt’s conditions. As already alluded in the introduction, there are some obstructions for realizing $\chi $ as the period character of some holomorphic differential $\omega $ on a compact Riemann surface X and both of these concern the volume. We shall recall them here for the reader’s convenience. The first requirement is that the volume of $\chi $ has to be positive with respect to some symplectic basis of $\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g},\mathbb {Z})$ . Indeed, one can show that this equals the area of the surface X endowed with the singular Euclidean metric induced by $\omega $ . There is a second obstruction that applies in the case $g\geq 2$ and only when the image of $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g},\mathbb {Z})\to {\mathbb C}$ is a lattice, say $\Lambda $ in ${\mathbb C}$ . In fact, one can show that in this special case $(X,\omega )$ arises from a branched cover of the flat torus ${\mathbb C}/\Lambda $ . In particular, the following inequality must hold: $\mathrm {vol}(\chi )\ge 2\,\text {{Area}}(\mathbb C/\Lambda )$ . Haupt’s Theorem says that these are the only obstructions for realizing $\chi $ as the period of some holomorphic differential.
Remark 2.6. We provide here an alternative and more geometric definition of volume. Let X be a compact Riemann surface and let $\omega \in \Omega (X)$ be a (possibly meromorphic) differential with period character $\chi $ . Let E be the complex line bundle over X canonically associated to $\chi $ and let $f\colon X\longrightarrow E$ be a section. By lifting the map f to $\widetilde {f}\colon \widetilde {X}\longrightarrow \widetilde {X}\times \mathbb C$ and projecting onto the second coordinate, the natural volume form $\frac {i}{2}dz\wedge d\overline {z}$ on $\mathbb C$ pulls back to a volume form over X. The quantity given by the integration of this form over X, that is
is the area of the singular Euclidean metric determined by $\omega $ on X. In particular, by means of Riemann’s bilinear relations one can show that it agrees with the algebraic definition of volume as in Equation (14).
Definition 2.7. Let $\omega \in \Omega (X)$ be a holomorphic differential on a compact Riemann surface X with period character $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ . We define the algebraic volume of $\omega $ as the quantity $\mathrm {vol}(\,\chi )$ defined in formula (14). Notice that the algebraic volume is well defined since the volume of $\chi $ does not depend on the choice of the symplectic basis for $\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g},\mathbb {Z})$ .
We now extend the notion of volume to meromorphic differentials. In this case, the notion of volume relies on a choice of a splitting of $S_{g,n}$ as the connected sum of the closed surface $S_{g}$ and the n-punctured sphere. Let $\gamma $ be a simple closed separating curve in $S_{g,n}$ that bounds a subsurface homeomorphic to $S_{g,1}$ . There is a natural embedding $S_{g,1}\hookrightarrow S_{g,n}$ and thence an injection $\imath _g\colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g},\mathbb {Z}) \longrightarrow \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})$ because the curve $\gamma $ is trivial in homology. In the same fashion, $\gamma $ bounds a subsurface homeomorphic to $S_{0,n+1}$ and the natural embedding $S_{0,n+1}\hookrightarrow S_{g,n}$ yields an injection $\imath _n\colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{0,n},\,\mathbb Z)\to \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})$ . Therefore, given a splitting as above, any representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ gives rise to two representations $\chi _g=\chi \circ \imath _g$ and $\chi _n=\chi \circ \imath _n$ that determine $\chi $ completely.
Definition 2.8. A representation $\chi $ is said to be of trivial-ends type if $\chi _n$ is trivial, otherwise it is said to be of nontrivial-ends type. The representation $\chi _n$ is always well defined and in fact it does not depend on the choice of any splitting. In particular, if $\chi $ is the period character of some pair $(X,\omega )$ , then $\chi _n$ records the residues of the differential at the n poles.
Remark 2.9. It is worth noticing that a representation $\chi _g$ generally depends on the embedding $S_{g,1}\hookrightarrow S_{g,n}$ and in fact on the curve $\gamma $ along which we split $S_{g,n}$ . However, it is not hard to see that $\chi _g$ is uniquely determined if and only if $\chi $ is of trivial-ends type.
We can now introduce the following:
Definition 2.10. Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\to {\mathbb C}$ be a representation of trivial-ends type. We define the volume of $\chi $ as the volume of $\chi _g$ as defined in Equation (14). Let $\omega \in \Omega (X)$ be a holomorphic differential on $X\in \mathcal {M}_{g,n}$ with finite-order poles at the punctures and such that its period character $\chi $ is of trivial-ends type. Then we can define the algebraic volume of $\omega $ as the volume of $\chi $ . Notice that the algebraic volume does not depend on the choice of the splitting.
Remark 2.11. In the case that a meromorphic differential admits poles with nonzero residues, that is, its period character has nontrivial $\chi _n$ part, then the algebraic volume as in Definition 2.10 does depend on the splitting. In fact if we alter a closed loop representing a homology class by making it go across a pole with nonzero residue, its period will change by the amount of the residue.
2.2 Further invariants on translation surfaces
In Section §2.1 we have introduced the volume as an algebraic invariant naturally attached to a representation $\chi $ . In the present section we are going to introduce geometric invariants which we shall use to distinguish the connected components of strata whenever they fail to be connected.
2.2.1 Rotation number
In this subsection $\overline {X}$ is a compact Riemann surface of genus one, that is, an elliptic curve $\mathbb C/\Lambda $ with $\Lambda $ a lattice in $\mathbb C$ . We will introduce an invariant very specific to genus-one translation surfaces with poles.
Let X be a complex structure on $S_{1,n}$ , where $n\ge 1$ , and let $\omega \in \Omega (X)$ be an abelian differential on X with finite order poles at the punctures. Recall that away from the zeros and poles of $\omega $ there is a well-defined horizontal direction and hence a nonsingular horizontal foliation on $X\setminus \{\text { zeros of }\omega \,\}$ . Such a foliation extends to a singular horizontal foliation over the zeros of $\omega $ . In fact, for a zero, say P, of order k there are exactly $k+1$ horizontal directions leaving from P. Let $\gamma $ be a simple smooth curve parametrized by the arc length. Assume in addition that $\gamma $ avoids all the zeros and poles of $\omega $ . We shall define the index of $\gamma $ as a numerical invariant given by the comparison of the unit tangent field $\dot \gamma (t)$ and the unit vector field along $\gamma $ given by unit vectors tangent to the horizontal direction. More precisely, let us denote by $u(t)$ the unit vector at $\gamma (t)$ tangent to the leaf of the horizontal foliation through $\gamma (t)$ , then the assignment
defines a mapping $f_\gamma \colon \mathbb S^1\longrightarrow \mathbb S^1$ .
Definition 2.12. The index of $\gamma $ is defined as $\deg (f_\gamma )$ and denoted by $\mathrm {Ind}(\gamma )$ .
Convention. We agree that $\mathbb S^1$ is counterclockwise oriented. As a consequence we agree that the index of $\mathrm {Ind}(\gamma )=\deg (f_\gamma )$ is positive is $\gamma $ is counterclockwise oriented.
The index $\mathrm {Ind}(\gamma )$ of a closed curve $\gamma $ measures the number of times the unit tangent vector field spins with respect to the direction given by the horizontal foliation. Since for translation surfaces the parallel transport yields a trivial homomorphism; see Remark 2.4, the total change of the angle is $2\pi \,\mathrm {Ind}(\gamma )$ .
We now allow perturbations of $\gamma $ in its homotopy class. The index of any curve remains unchanged if, while deforming it, we do not cross a zero or pole of $\omega $ . On the other hand, whenever we cross a zero or pole of order k the index of $\gamma $ changes by $\pm k$ . As a consequence, the index of a curve is well defined for homotopy classes in $\pi _1(\overline {X}\setminus \{\text {zeros and poles of }\omega \})$ . We can now define the rotation number.
Definition 2.13. Let $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal {H}_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k; -p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ be a genus-one translation surface with poles. Let $\{\alpha ,\beta \}$ be a symplectic basis of $\mathrm {H}_1(\overline {X},\,\mathbb Z)$ , the first homology group of $\overline {X}$ . Let $\gamma _\alpha $ and $\gamma _\beta $ be the representatives of $\alpha $ and $\beta $ respectively. Assume they are both parametrized by the arc length and avoid the zeros and poles of $\omega $ . The rotation number of $(X,\omega )$ is defined as
In the next subsection we briefly introduce the rotation number in a more algebraic way that we shall use only in the final Section §8. Notice that the well-known properties of $\gcd $ make the rotation number $\mathrm {rot}(X,\omega )$ well defined for a given element $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal {H}_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k; -p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ . As we shall see in Section §2.3, the rotation number is used to distinguish the connected components of a generic stratum of genus-one differentials $\mathcal {H}_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k; -p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ .
2.2.2 Hyperelliptic translation surface
For a complex structure X on $S_{g,n}$ we shall denote by $\overline {X}$ the compact Riemann surface obtained by filling the punctures with complex charts. Let us now introduce the following:
Definition 2.14. A translation surface $(X,\omega )$ (possibly with poles) is said to be hyperelliptic if the Riemann surface $\overline {X}$ is hyperelliptic and $\omega $ is anti-invariant under the hyperelliptic involution $\tau $ , that is, $\tau ^*\omega =-\omega $ ).
Remark 2.15. For a hyperelliptic translation surface $(X, \omega )$ , the hyperelliptic involution $\tau $ realizes an isometry between the singular Euclidean structures determined by the differentials $\omega $ and $-\omega $ on $\overline {X}$ . Therefore, not all strata can admit hyperelliptic translation surfaces. In fact, if $\omega $ has two zeros (or two poles) that are swapped by $\tau $ then they must have the same order, and if a zero (or a pole) is fixed by $\tau $ then it must have even order.
Note that there are no nonzero holomorphic one-forms on the sphere. As a result, every holomorphic differential $\omega $ on a hyperelliptic Riemann surface X is anti-invariant under the hyperelliptic involution, and hence, in this case $(X,\omega )$ is always a hyperelliptic translation surface. For meromorphic differentials such a scenario is no longer true as shown by the following example.
Example 2.16. Let us consider the translation structure with a single pole on the Riemann sphere $\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ determined by the meromorphic differential $dz$ . Let $l_1,\,l_2,\,l_3 \subset \mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ be three geodesic segments for the standard Euclidean structure and slit $\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ along them. The resulting slit surface is homeomorphic to a sphere with three open disjoint disks removed. Geometrically, the resulting surface is a pair of pants equipped with a Euclidean structure and piece-wise geodesic boundary. In fact, each boundary component comprises two geodesic segments, say $l_{ij}$ with $i=1,2,3$ and $j=1,2$ , and two corner points each one of angle $2\pi $ . We consider two copies of this latter surface and we glue them by identifying the boundary segments having the same label. The final surface turns out to be a compact Riemann surface X of genus two equipped with a meromorphic differential $\omega $ with six zeros of order $1$ and two poles of order $2$ . The Riemann surface X, being compact of genus two, admits a hyperelliptic involution $\tau $ . We want to show with a direct computation that $(X,\omega )$ is not hyperelliptic.
Let $\pi \colon X\longrightarrow \mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ be the $2$ -fold branched covering that naturally arises from our construction. The differential $\omega $ satisfies the equation $\omega =\pi ^*(dz)$ . According to Definition 2.14 above, $(X,\omega )$ is hyperelliptic if and only if $\tau ^*(\omega )=-\omega $ . On the other hand, being of genus two, the hyperelliptic involution $\tau $ is an automorphism of X and commutes with the projection $\pi \colon X\longrightarrow \mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ in the sense that $\pi \circ \tau =\pi $ . Therefore, $\omega = \pi ^{*}(dz) = \tau ^{*}(\omega )$ and hence
which provides the desired contradiction.
2.2.3 Spin structure
The last geometric invariant we shall introduce is the spin structure. Let X be a compact Riemann surface and let P be a principal $\mathbb S^1$ -bundle over X. A spin structure on X is a choice of a linear functional $\xi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(P,\, \mathbb Z_2)\to \mathbb Z_2$ having nonzero value on the cycle representing the fiber $\mathbb S^1$ of P. This is equivalent to a choice of a double covering $Q\longrightarrow P$ whose restriction to each fiber of P is a $2$ -fold covering of $\mathbb S^1$ .
Recall that an element of $\mathrm {H}_1(P,\, \mathbb Z_2)$ can be regarded as a framed closed curve in X, by which we mean a closed curve in X and a smooth unit vector field along it. For a simple closed curve $\gamma $ in X there is a preferred frame given by its unit tangent vector field. We shall denote such a framed closed curve as $\vec {\gamma }$ . This is well defined in the sense that two homologous closed curves $\gamma ,\,\delta \in \mathrm {H}_1(X,\, \mathbb Z_2)$ yield homologous framed closed curves $\vec {\gamma },\,\vec {\delta }$ ; see [Reference JohnsonJoh80, Section 3]. The canonical lift of a simple closed curve $\gamma $ is defined as $\widetilde {\gamma }=\vec {\gamma }+\textbf {z}$ where $\textbf {z}\in \mathrm {H}_1(P,\, \mathbb Z_2)$ is the homology class represented by the fiber $\mathbb S^1$ . The assignment $\gamma \longmapsto \widetilde {\gamma }$ defines a mapping of sets $\mathrm {H}_1(X,\, \mathbb Z_2)\to \mathrm {H}_1(P,\, \mathbb Z_2)$ which fails to be a homomorphism; see [Reference JohnsonJoh80]. Nevertheless, post-composition of such a map with a spin structure $\xi $ yields a quadratic form $\Omega _\xi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(X,\, \mathbb Z_2)\to \mathbb Z_2$ defined as
According to [Reference ArfArf41] and [Reference JohnsonJoh80, Section 5] we shall introduce the following:
Definition 2.17. For a symplectic basis $\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ of $\mathrm {H}_1(X,\, \mathbb Z_2)$ the Arf-invariant of $\Omega _\xi $ is defined by the formula
The parity of a spin structure $\xi $ is defined as the Arf-invariant of $\Omega _\xi $ . In particular, the parity of $\xi $ does not depend on the choice of the symplectic basis.
Let X be a complex structure on $S_{g,n}$ , with $g\ge 1$ , and $\omega \in \Omega (X)$ be an abelian differential on X with poles of finite order at the punctures. Recall that we can regard $\omega $ as a meromorphic differential on a compact Riemann surface $\overline {X}$ . Whenever $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal {H}_g(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k;-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ , then $\omega $ defines a natural spin structure on $\overline {X}$ as follows.
Let $\gamma $ be a simple closed curve parametrized by the arc length, and let $\vartheta $ be a unit vector field along $\gamma $ . The couple $(\gamma , \vartheta )$ defines a framed closed curve, that is, an element of $\mathrm {H}_1(P,\,\mathbb Z_2)$ . Recall that $\omega $ defines a nonsingular horizontal foliation away from zeros and poles, and hence, the unit vector field $\vartheta $ can be compared to the unit vector field along $\gamma $ tangent to the horizontal foliation. In fact, as in Section §2.2.1, this can be done by means of a mapping $f_{(\gamma ,\vartheta )}\colon \mathbb S^1\to \mathbb S^1$ defined as in Equation (16). The spin structure induced by the meromorphic differential $\omega $ on $\overline {X}$ is then defined as the $\mathbb Z_2$ -value linear functional
A direct application of Equation (21) shows that, for the canonical lift $\widetilde {\gamma }$ of $\gamma $ , the spin structure determined by $\omega $ satisfies the property
As a consequence, we can apply formula (20) to compute the parity $\varphi (\omega )$ of the spin structure determined by a meromorphic differential $\omega $ . Given a symplectic basis $\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ of $\mathrm {H}_1(X,\, \mathbb Z_2)$ , it follows that
It is straightforward to check that $\varphi (\omega )$ does not depend on the choice of the symplectic basis. Finally, it follows from works of Atiyah in [Reference AtiyahAti71] and Mumford in [Reference MumfordMum71] that the spin parity is invariant under continuous deformations.
Remark 2.18. Let $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal {H}_g(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k,-1,-1)$ be a genus-g meromorphic differential with two simple poles. The meromorphic differential $\omega $ does not define any spin structure as in Equation (21) because, for any curve $\gamma $ , the index $\mathrm {Ind}(\gamma )$ is not longer well defined as an element of $\mathbb Z_2$ ; see formula (22). Nevertheless, we can still define an invariant that turns out to be the spin parity of some structure $(Y,\xi )$ in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_{g+1}(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k)$ . Recall that a neighborhood of a simple pole is an infinite cylinder. Around a puncture of $(X,\omega )$ , we can find a simple closed geodesic curve. In fact, there are infinitely many of such curves. Choose a waist geodesic curve on each cylinder and truncate $(X,\omega )$ along them. Since $(X,\omega )$ has only two simple poles and their residues are opposite (and nonzero), the curves above are isometric. We glue them and the resulting object is a translation structure on a closed surface of genus $g+1$ . We define this latter as $(Y, \xi )$ , and it lies in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_{g+1}(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k)$ by construction. Therefore, it makes sense to consider a parity of the spin structure for differentials in $\mathcal {H}_g(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k,-1,-1)$ . See [Reference BoissyBoi15, Section 5.3] for more details.
2.3 Moduli spaces and connected components
As alluded in the introduction, the moduli space $\Omega \mathcal {M}_{g,n}$ admits a natural stratification given by unordered partitions $(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ of $2g-2$ , where negative integers are allowed only in the case of meromorphic differentials. In the present subsection, we aim to recall for the reader’s convenience the classifications of connected components of the strata both in the holomorphic and meromorphic cases.
Let us discuss first the case of holomorphic differentials which has been studied by Kontsevich–Zorich in [Reference Kontsevich and ZorichKZ03, Theorems 1 and 2]. For low-genus surfaces, that is, $g=2,3$ , we have the following:
Theorem (Kontsevich–Zorich). The moduli space of abelian differentials on a curve of genus $g = 2$ contains two strata: $\mathcal {H}_2(1,1)$ and $\mathcal {H}_2(2)$ . Each of them is connected and coincides with its hyperelliptic component. Each of the strata $\mathcal {H}_3(2,2)$ , $\mathcal {H}_3(4)$ of the moduli space of abelian differentials on a curve of genus $g = 3$ has two connected components: the hyperelliptic one and one having odd spin structure. The other strata are connected for genus $g = 3$ .
For surfaces of genus $g\ge 4$ , the following classification holds.
Theorem (Kontsevich–Zorich). All connected components of any stratum of abelian differentials on a curve of genus $g\ge 4$ are described by the following list:
-
• The stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2g-2)$ has three connected components: the hyperelliptic one and two other components corresponding to even and odd spin structures;
-
• the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2l,2l)$ , $l\ge 2$ has three connected components: the hyperelliptic one and two other components distinguished by the spin parity;
-
• all the other strata of the form $\mathcal {H}_g(2l_1,\dots ,2l_n)$ , where all $l_i \ge 1$ , have two connected components corresponding to even and odd spin structures;
-
• the strata $\mathcal {H}_g(2l-1, 2l-1)$ , $l\ge 2$ have two connected components: One comprises hyperelliptic structures and the other does not; finally,
-
• all the other strata of abelian differentials on the curves of genus $g\ge 4$ are nonempty and connected.
Let us discuss the case of meromorphic differentials and begin from the case of genus-one meromorphic differentials. Let $\mathcal {H}_{1}(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ be a stratum in $\Omega \mathcal {M}_{1,n}$ , and let d be the number of positive divisors of $\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k,p_1,\dots ,p_n)$ . Recall that a stratum is nonempty as soon as the Gauss–Bonnet condition holds for some nonnegative integer g; see Remark 2.3, and $\sum p_i>1$ . In [Reference BoissyBoi15, Theorem 1.1], Boissy showed the following.
Theorem (Boissy). Let $\mathcal {H}_{1}(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ be a nonempty stratum of genus-one meromorphic differentials. Denote by d the number of positive divisors of $\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k,p_1,\dots ,p_k)$ . Then the number of connected components of this stratum is:
-
• $d-1$ connected components if $k=n=1$ . In this case, the stratum is $\mathcal {H}_1(m,-m)$ and the connected components are parametrized by the positive divisors of m different from m itself.
-
• d otherwise. In this case, each connected component is parametrized by a positive divisor of $\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k,p_1,\dots ,p_k)$ .
Common divisors of the zero and pole orders in the above result are called rotation numbers. It is worth mentioning that connected components of the strata in genus one can also be classified by another invariant from the algebraic viewpoint; see [Reference Chen and CoskunCC14, Section §3.2]. For a stratum $\mathcal H_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k;\,-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ of genus-one differentials, let l be any positive divisor of $\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k,p_1,\dots ,p_n)$ – with the only exception being $l=n$ for signatures of the form $(n;-n)$ . We shall say that $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal H_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k;\,-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ has torsion number l if l is the largest positive integer such that
where $\{Z_i,\dots ,Z_n\}$ and $\{P_1,\dots ,P_n\}$ are, respectively, the set of zeros and poles of $\omega $ . Here, $\sim $ stands for linear equivalence which means there exists a meromorphic function on the underlying Riemann surface with zeros at $\{Z_1,\dots , Z_k\}$ and poles at $\{P_1,\dots ,P_n\}$ with orders given by the coefficients in the relation. We shall use this characterisation in Section §8 to show a few lemmas concerning the exceptional cases listed in Theorem B.
Remark 2.19. The two notions of rotation numbers and torsion numbers coincide; see [Reference TaharTah18, Section §3.4] and [Reference Chen and GendronCG22, Section §3.4 and Proposition 3.13].
For genus-g meromorphic differentials with $g\ge 2$ , the classifications of connected components is similar to that of holomorphic differentials. Let $\mathcal {H}_{g}(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ be a stratum in $\Omega \mathcal {M}_{g,n}$ . In [Reference BoissyBoi15], Boissy has showed that a stratum admits a hyperelliptic component if and only if it is one of the following:
for some $m\ge p\ge 1$ , otherwise there is no hyperelliptic component. According to Boissy, we introduce the following.
Definition 2.20. For a stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(\kappa ;-\nu )$ we shall say that the set of zeros and poles is
-
• of hyperelliptic type if $\kappa =\{2m\}$ or $\{m,m\}$ and $\nu =\{2p\}$ or $\{p,p\}$ , where m and p are positive integers;
-
• of even type if $\kappa =(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k)$ and $\nu =(2p_1,\dots ,2p_n)$ or $\nu =(1,1)$ .
We shall say that a translation surface is of even type if it belongs to a stratum of even type, namely the set of zeros and poles is of even type.
Remark 2.21. A stratum of hyperelliptic type admits a connected component such that every $(X,\omega )$ parameterized by this component is a hyperelliptic translation surface as described in Definition 2.14. In contrast, certain strata that are not of hyperelliptic type can still contain lower-dimensional loci parameterizing hyperelliptic translation surfaces. For example, holomorphic differentials on genus-three hyperelliptic Riemann surfaces with a double zero fixed by the hyperelliptic involution $\tau $ and two simple zeros swapped by $\tau $ are hyperelliptic translation surfaces. However, their parameter space is a proper subset of the stratum $\mathcal {H}_3(2,1,1)$ which is not of hyperelliptic type.
We now state the following result due to Boissy concerning connected components of the strata of genus-g meromorphic differentials with $g\ge 2$ .
Theorem (Boissy). Let $\mathcal {H}_g(\kappa ,-\nu )=\mathcal {H}_{g}(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ be a nonempty stratum of genus-g meromorphic differentials. We have the following:
-
• If $p_1+\cdots +p_n$ is odd and greater than two, then the stratum is connected.
-
• If $\nu =\{2\}$ or $\nu =\{1,1\}$ and $g=2$ , then we distinguish two cases:
-
– if the set of poles and zeros is of hyperelliptic type, then there are two connected components, one hyperelliptic, the other not; in this case, these two components are also distinguished by the parity of the spin structure,
-
– otherwise the stratum is connected
-
-
• If $\nu $ is not $\{2\},\,\{1,1\}$ , that is, $p_1+\cdots +p_n>2$ ) or $g\ge 3$ , then we distinguish two cases as follows
-
– if the set of poles and zeros is of hyperelliptic type, there is exactly one hyperelliptic connected component and one or two nonhyperelliptic components that are described below. Otherwise, there is no hyperelliptic component.
-
– if the set of poles and zeros is of even type, then the stratum contains exactly two nonhyperelliptic connected components that are distinguished by the parity of the spin structure. Otherwise, the stratum contains exactly one nonhyperelliptic component.
-
This concludes the classification of the strata of meromorphic differentials.
3 Surgeries and isoperiodic deformations
In this section, we recall a few surgeries we shall use in the sequel. These all basically consist of cutting a given translation surfaces along one, or possibly more, geodesic segment(s) and gluing them back along those segments in order to get new translation structures. Different gluings will provide different translation structures.
3.1 Breaking a zero
The surgery we are going to describe has been introduced by Eskin–Masur–Zorich in [Reference Eskin, Masur and ZorichEMZ03, Section 8.1] and it literally ‘breaks up’ a zero in two, or possibly more, zeros of lower orders. Complex-analytically this can be thought as the analogue to the classical Schiffer variations for Riemann surfaces; see [Reference NagNag85]. This surgery only modifies a translation surface on a contractible neighborhood of the initial zero. In particular, after the surgery the resulting surface has the same genus as the former one but the type of zero orders is changed. Moreover, the new translation surface we obtain after the surgery has the same period character as the original one. As a consequence, this operation produces small deformation of the original translation structure in the same isoperiodic fiber.
Remark 3.1. In the context of branched projective structures, such a surgery is also known as movement of branched points and it has been originally introduced by Tan in [Reference TanTan94, Chapter 6] for showing the existence of a complex one-dimensional continuous family of deformations of a given structure.
Let us now explain this surgery in more detail. Let $(X,\omega )$ be a translation surface possibly with poles. Breaking a zero is a procedure that takes place at the $\varepsilon $ -neighbourhood of some zero of order m of the differential on which it looks like the pull-back of the form $dz$ via a branched covering $z\mapsto z^{m+1}$ . The differential is then modified by a surgery inside this $\varepsilon $ -neighbourhood. Once this surgery is performed, we obtain a new translation structure with two zeros of order $m_1$ and $m_2$ such that $m_1+m_2 = m$ . Furthermore, the translation structure remains unchanged outside the $\varepsilon $ -neighbourhood of such a zero of order m. The idea is to consider the $\varepsilon $ -neighbourhood of a zero of order m as $m+1$ copies of a disc D of radius $\varepsilon $ whose diameters are identified in a specified way. We can see this family of discs as a collection of $m+1$ upper half-discs and $m+1$ lower half-discs. See figure 2.
We now break a zero of order m into two zeros of order $m_1$ and $m_2$ . To break a zero consists of identifying the diameters of the starting $m+1$ discs in a different way as follows. In order to do this, we modify the labelling on the upper half-disc indexed by $0$ , the lower half-disc indexed by $m_1$ , and all upper and lower half-discs with index more than $m_1$ accordingly. The modified labelling is shown below in Figure 3 for the case of splitting a zero of order $2$ into two zeros of order $1$ .
We now identify $ul_i$ with $ll_i$ and $lr_i$ with $ur_{i+1}$ as before with the added identification of $um$ with $lm$ . This identification gives two zeros A and B, where A is a zero of the differential of order $k_1$ and B is a zero of order $k_2$ . We also get a geodesic line segment joining A and B. Given $c \in \mathbb {C}\setminus \{0\}$ with length less than $2\varepsilon $ , we can perform the surgery in such a way that the line segment joining A and B is c. It is also clear that such a deformation of the translation structure is only local. This procedure can be repeated multiple times to obtain zeros of orders $m_1, \dots , m_k$ from a single zero of order $m_1 + \cdots + m_k$ . We shall frequently rely on this procedure of breaking a zero in the remaining part of this paper. The following lemmas are easy to establish.
Lemma 3.2. Let $(X,\omega )$ be a genus-one differential with rotation number r. Let $(Y,\xi )$ be a genus-one meromorphic differential in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ which is obtained from $(X,\omega )$ by breaking a zero. If r divides $\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k,p_1,\dots ,p_n)$ , then $(Y,\xi )$ has rotation number r.
Lemma 3.3. Breaking a zero does not alter the spin structure of a genus-g differential for $g\ge 2$ .
Lemma 3.4. Let $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal {H}_g(2m;-\nu )$ be a hyperelliptic translation surface, where $\nu =\{2m-2g+2\}$ , or $\{m-g+1,\,m-g+1\}$ , and let $(Y,\xi )$ be the structure in $\mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-\nu )$ obtained from $(X,\omega )$ by breaking a zero. Then $(Y,\xi )$ is hyperelliptic.
3.2 Bubbling a handle with positive volume
We now describe a second surgery introduced by Kontsevich and Zorich in [Reference Kontsevich and ZorichKZ03]. In their paper, this surgery is defined for holomorphic differentials, but, as already observed by Boissy in [Reference BoissyBoi15], the same surgery can be defined for meromorphic differentials because this is a local surgery. Topologically, bubbling a handle with positive volume consists of adding a handle, say $\Sigma $ to a given surface. Let us see how this can be done metrically. Let $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal {H}_g(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ be a translation surface, possibly with finite order poles. Let $l\subset (X,\omega )$ be a geodesic segment with distinct end points.
We slit the translation surface $(X,\omega )$ along l, and we label the side that has the surface on its left as $l^+$ and the other side as $l^-$ . We then paste the extremal points of the geodesic segment, and the resulting surface has two geodesic boundary components having (by construction) the same length. Let $\mathcal {P}\subset \mathbb C$ be a parallelogram such that the two opposite sides are both parallel to l (via the developing map) – the handle $\Sigma $ is obtained by gluing the opposite sides of $\mathcal {P}$ . We can paste such a parallelogram to the slit $(X,\omega )$ , and the resulting topological surface is homeomorphic to $S_{g+1,n}$ . Metrically, we have a new translation surface $(Y,\xi )$ . We can distinguish three mutually disjoint possibilities:
-
1. Both of the extremal points of $l\subset (X,\omega )$ are regular, then $(Y,\xi )\in \mathcal {H}_g(2,m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ ,
-
2. One of the extremal points of $l\subset (X,\omega )$ is a zero of $\omega $ of order $m_i$ , where $1\le i\le k$ , then $(Y,\xi )$ belongs to the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(m_1,\dots ,m_i+2,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ ,
-
3. Both of the extremal points are zeros of $\omega $ of orders $m_i,\,m_j$ , respectively, then $(Y,\xi )$ belongs to the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(m_1,\dots ,\widehat {m}_i,\dots ,\widehat {m}_j,\dots ,m_i+m_j+2,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ .
The following holds.
Lemma 3.5. Let $(X,\omega )$ be a translation surface obtained from $(Y,\xi )\in \mathcal {H}_{g}\big (2m_1,\dots ,2m_k;-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n\big )$ by bubbling a handle along a slit. Let $2\pi (l+1)$ be the angle around one of the extremal points of the slit, where $l=2m_i\ge 2$ for some $i=1,\dots ,k$ or $l=0$ . Then, the spin structures determined by $\omega $ and $\xi $ are related as follows
In particular, bubbling a handle does not alter the spin parity.
Remark 3.6. It is worth noticing that this lemma differs from [Reference Kontsevich and ZorichKZ03, Lemma 11] because definition of bubbling is different in principle. More precisely, in the present paper a bubbling is performed along a geodesic segment that joins two points, possibly regular. In [Reference Kontsevich and ZorichKZ03], however, the bubbling of a handle is performed along a saddle connection that joins two zeros obtained after breaking a zero. This preliminary operation is the reason of a possible alteration of the spin parity because, by breaking a zero, the resulting structure may no longer be of even type. More precisely, if we break a zeros of $\omega $ on a structure of even type, the resulting zeros both have even order or odd order. In the former case, bubbling a handle does not alter the parity but in the latter case it does. [Reference Kontsevich and ZorichKZ03, Lemma 11] takes into account this possibility. Here, we do not break any zero for bubbling a handle, and hence, the spin parity remains unaltered.
Proof of Lemma 3.5
By keeping in mind Remark 3.6, the result follows as in [Reference Kontsevich and ZorichKZ03, Lemma 11].
3.3 Bubbling a handle with nonpositive volume
We have seen above how to glue a handle with positive volume on a given translation surface $(X,\omega )$ . Here, we briefly describe a way to glue a handle with nonpositive volume and nontrivial periods; we shall describe a way to add handles with trivial periods in subsection §8.1. Topologically, this surgery deletes the interior of a parallelogram with distinct vertices on $(X,\omega )$ whose sides are given by the absolute periods of the handle we want to glue.
This includes the case in which the parallelogram is degenerate, that is, with empty interior, and the surgery reduces to slit along a segment. Since this construction is a local surgery, we explain how the gluing works in the complex plane because the same argument applies to any simply connected open neighborhood of $(X,\omega )$ . Let $a,b\in \mathbb C$ be real-collinear complex numbers with argument $\theta $ . Let l be a segment in $\mathbb C$ with slope $\theta $ and length equal to $|a|+|b|$ . Denote by $P_1$ and $P_3$ the end points of l. Slit $\mathbb C$ along l, and denote the resulting sides $l^{\pm }$ . More precisely, let $l^+$ denote the side of l leaving $\mathbb C$ on the right, and let $l^-$ denote the side of l leaving $\mathbb C$ on the left. On $l^+$ , let $P_2$ be the point at distance $|a|$ from $P_1$ . In the same fashion, on $l^-$ let $P_4$ be the point at distance $|a|$ from $P_3$ . We next identify the oriented segment $\overline {P_1\,P_2}$ with the oriented segment $\overline {P_4\,P_3}$ . Finally, identify the oriented segment $\overline {P_2\,P_3}$ with the oriented segment $\overline {P_1\,P_4}$ . The result is a handle with absolute periods $a,\,b\in \mathbb C$ and, by construction, it has volume zero; see volume formula (14) and Figure 5.
We shall need the following lemmas.
Lemma 3.7. If $(X,\omega )$ is a translation surface of even type and $(Y,\xi )$ is a translation surface obtained by bubbling a handle with nonpositive volume, the $(Y,\xi )$ is of even type.
Proof. Let $(X,\omega )$ be a translation surface of even type, and let $\mathcal {P}\subset (X,\omega )$ be an embedded parallelogram. Since $(X,\omega )$ is a structure of even type, all vertices of $\mathcal {P}$ are either regular points or zeros of even order. Notice that a point of even order is of the form $(4m+2)\pi $ , with $m=0$ for a regular point. Remove the interior of $\mathcal {P}$ , identify the opposite edges and let $(Y,\xi )$ be the resulting structure. The vertices of $\mathcal {P}$ are identified to a nonregular point, namely a zero of $\xi $ whose angle is $(4n+2)\pi $ for some n. Since the other zeros and all poles are untouched by this surgery, it follows that $(Y,\xi )$ is a structure of even type.
Lemma 3.8. If $(X,\omega )$ is a translation surface of even type and $(Y,\xi )$ is a translation surface obtained by bubbling a handle with nonpositive volume, then
In particular, bubbling a handle with nonpositive volume does not alter the spin parity.
Proof. Let $(X,\omega )$ be a translation surface, and let $\mathcal {P}$ be an embedded parallelogram. Choose a collection of $2g$ oriented simple curves $\{\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ on $(X,\omega )$ representing a symplectic basis for $\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})$ . Up to deforming the paths inside their isotopy classes, we can make them stay away from some neighborhood, say U, of $\mathcal {P}$ . In other words, we can assume that bubbling a handle with nonpositive volume can be performed inside a neighborhood U. In particular, the surgery does not affect the initial collection of paths. We now complete the former collection of curves by adding two simple curves, say $\alpha _{g+1},\,\beta _{g+1}$ obtained after bubbling. These curves can be taken so that they both lie inside the neighborhood U. Since $(X,\omega )$ is a structure of even type, the vertices of $\mathcal {P}$ all have even orders. As a consequence, $\mathrm {Ind}(\alpha _{g+1})$ and $\mathrm {Ind}(\beta _{g+1})$ are odd positive integers; see Figure 6.
A direct computation shows that
as desired.
3.4 Gluing surfaces along rays
In what follows, we shall need to glue translation surfaces along infinite rays. Recall, in fact, that our strategy to prove Theorem A is based on constructing translation surfaces with prescribed data (periods and geometric invariants) by gluing surfaces of lower complexity. We begin by introducing the following.
Definition 3.9 (Gluing translation surfaces along geodesic rays)
Let $(X_1,\,\omega _1)$ and $(X_2,\,\omega _2)$ be two translation surfaces, each with at least one pole. Let $r_i \subset (X_i,\,\omega _i)$ , for $i=1,2$ , be an embedded geodesic ray that starts from a zero of order $m_i$ for $\omega _i$ or a regular point (in this case $m_i=0$ ) and ends in a pole of order $p_i$ . Moreover, assume that both $r_1$ and $r_2$ develop onto parallel infinite rays in ${\mathbb C}$ . Then we can define a translation surface $(Y,\,\xi )$ as follows: Slit each ray $r_i$ , and denote the resulting sides by $r_i^+$ and $r_i^-$ ; then identify $r_1^+$ with $r_2^-$ and $r_1^-$ and $r_2^+$ by a translation. If the surface $X_i$ is homeomorphic to $S_{g_i,\,k_i}$ for $i=1,2$ , then the resulting surface Y is homeomorphic to $S_{g_1+g_2,\, k_1+k_2-1}$ . The starting points of $r_1$ and $r_2$ are identified to a zero point in the resulting translation surface $(Y,\,\xi )$ with order equal to $m_1+m_2+1$ , and the other end points at infinity are identified to a pole of order $p_1+p_2-1$ .
Definition 3.10 (Gluing translation surfaces along a bi-infinite rays)
Let $(X_1,\,\omega _1)$ and $(X_2,\,\omega _2)$ be two translation surfaces, each with at least one pole. Let $r_i \subset (X_i,\,\omega _i)$ , for $i=1,2$ , be an embedded bi-infinite geodesic that starts from a pole $P_i^1$ of order $p_i^1$ for $\omega _i$ and ends in another pole $P_i^2$ of order $p_i^2$ . Assume that both $r_1$ and $r_2$ develop onto parallel infinite rays in ${\mathbb C}$ . Then we can define a translation surface $(Y,\,\xi )$ as follows: Slit each ray $r_i$ , and denote the resulting sides by $r_i^+$ and $r_i^-$ ; then identify $r_1^+$ with $r_2^-$ and $r_1^-$ and $r_2^+$ by a translation. If the surface $X_i$ is homeomorphic to $S_{g_i,\,k_i}$ for $i=1,2$ , then the resulting surface Y is homeomorphic to $S_{g_1+g_2,\, k_1+k_2-2}$ . Moreover, $P_1^1$ and $P_2^1$ are identified to a pole of order $p_1^1+p_2^1-1$ , and similarly, $P_1^2$ and $P_2^2$ are identified to a pole of order $p_1^2+p_2^2-1$ .
Remark 3.11. In both constructions above, when two poles are identified then the corresponding residues sum up.
As special cases, we have the following gluings.
Definition 3.12 (Bubbling a plane)
Let $(X,\,\omega )$ be a translation surface with poles, and let $r\subset (X,\,\omega )$ be an infinite ray starting from a regular point or a zero of $\omega $ . Let $\overline {r}\subset \mathbb C$ be the developing image of r. By bubbling a plane along r, we mean the gluing of $(X,\,\omega )$ and $(\mathbb C,\,dz)$ along r and $\overline {r}$ as described in Definition 3.9. By repeating this surgery, m times is equivalent to glue $(X,\,\omega )$ to $(\mathbb C,\,z^{m-1}dz)$ along parallel rays as described in Definition 3.9.
We can note that in the constructions above at most one new branch point is introduced arising from the extremal points of the rays after identification. Furthermore, bubbling a plane does not change the topology of the underlying surface; in particular, the resulting structure after bubbling has the same periods as the former one. Another special case worth of interest for us is the following.
Definition 3.13 (Gluing a cylinder along a bi-infinite ray)
Let $(X,\omega )$ be a translation surface with at least two poles. Let $r_1\subset (X,\omega )$ be an embedded bi-infinite geodesic joining two distinct poles, and let $v\in \mathbb S^1\subset \mathbb C$ be the direction of r once developed via the developing map. Let $C=\mathbb E^2/\langle z\mapsto z+w\rangle $ be an infinite cylinder with holonomy $w\in {\mathbb C}$ . If v and w are not parallel, then there exists an infinite geodesic line $r_2\subset C$ with direction v after developing. We can glue C to $(X,\omega )$ as follows: Slit $(X,\omega )$ along $r_1$ , and denote the resulting sides by $r_1^+$ and $r_1^-$ . In a similar fashion, slit C along $r_2$ , and denote the resulting sides by $r_2^+$ and $r_2^-$ . Let $(Y,\,\xi )$ be the translation surface obtained by gluing back $r_1^+$ with $r_2^-$ and $r_1^-$ with $r_2^+$ . We shall say that $(Y,\,\xi )$ is obtained by gluing a cylinder to $(X,\omega )$ along a bi-infinite ray. Moreover, the residues of the resulting poles are given by the original residues $\pm $ the residues of the simple poles of the infinite cylinder.
Remark 3.14. Let $r\subset (X,\omega )$ be a geodesic ray leaving from any point of X to a pole of $\omega $ with slope $\theta $ . In principle, r may hit a zero of $\omega $ , say P of order m. Then there are $m+1$ possible ways to extend r at P so that its slope after developing is still $\theta $ . In this case, we shall impose that the ray leaves P with angle exactly $\pi $ on the left or on the right.
The following results hold.
Lemma 3.15 (Invariance of the rotation number)
Let $(X, \omega )$ be a genus-one differential with at least two poles and rotation number k. Suppose there is a bi-infinite geodesic ray, say r, joining two poles. Then gluing a cylinder along r as in Definition 3.13 does not alter the rotation number.
Lemma 3.16 (Invariance of the spin parity)
Let $(X,\omega )$ be a translation surface with poles of even type, and let $\varphi (\omega )$ be the parity of $\omega $ . Let $(Y,\xi )$ be the translation surface obtained by bubbling $({\mathbb C},\,z^{2m-1}dz)$ , for $m\ge 1$ , along a ray as in Definition 3.9. Then $\varphi (\omega )=\varphi (\xi )$ .
The proofs of these lemmas are easy to establish and left to the reader.
4 Finding good systems of generators: actions on the representation space
For a given representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ , our proof of Theorems A, which we will develop from Section §5 to Section §7, relies on a direct construction of genus-g differentials with prescribed invariants such as the rotation number for genus-one differentials and the spin parity or the hyperellipticity for higher genus differentials. In order to perform our constructions, we need to consider a judicious system of handle generators which is defined as follows.
Definition 4.1 (Handle, handle-generators)
On a surface $S_{g,n}$ of some positive genus $g>0$ , a handle is an embedded subsurface $\Sigma $ that is homeomorphic to $S_{1,1}$ , and a handle-generator is a simple closed curve that is one of the generators of $\text {H}_1(\Sigma , \mathbb {Z})\cong \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,1},\mathbb {Z})$ . A pair of handle-generators for a handle will refer to a pair of simple closed curves $\{\alpha , \beta \}$ that generate $\text {H}_1(\Sigma , \mathbb {Z})$ ; in particular, $\alpha $ and $\beta $ intersect once.
Definition 4.2 (System of handle generators)
On a surface $S_{g,n}$ of some positive genus $g>0$ , we consider a collection of pairwise disjoint g handles $\Sigma _1,\dots ,\Sigma _g$ . A system of handle generators is a collection of g pairs of handle generators $\{\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ such that $\{\alpha _i,\beta _i\}$ is a pair of handle generators for $\Sigma _i$ .
We can immediately notice that every system of handle generators yields a splitting, namely a simple closed separating curve $\gamma $ homotopic to the product of commutators $[\alpha _i,\beta _i]$ . In fact, $S_{g,n}$ splits along $\gamma $ as the connected sum of a closed genus g surface $S_g$ and a punctured sphere $S_{0,n}$ . Conversely, once a splitting is defined, any representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\to {\mathbb C}$ gives rise to a representation $\chi _g$ and a representation $\chi _n$ as defined in Section §2.1. Recall that $\chi _n$ is always well defined as it does not depend on the splitting whereas the representation $\chi _g$ does. In particular, $\chi _g$ is uniquely determined if and only if $\chi $ is of trivial-ends type; see Remark 2.9.
4.1 Mapping class group action
In order to realize a representation $\chi $ as the period character of some translation surface with poles, in what follows it will be convenient to replace, if necessary, a given system of handle generators with a more suitable one. This replacement can be done by precomposing $\chi $ with an automorphism induced by a mapping class transformation, that is, an element of the mapping class group $\mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ , where
Remark 4.3. In principle, an element $\phi \in \mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ may permute punctures; see [Reference Farb and MargalitFM12, Chapter §2]. In what follows, however, we shall focus on the action of elements that keep the punctures fixed and that may alter the splitting; see Sections §1.3 and §2.1.
Thus, to prove our main Theorem A for a given $\chi $ , it is sufficient to construct a genus g meromorphic differential on $S_{g,n}$ for which the induced representation is $\chi \circ \phi $ for some $\phi \in \mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ . It is worth mentioning that this replacement is legitimized by the following:
for any $\phi \in \mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ , and $\mathrm {Per}$ is the period mapping defined in Equation (7). In fact, if $\phi $ is induced by a homeomorphism, say f, then the pull-back of the translation structure by f defines a new translation surface with poles in the same stratum and with period character $\chi \circ \phi $ ; see also [Reference Le FilsLF22, Lemma 3.1] for the holomorphic case.
4.2 Nontrivial systems of generators exist
We aim to list a few lemmas about the mapping class group action for finding systems of handle generators such that any element has a nontrivial period. Most of them have already been proved in [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Section §11], and here, we report a sketch of the proof for the reader’s convenience. The following lemmas show that the image of every handle generator under $\chi $ can be assumed to be nonzero whenever $\chi $ is a nontrivial representation.
Lemma 4.4. Let $\chi \in \text {Hom}\left (\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z}), \,\mathbb {C}\right )$ be a representation, and let $\{\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ be a system of handle generators. Suppose that the corresponding $\chi _g$ , determined by the induced splitting, is not trivial. Then, there exists $\phi \in \text {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ such that $\chi \circ \phi (\alpha _i)$ and $\chi \circ \phi (\beta _i)$ are nonzero for all $1 \leq i \leq g$ .
Proof. Let $\chi $ be a nontrivial representation, and let $\{\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ be a system of handle generators. We can assume that $\chi (\alpha _1) \neq 0$ . If $\chi (\beta _1)=0$ , then replace $\beta _1$ with $\alpha _1\beta _1$ and observe that $\chi (\alpha _1\beta _1)\neq 0$ . Suppose there is an index i such that $\chi (\alpha _i) = \chi (\beta _i) = 0$ . We consider a mapping class $\phi $ such that
and $\phi $ is the identity on the other handle generators. Finally, we replace the generator $\alpha _i$ with $\alpha _i\beta _1\beta _i^{-1}$ . Observe that $\{\alpha _i\,\beta _1\beta _i^{-1},\, \beta _1\beta _i^{-1}\}$ is a pair of handle generators and $\chi (\alpha _i\,\beta _1\beta _i^{-1})=\chi (\beta _1\beta _i^{-1})\neq 0$ by construction. By iterating this process finitely many times, we get the desired result.
Furthermore, for a representation $\chi $ we can also assume that the $\chi _g$ -part induced by a splitting is nontrivial whenever the $\chi _n$ -part is nontrivial.
Lemma 4.5. Let $\chi \in \text {Hom}\left (\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z}), \,\mathbb {C}\right )$ be a representation of nontrivial-ends type. Then, there exists a splitting of $S_{g,n}$ with respect to which $\chi _g$ is nontrivial.
Remark 4.6. The claim of Lemma 4.5 is equivalent to the existence of a mapping class $\phi \in \mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ such that $(\chi \circ \phi )_g$ is nontrivial, where $(\chi \circ \phi )_g$ is the g-part of the representation $\chi \circ \phi $ .
Proof. Let $\chi $ be a nontrivial-ends type representation, and let $\{\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ be a system of handle generators. Assume $\chi (\alpha _i) = \chi (\beta _i) = 0$ for all $1 \leq i \leq g$ . Let $\gamma _i$ be a small loop around a puncture such that $\chi (\gamma _i) \neq 0$ . Then we can find some handle generator $\alpha _j$ such that we have two curves $\alpha _j$ and $\alpha ^{\prime }_j$ satisfying $\alpha _j\alpha ^{\prime }_j = \gamma _i$ in $\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})$ . This implies that $\chi (\alpha ^{\prime }_j) \neq 0$ . Thus, we can take $\phi $ to be an element of $\text {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ , commonly known as a push transformation; see [Reference Farb and MargalitFM12, Section §4.2.1], which takes the generator $\alpha _j$ to $\alpha ^{\prime }_j$ and leaves the other handle generators unchanged.
4.3 $\mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ -action
We now consider an action on the representation space given by postcomposition with elements of $\mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ . This action can be combined with the mapping class group action (see Section §4.1 above), and it is easy to check that these actions commute. In the sequel, it will be sometimes useful to consider this action in order to realize representations as the period of meromorphic differentials in a given connected component of a stratum. This is in fact legitimated by the fact
for any $A\in \mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ , and $\mathrm {Per}$ is the period mapping defined in Equation (7).
Remark 4.7. Since $\mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ acts continuously on every stratum, it follows that the connected components, if any, are preserved under the action.
4.4 System of handle generators with positive volume
Notice that a mapping class $\phi \in \mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ does not need to preserve any splitting in general. Let us now consider again the notion of volume for meromorphic differentials already introduced in Section §2.1. For a representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ , the volume of $\chi $ (see Definition 2.10) is well defined if and only if it is of trivial-ends type. In other words, for any representation $\chi $ of trivial-ends type and for any mapping class $\phi \in \mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ the equation
where $\chi _g$ and $(\chi \circ \phi )_g$ are the representations induced by the systems of handle generators $\{\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ and $\{\phi (\alpha _i),\,\phi (\beta _i)\}_{1\le i\le g}$ , respectively. For a representation $\chi $ of nontrivial-ends type, the volume is no longer well defined, and hence, it is no longer an invariant because the representation $\chi _g$ does depend on the splitting and therefore also $\text {vol}(\chi _g)$ depends on it. We shall take advantage of this caveat to prove the following result which will be exploited in the sequel. We begin with introducing the following.
Definition 4.8. A representation $\chi $ is called real-collinear if the image $\text {Im}(\chi )$ is contained in the $\mathbb R$ -span of some $c\in {\mathbb C}^*$ . Equivalently, $\chi $ is real-collinear if, up to replacing $\chi $ with $A\,\chi $ where $A\in \mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ if necessary, then $\mathrm {Im}(\chi )\subset \mathbb {R}$ .
Lemma 4.9. Let $\chi \in \text {Hom}\left (\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z}), \mathbb {C}\right )$ be a representation of nontrivial-ends type. If $\chi $ is not real-collinear, then there exists a system of handle generators $\{\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ such that $\mathrm {vol}(\chi _g)>0$ .
Proof. Let $\chi $ be a representation of nontrivial-ends type, and let $\{\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ be a system of handle generators. From Section §2.1, recall that the curve $\gamma =[\alpha _1,\beta _1]\cdots [\alpha _g,\beta _g]$ bounds a subsurface $\Sigma $ homeomorphic to $S_{g,1}$ , the embedding $i\colon \Sigma \hookrightarrow S_{g,n}$ yields an injection $\imath _g\colon \text {H}_1(\Sigma ,\,\mathbb {Z})\cong \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g},\mathbb {Z})\to \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})$ , and the representation $\chi _g$ is defined as $\chi \circ \imath _g$ . In the case $\mathrm {vol}(\chi _g)>0$ , there is nothing to prove and we are done, so let us suppose that $\mathrm {vol}(\chi _g)\le 0$ . Being $\chi $ of nontrivial-ends type, there is a puncture, say p, with nonzero residue and let $\gamma $ be a simple closed curve around p. Clearly, $\chi (\gamma )=\chi _n(\gamma )\neq 0$ . Since $\chi $ is not real-collinear, we choose a pair of handle generators $\{\alpha ,\beta \}$ in the given system such that $\chi (\beta )$ is not collinear with $\chi (\gamma )$ . Replace it with the pair of generators $\{\alpha ',\,\beta '\}$ , where $\beta '=\beta $ and $\alpha '=\alpha \,\beta ^{-n}\,\gamma \,(\beta \,\gamma )^n$ for $n\in \mathbb Z$ . This is a simple closed nonseparating, curve and we can easily compute that
Up to relabelling all handles, we can assume $\{\alpha ,\,\beta \}=\{\alpha _1,\,\beta _1\}$ . The new system of handle generators will be $\{\alpha ',\,\beta ',\alpha _2,\beta _2,\dots ,\alpha _g,\,\beta _g\}$ . Such a system determines a different splitting, namely a different separating curve $\gamma '$ that bounds a subsurface $\Sigma '$ homeomorphic to $S_{g,1}$ . The embedding $i'\colon \Sigma '\hookrightarrow S_{g,n}$ yields a representation $\chi ^{\prime }_g=\chi \circ \imath ^{\prime }_g$ , where $\imath ^{\prime }_g$ is the injection in homology induced by $i'$ . The volume $\mathrm {vol}(\chi ^{\prime }_g)$ can be explicitly computed as follow:
Since $\mathrm {vol}(\chi _g)$ is constant and since $\chi (\gamma )$ and $\chi (\beta _1)$ are not collinear, by choosing $n\in \mathbb Z$ judiciously, we can make $\mathrm {vol}(\chi ^{\prime }_g)>0$ and hence obtain the desired result.
By combining Lemma 4.9 with Kapovich’s results in [Reference KapovichKap20], we can infer the following result on which we shall rely in the sequel.
Corollary 4.10. Let $\chi \in \text {Hom}\big (\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z}), \mathbb {C}\big )$ be a representation of nontrivial-ends type. If $\chi $ is not real-collinear, then there exists a system of handle generators $\mathcal {G}=\{\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ such that $\Im \big (\,\overline {\chi (\alpha _i)}\,\chi (\beta _i)\,\big )>0$ for any $i=1,\dots ,g$ .
4.5 Discrete and dense representations
In the sequel, we shall distinguish three kinds of representations according to the following.
Definition 4.11. A representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ is said to be
-
• discrete if the image of $\chi $ is a discrete subgroup of ${\mathbb C}$ . Furthermore, we say that $\chi $ is discrete of rank one if, up to replacing $\chi $ with $A\,\chi $ , where $A\in \mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ , then $\text {Im}(\chi )={\mathbb Z}$ . We say that $\chi $ is discrete of rank two if, up to replacing $\chi $ with $A\,\chi $ , where $A\in \mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ , then $\text {Im}(\chi )={\mathbb Z}\oplus i\,{\mathbb Z}$ .
-
• semidiscrete if, up to replacing $\chi $ with $A\,\chi $ , where $A\in \mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ , then $\text {Im}(\chi )=U\oplus i\,{\mathbb Z}$ , where U is dense in $\mathbb R$ .
-
• dense if the image of $\chi $ is dense in ${\mathbb C}$ .
We have the following lemmas.
Lemma 4.12. Let $\chi $ be a discrete representation of nontrivial-ends type. After replacing $\chi $ with the representation $A\,\chi $ where $A\in \mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ if necessary, there exists a system of handle generators $\{\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ such that
-
1. if $\chi $ is discrete of rank one then each handle generator has period one, that is, $\chi (\alpha _i)=\chi (\beta _i)=1$ for all $i=1,\dots ,g$ ;
-
2. if $\chi $ is discrete of rank two, then the handle generators satisfy the following conditions:
-
- $\chi (\alpha _g)\in {\mathbb Z}_+$ and $\chi (\beta _g)=i$ ,
-
- $0<\chi (\alpha _j)<\chi (\alpha _g)$ and $\chi (\alpha _j)=\chi (\beta _j)\in {\mathbb Z}_+$ for all $j=1,\dots ,g-1$ .
-
Proof. Up to normalizing the representation with some $A\in \mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ , we can assume $\text {Im}(\chi )\subset {\mathbb Z}\oplus i\,{\mathbb Z}$ . The first case follows from [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Lemma 12.2]. Let us consider the second case. By Lemma 4.9, there exists a system of handle generators $\{\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ such that $\mathrm {vol}(\chi _g)>0$ . Let us now consider the representation $\chi _g$ on its own right. Recall that we can regard this representation as $\chi _g\colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ . From [Reference KapovichKap20], there exists a system of handle generators such that
-
• $\chi (\alpha _g)\in {\mathbb Z}_+$ and $\chi (\beta _g)=i$ ,
-
• $0<\chi (\alpha _j)<\chi (\alpha _g)$ and $\chi (\beta _j)=0$ for all $j=1,\dots ,g-1$ .
By replacing $\{\alpha _j,\,\beta _j\}$ with $\{\alpha _j,\,\alpha _j\,\beta _j\}$ for $j=1,\dots ,g-1$ , we get the desired result.
Lemma 4.13. Let $\chi \in \mathrm {Hom}\big (\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z}), \mathbb {C}\big )$ be a real-collinear representation of nontrivial-ends type. Let $\{\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ be a system of handle generators. If $\chi $ is not discrete of rank one, there exists a mapping class $\phi \in \mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ such that $\chi \circ \phi (\alpha _i)$ and $\chi \circ \phi (\beta _i)$ are both positive and arbitrarily small.
Proof. Let $\chi $ be a representation of nontrivial-ends type such that $\mathrm {Im}(\chi )\subset \mathbb R$ . Recall that any system of handle generators $\{\alpha _i,\,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ induces a splitting and hence a representation $\chi _n$ . Notice that, since $\chi $ is not discrete of rank one, at least one generator of $\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})$ has an irrational period. If $\mathrm {Im}(\chi _n)\subset \mathbb Q$ , then the result follows from [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Lemma 11.5]; notice that this is always the case when $n=2$ (up to rescaling). Let us now assume $\mathrm {Im}(\chi _n)\not \subset \mathbb Q$ and $n\ge 3$ . Up to rescaling, we can assume one puncture, say $P_1$ , has a rational residue, say $r_1$ . Necessarily, there is a puncture $P_2$ with irrational residue $r_2$ . We can assume that at least one handle generator has an irrational period, otherwise we can change the system of handle generators above by replacing $\alpha _1$ with $\alpha _1\gamma _2$ , where $\gamma _2$ is a loop around the puncture $P_2$ . Notice that such a replacement can be performed with a mapping class transformation. Therefore, we can assume that $\alpha _1$ has an irrational period. There exists $\phi _i\in \mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ such that $\chi \circ \phi _i(\alpha _i)$ is also irrational. This mapping class can be explicitly written as
By composing all these $\phi _i$ ’s, the resulting mapping class $\phi $ provides a system of handle generators such that $\chi (\alpha _i)$ is irrational for any $i=1,\dots ,g$ . We now proceed as follows. If $\chi (\alpha _i)$ and $\chi (\beta _i)$ are linearly independent over ${\mathbb Q}$ , we can assume that both of them are positive after Dehn twists and we apply the Euclidean algorithm for making them arbitrarily small. In the case $\chi (\alpha _i)$ and $\chi (\beta _i)$ are linearly dependent over ${\mathbb Q}$ (hence $\chi (\beta _i)$ is also irrational), we replace $\beta _i$ with $\beta _i\gamma _1$ . Since $\chi (\gamma _1)\in \mathbb Q$ , then $\chi (\alpha _i)$ and $\chi (\beta _i\,\gamma _1)$ are linearly independent over ${\mathbb Q}$ . Again, we can assume that both of them are positive after Dehn twists and we apply the Euclidean algorithm for making them arbitrarily small.
5 Meromorphic differentials of genus one
In this section, we want to realize a given nontrivial representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ as the period of some translation surface with poles in a prescribed stratum and with prescribed rotation number; see Definition 2.13. More precisely, we shall prove Theorem A for meromorphic differentials of genus one, namely we prove the following:
Proposition 5.1. Let $\chi $ be a nontrivial representation, and suppose it arises as the period character of some meromorphic differential in a stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ . Then $\chi $ can be realized as the period character of some translation surfaces with poles in each connected component of the same stratum.
Remark 5.2. Recall that, for a stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ , the possible values of the rotation number are given by the positive divisors of $\gcd \big (m_1,\dots ,m_k;p_1,\dots ,p_n \big )$ with the only exception being the case $k=n=1$ ; see Section §2.3 and [Reference BoissyBoi15, Chapter 4] for more details. Notice that each stratum of meromorphic differentials in genus one with at least one simple zero or simple pole is connected as in this case the the greatest common divisor of the orders is one. In what follows, we only consider disconnected strata in genus one because for connected strata the problem of realizing period characters in a given stratum has been resolved in [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22].
In order to state our results, we introduce the following.
Convention and terminology. Recall that slitting a surface along an oriented geodesic segment s is a topological surgery for which the interior of s is replaced with two copies of itself. On the resulting surface, these two segments form a piecewise geodesic boundary with two corner points, corresponding to the extremal points of s, each of which can be a regular point or a branch point of angle $2(m+1)\pi $ for some $m\ge 1$ . We shall denote by $s^+$ the piece of boundary which bounds the surface on its right with respect to the orientation induced by s. In a similar fashion, we denote by $s^-$ the piece of boundary which bounds the surface on its left with respect to the orientation induced by s. See, for example, Figure 7 for the $\pm $ labeling convention. Sometimes, we shall omit the arrows as the direction is implicitly understood by the signs. In the following constructions, we need to slit and glue surfaces along geodesic segments. In order for this operation to be done, we need to glue along segments which are parallel after developing; see Section §3.4. For any $c\in {\mathbb C}^*$ , by slitting $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along c we shall mean a cut along any geodesic segment s of length $|\,c\,|$ and direction equal to $\arg (c)$ , that is,
In the sequel, we shall need to consider several slit copies of $(\mathbb {C},\, dz)$ , along different geodesic segments, we make use of an index i to specify on which copy we perform the slit. Finally, given a pair of handle generators $\alpha ,\,\beta $ and a representation $\chi $ , we shall use the Latin letter a for any segment parallel and isometric to $\chi (\alpha )$ and the Latin letter b for any segment parallel and isometric to $\chi (\beta )$ .
The proof of Theorem A for meromorphic differentials of genus one is divided as follows. In the next three Sections §5.1–§5.3, we prove the main theorem for strata of genus-one meromorphic differentials with exactly one zero of maximal order. In the final Section §5.4, we derive the most general case as a straightforward corollary of the other sections. The only missing case in the present section is the trivial representation that will be handled in Section §8. Since this a case-by-case proof with several subcases, Appendix §A contains a flow diagram of the proof for the reader’s convenience; see Table 3.
5.1 Strata with poles of order two and zero residue
In this section, we shall prove the following lemma for the case where all poles have order exactly two and zero residue. We propose a proof in which the structures are explicitly constructed with prescribed periods and rotation number. As we shall see, all the other cases follow as simple variations of the constructions in this special case.
Lemma 5.3. Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a nontrivial representation of trivial-ends type. If $\chi $ can be realized in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(2n;-2,\dots ,-2)$ , then it appears as the period character of a translation surface with poles in each connected component.
Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a nontrivial representation, and assume $\chi $ can be realized as the period character of a genus-one meromorphic differential with poles in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(2n;-2,\dots ,-2)$ . Recall that any such a stratum has two connected components according to the rotation number with the only exception being the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(2,-2)$ which is connected and hence already handled in [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22]. Therefore, we assume without loss of generality that $n\ge 2$ .
Remark 5.4. Notice that, since $\chi $ is a nontrivial representation of trivial-ends type, then for any given pair of handle generators $\{\alpha ,\,\beta \}$ at least one generator, say $\alpha $ , has nonzero absolute period, that is, $\chi (\alpha )\neq 0$ . Lemma 4.4 applies, and hence, we can assume that both handle generators have nonzero absolute periods. In the present and next sections, we shall thus assume $\chi (\alpha )\neq 0$ and $\chi (\beta )\neq 0$ .
5.1.1 Realizing representations with rotation number one
We begin with realizing $\chi $ as the period character of some genus-one meromorphic differential with rotation number one. We shall distinguish two cases according to the volume of the representation $\chi $ .
5.1.1.1 Positive volume
Let $\alpha ,\beta $ be a pair of handle generators, and let $\mathcal {P}\subset \mathbb {C}$ be the parallelogram defined by the chain
where $P_0\in {\mathbb C}$ is any point. According to our convention above, let us denote by $a_0^+$ (respectively $a_0^-$ ) the edge of $\mathcal {P}$ parallel to $\chi (\alpha )$ that bounds the parallelogram on its right (respectively left). In the same fashion, let us denote by $b_0^+$ (respectively $b_0^-$ ) the edge of $\mathcal {P}$ parallel to $\chi (\beta )$ that bounds the parallelogram on its right (resp. left). Recall that $(\mathbb {C},\, dz)$ is a genus-zero translation surface with trivial period character, no zeros and one pole of order $2$ at the infinity with zero residue. We slit $(\mathbb {C},\,dz)$ along a segment $a_n$ , and we denote the resulting segments as $a_n^+$ and $a_n^-$ . Let $P_n$ and $Q_n=P_n+\chi (\alpha )$ be the extremal points of $a_n$ . We next consider other $n-1$ copies of $(\mathbb {C},\, dz)$ , and we slit each of them along a segment b. For any $i=1,\dots ,n-1$ , let $P_i$ and $Q_i=P_i+\chi (\beta )$ be the extremal points of $b_i$ and denote as $b_i^+$ and $b_i^-$ the resulting segments after slitting. We are now ready to glue these n copies of $({\mathbb C},dz)$ and the parallelogram $\mathcal {P}$ all together. The desired structure is then obtained by identifying the segment $a_0^+$ with $a_n^-$ , the segment $a_0^-$ with $a_n^+$ , the segment $b_i^+$ with $b_{i+1}^-$ , where $i=1,\dots ,n-2$ and, finally, $b_0^-$ with $b_{n-1}^+$ and $b_0^+$ with $b_1^-$ ; see Figure 8.
We will show that the resulting genus-one meromorphic differential, say $(X,\omega )$ , has rotation number one. We first find a closed loop representing the desired handle generator $\alpha $ in the following way. For any $i=1,\dots ,n-1$ , we consider a small metric circle of radius $\varepsilon $ centered at $P_i$ . After the cut and paste process just described, these $n-1$ circles define a smooth path with starting point on $b_0^-$ and ending point on $b_0^+$ . These two points on $\mathcal {P}$ differ by $\chi (\alpha )$ , so we can join them with a geodesic segment parallel to a. The resulting curve is a simple close curve on $(X,\omega )$ ; see Figure 8. We can see that $\text {Ind}(\alpha )= 1-n$ , with period equal to $\chi (\alpha )$ . In a similar way, we can find a closed loop representing the other handle generator $\beta $ . We consider a small metric circle of radius $\varepsilon $ centered at $P_n$ . After the cut and paste process, the extremal points of such an arc are on $a_0^\pm $ and differ by $\chi (\beta )$ on $\mathcal {P}$ . We join them with a geodesic segment and the resulting curve is simple and closed in $(X,\omega )$ . By construction, it has index one with period equal to $\chi (\beta )$ . By checking their (self) intersection numbers, the two loops form a pair of handle generators with desired periods. Therefore, according to the formula (2.13) we have that $\gcd (\, 1-n,\,1,\,2n,\,2\,)=1$ , and hence, the structure has rotation number one.
5.1.1.2 Nonpositive volume
We now assume that $\chi $ has nonpositive volume. This case is similar to the case of positive volume. As above, let $\alpha ,\beta $ be a set of handle generators, and let $\mathcal {P}\subset \mathbb {C}$ be the closure of the exterior of the parallelogram
where $P_0\in {\mathbb C}$ is any point. Notice that $\mathcal {P}$ itself is a topological quadrilateral on $\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ . We denote the sides of $\mathcal {P}$ as $a^{\pm }$ and $b_0^{\pm }$ according to our convention. We next consider $n-1$ copies of $(\mathbb {C},\, dz)$ and we slit each of them along a segment b. For any $i=1,\dots ,n-1$ , we denote as $b_i^+$ and $b_i^-$ the resulting segments after slitting and let $P_i$ and $Q_i=P_i+\chi (\beta )$ be the extremal points of $b_i$ . The desired structure is then obtained by identifying the segment $a^+$ with $a^-$ , the segment $b_{i}^-$ with $b_{i+1}^+$ for $i=1,\dots ,n-2$ , the segment $b_0^-$ with $b_{1}^+$ and the segment $b_0^+$ with $b_{n-1}^-$ ; see Figure 9. In this case, it is still easy to observe that the final structure $(X,\omega )$ has rotation number one. We can find a closed loop representing $\alpha $ similarly as before. For $\beta $ , we can choose any segment in $\mathcal {P}$ parallel to $b_0^+$ with extremal points R and $R+\chi (\beta )$ . We join R (respectively $R+\chi (\beta )$ ) with any point in $a^-$ (respectively $a^+$ ) by means of an embedded arc. The resulting curve close up to a simple closed curve on $(X,\omega )$ and has index one. By checking intersection numbers the two loops form a pair of handle generators with desired periods. Therefore, the structure $(X,\omega )$ has rotation number one.
5.1.2 Realizing representations with rotation number two
We now realize a nontrivial representation $\chi $ as the period character of some genus-one meromorphic differential with rotation number two. Recall that poles are supposed to be of order $2$ with zero residue. We distinguish four cases according to the volume of $\chi $ and the parity of n (the number of punctures). All constructions are quite similar to those realized in Section §5.1.1, and in fact, they differ mainly in the way we glue copies of $({\mathbb C}, dz)$ .
5.1.2.1 Positive volume and even number of punctures
Let $\alpha ,\beta $ be a set of handle generators, and let $\mathcal {P}\subset \mathbb {C}$ be the parallelogram defined by the chain
where $P_0\in {\mathbb C}$ is any point. Let $a^{\pm }$ denote the edges of $\mathcal {P}$ , parallel to $\chi (\alpha )$ that bounds the parallelogram on its right (respectively left). Similarly, let $b_0^+$ (respectively $b_0^-$ ) denote the edge of $\mathcal {P}$ parallel to $\chi (\beta )$ that bounds the parallelogram on its right (resp. left). We next consider n copies of $(\mathbb {C},\, dz)$ and we slit each of them along a segment b. For any $i=1,\dots ,n$ , we denote as $b_i^+$ and $b_i^-$ the resulting segments after slitting and let $P_i$ and $Q_i=P_i+\chi (\beta )$ be the extremal points of $b_i$ . We then glue these n copies of $({\mathbb C},dz)$ and the parallelogram $\mathcal {P}$ all together. The desired structure is then obtained by identifying the segment $a^+$ with $a^-$ , the segment $b_i^+$ with $b_{i+1}^-$ for $i=1,\dots ,n-1$ and the segment $b_0^-$ with $b_{n-1}^+$ and the segment $b_0^+$ with $b_1^-$ ; see Figure 10.
We can find closed loops representing $\alpha ,\,\beta $ exactly as we have done above for the case discussed in paragraph §5.1.1.1. It is easy to check that $\text {Ind}(\alpha )= -n$ by construction and $\text {Ind}(\beta )=0$ because $\beta $ is geodesic. Since in this paragraph n is assumed to be even, we have that $\gcd ( -n,0,2n,2)=2$ and hence $(X,\omega )$ has rotation number $2$ .
5.1.2.2 Positive volume and odd number of punctures
Let $\alpha ,\beta $ be a set of handle generators. Following [Reference BoissyBoi15, Section 3.3.2], we shall consider here two half-planes defined as follows. We first consider the broken line defined by the ray corresponding to $\mathbb {R}^-$ , two edges corresponding to the chain of vectors $\chi (\alpha )$ and $\chi (\beta )$ in this order with starting point at the origin and, finally, a horizontal ray $r_1$ from the right end of $\chi (\beta )$ and parallel to $\mathbb R$ . Define $H_1$ as the half-plane bounded on the left by this broken line. Similarly, define $H_2$ as the half-plane bounded on the right by the broken line defined by the ray corresponding to $\mathbb {R}^-$ , two edges corresponding to the chain of vectors $\chi (\beta )$ and $\chi (\alpha )$ in this order with starting point at the origin and, finally, a horizontal ray $r_2$ from the right end of $\chi (\alpha )$ and parallel to $\mathbb R$ ; see Figure 11. We denote by $a_0^-,\,b_0^-$ the edges of the boundary of $H_1$ corresponding to $\chi (\alpha )$ and $\chi (\beta )$ , respectively. Similarly, we denote by $a_0^+,\,b_0^+$ the edges of the boundary of $H_2$ corresponding to $\chi (\alpha )$ and $\chi (\beta )$ , respectively.
We consider a copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , and we slit it along a segment a, and we denote the resulting segments $a_n^{\pm }$ . Next, we consider other $n-2$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , and we slit each of them along a segment b, and we denote the resulting segments $b_i^{\pm }$ , for $i=2,\dots ,n-1$ . The sign $\pm $ are according to our convention. We now glue the edges in the usual way as above, and we also glue the ray $r_1$ with $r_2$ . Notice that this identification does not affect the set of periods since these two rays differ by a translation $\chi (\alpha )+\chi (\beta )$ . The final surface is a genus-one meromorphic differential. It remains to show that it has rotation number $2$ . We can choose a pair of handle generators as shown in Figure 11. We can notice that the curve $\alpha $ has index $ -2$ by construction whereas the curve $\beta $ has index $n-1$ . Observe that $n-1$ is even because n is assumed to be odd. Therefore, we can conclude that $\gcd ( -2,\,n-1,\,2n,\,-2)=2$ as desired.
5.1.2.3 Nonpositive volume and odd number of punctures
This case is very similar to the case described in paragraph §5.1.1.2. Notice that $n\ge 3$ in the present case. Given a set of handle generators $\alpha ,\beta $ , we define $\mathcal {P}\subset \mathbb {C}$ to be the closure of the exterior of the parallelogram defined by the chain
where $P_0\in {\mathbb C}$ is any point and we label the edges $a_0^\pm $ and $b_0^\pm $ as usual. Consider $n-1$ copies of $(\mathbb C,\, dz)$ , and slit $n-2$ of these copies along a segment b and the remaining one along a segment a; see Figure 12. This is the only difference with respect to the case in paragraph §5.1.1.2. Then we proceed as usual in order to get the desired genus-one meromorphic differential.
We just need to check that this structure has rotation number equal to two. We can find closed loops representing $\alpha ,\,\beta $ as in Figure 12. The curve $\alpha $ has index $ 1-n$ which is even because n is supposed to be odd. Since the curve $\beta $ has index $2$ by construction, it follows that $\gcd ( 1-n,\,2,\,2n,\,2)=2$ as desired.
5.1.2.4 Nonpositive volume and even number of punctures
We finally consider the case in which $\chi $ has nonpositive volume and the number of puncture is even. For this case, we need a slightly different construction. Let P be any point on $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , define $Q=P+\chi (\alpha )-\chi (\beta )$ , and let c be the geodesic segment joining the points P and Q. Let $T_1$ be the triangle with vertices P, $P+\chi (\alpha )$ and Q. Notice that, by construction, the sides of $T_1$ are $a,b,c$ . We define $\mathcal {T}_1$ as the closure in $\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ of the exterior of $T_1$ . Notice that $\mathcal {T}_1$ is a triangle in $\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ . We next consider another copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ and define $T_2$ as the triangle with vertices P, $P-\chi (\beta )$ and Q. In this case, the sides of $T_2$ are still $a,b,c$ . Let $\mathcal {T}_2$ be the triangle in $\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ given by the closure of the exterior of $T_2$ . We now glue the triangles $\mathcal {T}_1$ and $\mathcal {T}_2$ along the edge c. The resulting space is a topological parallelogram $\mathcal {P}=\mathcal {T}_1\cup \mathcal {T}_2$ with two edges parallel to a and two edges parallel to b by construction. Such a parallelogram $\mathcal {P}$ has in its interior two special points corresponding to the points at infinity of the two copies of $\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ . We set $a_0^+$ (resp. $a_0^-$ ) the edge of $\mathcal {P}$ parallel to a and that bounds the quadrilateral on its right (resp. left). In the same fashion, $b_0^+$ (resp. $b_0^-$ ) is the edge of $\mathcal {P}$ parallel to b and that bounds the quadrilateral on its right (resp. left). See Figure 13.
We consider $n-2$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\, dz)$ each of which slits along a segment b, leaving from $P_i$ to $Q_i=P_i+\chi (\beta )$ . We denote the sides as $b_i^{\pm }$ according to our convention for $i=1,\dots ,n-2$ . We finally glue all these structures together as follows. The edges $a_0^+$ and $a_0^-$ are identified together. Then we glue $b_i^-$ with $b_{i+1}^+$ for $i=1,\dots ,n-3$ , the edge $b_{n-2}^-$ with $b_0^+$ and, finally, $b_0^-$ with $b_1^+$ . The resulting structure is a genus-one meromorphic differential. See Figure 14.
It remains to show that such a genus-one meromorphic differential has rotation number $2$ . We can find a closed loop representing $\alpha $ as already done in the previous paragraphs, for example, §5.1.1.1. For any $i=1,\dots ,n-2$ , we consider a small metric circle of radius $\varepsilon $ around $P_i$ . After the cut and paste process, these $n-2$ curves define a path leaving from a point, say $R\in b_0^+$ to $R+\chi (\alpha )\in b_0^-$ . We then join these latter points with a smooth path in $\mathcal {Q}$ in order to get the desired curve $\alpha $ . Such a curve has index $ -n$ because it turns clockwise once around any point $P_i$ and then turns by an angle $4\pi $ inside $\mathcal {Q}$ (more precisely, the tangent vector to the path turns by an angle $4\pi $ ). A closed loop representing $\beta $ can be constructed by joining a point $R'$ to $R'+\chi (\beta )$ . Such a curve has index two because it also turns by an angle $4\pi $ inside $\mathcal {Q}$ . These curves are drawn in Figures 13 and 14. Therefore, it follows that $\gcd ( -n,\,2,\,2n,\,2)=2$ because n is assumed to be even. This concludes the proof of Lemma 5.3.
5.2 Strata with poles of order higher than two
We next consider strata $\mathcal {H}_1(np;-p,\dots ,-p)$ of genus-one meromorphic differentials where poles are allowed to have orders greater than two. In this section, we still assume that all residues are equal to zero. Recall that, in the present section, we are still under the assumption given in Remark 5.4.
Lemma 5.5. Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a nontrivial representation of trivial-ends type. If $\chi $ can be realized in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(np;-p,\dots ,-p)$ , then it appears as the period character of a translation surface with poles in each of its connected components.
Before moving to the proof of this lemma, we observe that the case $p=2$ is handled by Lemma 5.3. Therefore, we can assume $p\ge 3$ in the proof of Lemma 5.5.
Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a nontrivial representation and assume that $\chi $ can be realized as the period character of a genus-one meromorphic differential with poles in a stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(np;-p,\dots ,-p)$ . Notice that $\gcd (np, p)=p$ . Therefore, we want to realize $\chi $ as the period of a genus-one meromorphic differential with prescribed rotation number r where r divides p. The cases $n=1,2$ are special and they work differently from the generic case $n\ge 3$ . Moreover, in all cases, we shall need to distinguish two subcases according to the sign of the volume of $\chi _g$ induced by $\chi $ . Recall that, since $\chi $ is assumed to be of trivial-ends type, the volume of $\chi $ is well defined, and it does not depend on any splitting; see Definition 2.10. Therefore, we divide the proof in four subsections according to the cases above. As we shall see, all these cases appear as variations of the preceding constructions.
5.2.1 Positive volume and at most two punctures
Let $\chi $ be a representation with positive volume. Let $\alpha ,\,\beta $ be a pair of handle generators, and let $\mathcal {P}$ be the parallelogram defined by
where $P_0\in {\mathbb C}$ is any point. We introduce the following genus-zero meromorphic differential, say $(X_1,\omega _1)$ . Consider a copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , and let $b_1$ be the geodesic segment $P_1$ to $Q_1=P_1+\chi (\beta )$ . Let $k\in \{1,\dots ,p-1\}$ be a positive integer, and consider $k-1$ distinct rays starting from $P_1$ and intersecting $b_1$ only at $P_1$ . Next, we consider $p-k-1$ distinct rays starting from $Q_1$ intersecting $b_1$ only at $Q_1$ . Finally, along every ray we bubble a copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ . The resulting structure is a genus-zero differential with two zeros of orders $k-1$ and $p-k-1$ and a pole of order p.
We glue these structures as follows. We slit $(X_1,\,\omega _1)$ along $b_1$ and denote the resulting edges by $b_1^\pm $ , according to our convention. Identify $b_j^+$ with $b_{j+1}^-$ , where j is taken in $\{0,1\}$ . Finally, identify $a_0^+$ with $a_0^-$ . The final structure, say $(Y,\xi )$ , is a genus-one meromorphic differential with a single zero of order p and one pole of order p. It remains to show that such a structure has rotation number $\gcd (k,p)$ . Consider a small metric circle of radius $\varepsilon $ centered at $P_1$ . After the cut and paste process, these circles form an oriented smooth path with starting point $R\in b_0^-$ and ending point $R'\in b_0^+$ . The points R and $R'$ differ by $\chi (\alpha )$ . We choose a representative of $\alpha $ as the smooth oriented curve obtained by joining these points. The unit tangent vector along $\alpha $ turns clockwise by an angle of $2k\pi $ . We can choose a representative of $\beta $ as any waist curve in the cylinder obtained by gluing the parallelogram $\mathcal {P}$ . Such a curve can be chosen to be geodesic, and hence, its index is zero. Therefore, $(Y,\xi )$ has rotation number equal to $\gcd (-k,0,p,p)=\gcd (k,p)$ as desired. Notice that $\alpha $ cannot have index equal to $-p$ , and hence, the rotation number cannot be p as expected.
The case with two punctures follows after a small modification of the previous construction. We consider a second copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ and let $b_2$ be the geodesic joining the points $P_2$ and $Q_2=P_2+\chi (\beta )$ . In this case, we consider $p-2$ distinct rays leaving from $Q_2$ and intersecting $b_2$ only at $Q_2$ . We then bubble a copy $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along every ray. Equivalently, we consider only one ray, and we bubble along it a copy of $({\mathbb C},\, z^{p-2}dz)$ . The resulting structure is a genus-zero meromorphic differential, say $(X_2,\omega _2)$ with a single zero of order $p-2$ and a pole of order p. We glue these structures as follows. We slit both $(X_i,\,\omega _i)$ along $b_i$ and denote the resulting edges by $b_i^\pm $ , according to our convention. Identify $b_j^+$ with $b_{j+1}^-$ , where j is taken in $\{0,1,2\}$ . The final structure, say $(Y,\xi )$ , is a genus-one meromorphic differential with a single zero of order $2p$ and two poles of order p. The same argument above shows that $(Y,\xi )$ has rotation number $\gcd (k,p)$ as desired, where $k\in \{2,\ldots ,p\}$ . See Figure 16.
5.2.2 Positive volume and more than two punctures
Assume that the representation $\chi $ has positive volume and at least three punctures. This case is nothing but a variation of the case discussed in the paragraph §5.1.2.2. In order to get the desired structure with prescribed rotation number $\gcd (k,p)$ , we shall consider $n-1$ copies of $(\mathbb C,\, dz)$ in this case and we properly modify them to obtain a genus-zero meromorphic differential with a single pole of order p. We begin with these structures.
First of all, we fix a positive integer $k\in \{2,\dots ,p\}$ . Notice that, if $k-1\ge n-2$ , then there exist integers $d\ge 1$ and $0\le l < n-2$ such that $\,k-1=d(n-2)+l\,$ . In the case $k-1< n-2$ , we can always find a positive integer t such that $\,tk-1=n-2+l\,$ and $0\le l< n-2$ (here, $d=1$ ). Let us consider $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ and a pair of points $P,Q$ such that $Q=P+\chi (\beta )$ . We bubble d copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along rays leaving from P and $p-d-2$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along rays leaving from Q. All rays leaving from P (resp. from Q) are taken in such a way they do not contain Q (resp. P): None of them contains the geodesic segment joining P and Q. After bubbling, the resulting structure, say $(X,\omega )$ , is a genus-zero meromorphic differential with two zeros of orders d and $p-d-2$ and a single pole of order p. We consider l copies $(X_1,\omega _1),\dots ,(X_l,\omega _l)$ of this structure. Consider again $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ and the pair of points $P,Q$ such that $Q=P+\chi (\beta )$ . Define $(Y,\xi )$ as the genus-zero differential obtained by bubbling $d-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along rays leaving from P and $p-d-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along rays leaving from Q. Even in this case, the rays are taken so that none of them contains the geodesic segment joining P and Q. We consider $n-l-2$ copies $(Y_1, \xi _1),\dots ,(Y_{n-l-2},\xi _{n-l-2})$ of this structure. Finally, consider another copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ and a segment a with extremal points $P_{n-1}$ and $Q_{n-1}=P_{n-1}+\chi (\alpha )$ . We bubble $k-2$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along rays leaving from $P_{n-1}$ that do not contain $Q_{n-1}$ and we bubble $p-k$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along rays leaving from $Q_{n-1}$ that does not contain $P_{n-1}$ . This genus-zero meromorphic differential, say $(Z,\,\eta )$ , has two zeros of order $k-2$ and $p-k$ and a single pole of order p.
Let $\alpha ,\,\beta $ be a pair of handle generators, and let $a,\,b\in {\mathbb C}$ the corresponding images via $\chi $ . Let $H_1$ and $H_2$ be the half-planes as defined in §5.1.2.2. We denote by $a_0^-,\,b_0^-$ the edges of the boundary of $H_1$ corresponding to $\chi (\alpha )$ and $\chi (\beta )$ , respectively. Similarly, we denote by $a_0^+,\,b_0^+$ the edges of the boundary of $H_2$ corresponding to $\chi (\alpha )$ and $\chi (\beta )$ , respectively. Let Q be the end point of $\chi (\alpha )$ (and hence the starting point of $-\chi (\beta )$ ) on the boundary of $H_2$ . Notice that there are $p-2$ rays, say $r_1,\dots ,r_{p-2}$ , leaving from Q and pointing at the infinity.
It remains to glue all the structures defined so far together. First of all, we slit $(X_i,\omega _i)$ for $i=1,\dots ,l$ along the saddle connection b joining the two zeros of $\omega _i$ . Denote the resulting edges by $b_i^{\pm }$ . In the same fashion, we slit $(Y_j,\xi _j)$ , for $j=1,\dots ,n-l-2$ , along the saddle connection joining the zeros of $\xi _j$ . We finally slit $(Z,\eta )$ along a, and we label the edges as $a_n^{\pm }$ . After slitting, we identify $a_0^+$ with $a_n^-$ and $a_0^-$ with $a_n^+$ . Similarly, we identify $b_i^+$ with $b_{i+1}^-$ , where $i=1,\dots , l-1$ , and $b_j^+$ with $b_{j+1}^-$ , where $j=1,\dots ,n-l-3$ . The remaining identifications are: the edge $b_0^+$ with $b_1^-$ , the edge $b_l^+$ with $b_1^-$ , the edge $b_{n-l-2}^-$ with $b_0^+$ . The resulting structure is a genus-one meromorphic differential. By bubbling $p-2$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , each one along a ray leaving from Q, we get the desired structure with rotation number $\gcd (k,p)$ . In fact, we can choose representatives of $\alpha $ and $\beta $ as in Figure 17. The curve $\alpha $ has index
by construction. It is straightforward to check that the curve $\beta $ has index k. Therefore, the rotation number is equal to $\gcd ( -tk,k,np,p)=\gcd (k,p)$ as desired, where $t=1$ if $k-1\ge n-2$ .
5.2.3 Nonpositive volume and one puncture
This is an easy case to deal with. Let $\alpha ,\,\beta $ be a pair of handle generators, and let $a,b$ be their images via $\chi $ . Let $\mathcal {P}$ be the exterior of the parallelogram (possibly degenerate) defined by the chain
with sides $a^\pm ,\,b^\pm $ according to our convention. Let $r_P$ be a geodesic ray joining P and the pole, and glue along $k-2$ copies of the genus-zero differential $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ as in Definition 3.9. Similarly, let $r_Q$ be a geodesic ray joining Q and the pole and glue along $p-k$ copies of the genus-zero differential $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ . We finally glue $a^+$ with $a^-$ and $b^+$ with $b^-$ . The resulting surface is a genus-one differential in $\mathcal {H}_1(p,-p)$ . It remains to show that it has rotation number $\gcd (k,p)$ . This can be easily verified by choosing $\alpha $ and $\beta $ as in §5.1.2.3 above. See Figure 18.
5.2.4 Nonpositive volume and two punctures
In this case, we consider the quadrilateral $\mathcal {Q}$ already defined in paragraph §5.1.2.4. Recall that $\mathcal {Q}$ is obtained by gluing two triangles, $\mathcal {T}_1$ with vertices $P,\,P+\chi (\alpha ),\,Q$ and $\mathcal {T}_2$ with vertices $P,\,P-\chi (\beta ),\,Q$ , where $Q=P+\chi (\alpha )-\chi (\beta )$ . There are two pairs of opposite sides one of which differ by a translation $\chi (\alpha )$ and the other by a translation $\chi (\beta )$ . See paragraph §5.1.2.4 for more details about this construction.
Given a positive integer $k\in \{2,\dots ,p\}$ , we consider $k-2$ rays leaving from $P-\chi (\beta )$ and $p-k$ rays leaving from P such that they all point towards the pole contained in $\mathcal {T}_2$ . Next, we consider other $p-2$ rays all leaving from $P+\chi (\alpha )$ and pointing towards the pole contained in $\mathcal {T}_1$ . By gluing the opposite sides of $\mathcal {Q}$ by using the translations $\chi (\alpha )$ and $\chi (\beta )$ , we obtain a genus-one meromorphic differential, say $(X,\omega )$ with a single zero of order $2p$ and two poles of order p. It remains to show that $(X,\omega )$ has rotation number $\gcd (k,p)$ . We can choose the curves $\alpha $ and $\beta $ as in §5.1.2.42; see Figure 19. By construction, $\alpha $ has index $ -k$ and $\beta $ has index p. Therefore, $\gcd ( -k,p,2p,p)=\gcd (k,p)$ as desired.
5.2.5 Nonpositive volume and more than two punctures
This is the last case to handle in this section, and it is similar to the case discussed in §5.2.2. Recall that, for a positive integer $k\in \{2,\dots ,p\}$ we have introduced two integers $d,l\in {\mathbb Z}^+$ and used them to define the genus-zero differentials $(X,\omega )$ , $(Y,\xi )$ and $(Z, \eta )$ ; see Section §5.2.2 for these constructions. In this case, we still consider l copies, say $(X_1,\omega _1),\dots ,(X_l,\omega _l)$ of $(X,\omega )$ . Recall that l can be zero. We then consider $n-l-2$ copies of $(Y,\xi )$ that we denote as $(Y_1,\xi _1),\dots ,(Y_{n-l-2},\xi _{n-l-2})$ and a unique copy of $(Z,\eta )$ .
Let $\alpha ,\,\beta $ be a pair of handle generators, and let $\mathcal {P}$ be the closure of the exterior parallelogram in ${\mathbb C}$ defined by the chain
where $P_0\in {\mathbb C}$ is any point. Notice that we can find $p-2$ rays, say $r_1,\dots ,r_{p-2}$ , leaving from Q pointing at the infinity; see Figure 20. As in Section §5.2.2, we glue all these structures together in the usual way. The resulting structure is a genus-one meromorphic differential. By bubbling a copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along $r_i$ , for any $i=1,\dots ,p-2$ , we obtain a genus-one meromorphic differential with one zero of order $np$ and n poles of order p.
It just remains to show that this latter structure has the desired rotation number $\gcd (k,p)$ . If we choose the curves $\alpha $ and $\beta $ as shown in Figure 20, we can observe that
and $\text {Ind}(\beta )=k$ by construction. Therefore, $\gcd ( -tk,k,np,p)=\gcd (k,p)$ as desired. This concludes the proof of Lemma 5.5.
Remark 5.6. It is also possible to realize a genus-one meromorphic differential with poles of order p, a single zero of maximal order and rotation number one by bubbling sufficiently many copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along rays on a genus-one differential with poles of order two obtained as in Section §5.1.1. Suppose $(X,\omega )$ is a such a structure. We can find n rays, all leaving from the unique zero of $\omega $ and such that each one joins a pole of $\omega $ . Different rays join different poles. Then we can bubble $p-2$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\, dz)$ along every ray. The resulting structure turns out to be a genus-one differential with n poles each of order p. If these rays are properly chosen, it is also possible to preserve the rotation number. In Figures 8 and 9, the dotted lines are possible candidates. Bubbling along them one gets a genus-one meromorphic differential with poles of order p, and since the indices of the curves $\alpha $ and $\beta $ are not affected by any bubbling, the rotation number does not change. In a similar fashion in certain cases, it is possible to realize a genus-one meromorphic differential with poles of order p and rotation number two. In fact, it is possible to modify the structures obtained in Figures 10, 11 and 12 by bubbling $p-2$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\, dz)$ along each dotted line. The indices of $\alpha $ and $\beta $ are not affected in these cases, and therefore, the resulting structures have rotation number two.
5.3 Strata with poles with nonzero residue
We consider the case of characters $\chi $ of nontrivial-ends type. Notice that this automatically implies $n\ge 2$ . Here, we shall consider $S_{1,n}$ as the surface obtained by gluing the surfaces $S_{1,2}$ and $S_{0,n}$ along a ray joining two punctures as in Definition 3.10 with the only difference that for the moment no geometry is involved; see Figure 21.
The idea behind the proof of this case is as follow. Starting from the representation $\chi $ we shall introduce a new representation $\rho \colon \text {H}_1(S_{1,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ which, in principle, does not need to be the restriction of $\chi $ to any subsurface of $S_{1,\,n}$ homeomorphic to $S_{1,2}$ . For any $p\ge 2$ and for any $k\in {\mathbb Z}$ dividing p, we can realize $\rho $ in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(2p;-p,-p)$ as the holonomy of a genus-one differential with rotation number k as done in Sections §5.1 and §5.2. Then we properly modify this structure in order to get the desired one. To this latter, in the case $n\ge 3$ , we shall finally glue a genus-zero meromorphic differential in order to obtain the desired structure on $S_{1,\,n}$ with period character $\chi $ and prescribed rotation number.
To define an auxiliary representation $\rho $ , we provide a more general definition which we need to use later on.
Definition 5.7 (Auxiliary representation)
Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a representation of nontrivial-ends type and $\imath \colon S_{h,\,m}\hookrightarrow S_{g,n}$ be an embedding with $1\le h\le g$ and $1\le m \le n$ . Let $\{\alpha _i,\beta _i\}_{1\le i\le h}$ be a system of handle generators for $ \text {H}_1(S_{h,\,m},\,{\mathbb Z})$ . We define an auxiliary representation $\rho \colon \text {H}_1(S_{h,\,m},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ as follows:
where $\delta _1,\dots ,\delta _m$ are simple closed curves each of which encloses a puncture on $S_{h,\,m}$ and oriented in such a way that $[\alpha _1,\beta _1]\cdots [\alpha _h,\beta _h]=\delta _1\cdots \delta _m$ . If $h=g$ and $m=n$ , then the embedding $\imath $ can be taken as the identity map.
Before proceeding, once again, we recall for the reader’s convenience that no puncture is assumed to be a simple pole; see Remark 5.2. Moreover, in this section we assume that all poles have the same order $p\ge 2$ . We shall distinguish three cases according to the following subsections.
5.3.1 Two poles with nonzero residue
We suppose $n=2$ , and hence, $\chi \colon \text {H}_1(S_{1,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ is a representation such that
where $\delta _1,\,\delta _2$ are nonhomotopic simple closed curves both enclosing a single puncture of $S_{1,2}$ . We introduce an auxiliary representation $\rho \colon \text {H}_1(S_{1,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ , as in Definition 5.7, defined as
Let $(X,\omega )$ be the translation surface with period character $\rho $ and rotation number k realized as in Section §5; more precisely as in §5.1 if $p=2$ or as in §5.2.1 and §5.2.4 if $p>2$ . The following holds.
Lemma 5.8. There is a bi-infinite geodesic ray joining the poles such that its direction after developing, say $v\in {\mathbb C}$ , is different from w.
Suppose Lemma 5.8 holds; then we can find a bi-infinite geodesic ray $r\subset (X,\omega )$ joining the two poles and such that its direction after developing is $v\neq w$ . Let $C_w=\mathbb {E}^2/\langle z\mapsto z+w\rangle $ , and let $\pi _w\colon \mathbb {E}^2\to C_w$ be the covering projection. Since $v\neq w$ , we can glue $C_w$ along the bi-infinite ray r as in Definition 3.13. In fact, any straight line with direction v in $\mathbb E^2$ projects to a bi-infinite geodesic line which wraps around $C_w$ . Let $\overline {r}\subset C_w$ be a bi-infinite geodesic ray with direction v after developing. Slit $(X,\omega )$ along r, and let $r^\pm $ be the resulting edges. Similarly, slit $C_w$ along $\overline {r}$ and call the resulting edges $\overline {r}^\pm $ . Notice that $C_w\setminus \overline {r}$ is an infinite open strip whose closure is obtained by adding the edges $\overline {r}^\pm $ . We can glue this latter closed strip to the slit $(X,\omega )$ by identifying $r^+$ with $\overline {r}^-$ and $r^-$ with $\overline {r}^+$ . The resulting translation surface $(Y,\xi )$ is still a genus-one differential. The differential $\xi $ has a single zero of order $2p$ and two poles of order p with residue $\pm w$ by construction. Therefore, $(Y,\xi )$ has period character $\chi $ and rotation number k as a consequence of Lemma 3.15. It remains to show Lemma 5.8.
Proof of Lemma 5.8
Let $\chi \colon \text {H}_1(S_{1,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a representation, let $\{\alpha ,\,\beta \}$ be a pair of handle generators and let $a=\chi (\alpha )$ and $b=\chi (\beta )$ be their images. We provide a direct proof case by case. For the following cases, we rely on the constructions developed in Section §5.1.1.
-
• Case 1: positive volume with $p=2$ and $k=1$ . In this case, a genus-one differential with period $\chi $ is obtained by gluing together the quadrilateral $\mathcal {P}$ with edges $a_0^\pm $ and $b_0^\pm $ (according to our convention) and two genus-zero differentials, say $(X_i,\omega _i)$ for $i=1,2$ . Notice that $\mathcal {P}$ cannot be degenerate because the volume of $\chi $ is positive. From §5.1.1.1, recall that $(X_1,\omega _1)$ is slit along a geodesic segment joining $P_1$ with $Q_1=P_1+a$ and recall that $(X_2,\omega _2)$ is slit along a geodesic segment joining $P_2$ with $Q_2=P_2+b$ . Let $\delta $ be the oriented angle between $b_0^-$ and $a_0^+$ . Let $r_1$ be a geodesic ray on $(X_1,\omega _1)$ leaving from $Q_1$ with angle $0<\theta <\pi -\delta $ with respect to $a^-$ . Finally, let $r_2$ be the geodesic ray leaving from $Q_2$ with angle $\pi -(\delta +\theta )$ with respect to $b^+$ . Once $\mathcal {P}$ is glued with $(X_1,\omega _1)$ and $(X_2,\omega _2)$ as described in §5.1.1.1, the rays $r_1$ and $r_2$ form a bi-infinite geodesic ray, say r, on the final surface passing through the branch point, obtained after identification and such that its developed image is a geodesic straight line in $\mathbb {E}^2$ . The construction has been done in such a way that r leaves the branch point with angle $\pi $ on the left. Notice that a similar construction can be done so that r leaves the branch point with angle $\pi $ on the right. See Figure 22a.
-
• Case 2: nonpositive volume with $p=2$ and $k=1$ . In this case, a genus-one differential with period $\chi $ is obtained by removing the interior of the quadrilateral $\mathcal {P}$ with edges $a_0^\pm $ and $b_0^\pm $ from a copy $({\mathbb C},\, dz)$ and then glue another copy of $({\mathbb C},\, dz)$ slit along a geodesic segment joining P with $Q=P+b$ ; see §5.1.1.2. Here, $\mathcal {P}$ could be degenerate. Let $r_1$ be a geodesic ray on ${\mathbb C}\setminus \text {int}\big (\mathcal {P}\big )$ leaving from $P+a+b$ with angle $0<\theta <\pi $ with respect to $b_0^-$ . Then define $r_2$ as the geodesic ray leaving from Q with angle $\pi -\theta $ with respect to $b_1^+$ . After gluing as described in 5.1.1.2, the rays $r_1$ and $r_2$ form a bi-infinite geodesic ray on the final surface, passing through the branch point obtained after identification and such that its developed image is a geodesic line in $\mathbb {E}^2$ . The construction has been done in such a way that r leaves the branch point with angle $\pi $ on the left. A similar construction can be done so that r leaves the branch point with angle $\pi $ on the right. See Figure 22a.
For the remaining cases, we rely on the constructions made in §5.2.1 and §5.2.4. Recall that both of these constructions extend those made in §5.1.2.1 and §5.1.2.4 for the case $p=2$ and rotation number two. Therefore, we can handle all these cases together.
-
• Case 3: positive volume and $p>2$ or $p=2$ with $k=2$ . In the case $p=2$ and $k=2$ or $p>2$ , a genus-one differential with period $\chi $ is obtained by gluing together the quadrilateral $\mathcal {P}$ with edges $a_0^\pm $ and $b_0^\pm $ (according to our convention) and two genus-zero differentials, say $(X_i,\omega _i)$ for $i=1,2$ , both slit along a geodesic segment joining $P_i$ with $Q_i=P_i+b$ . Recall that if $p=2$ , then $(X_i,\omega _i)$ is a copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ for $i=1,2$ ; see §5.1.2.1. In the case $p>2$ , then $(X_1,\omega _1)$ is a genus-zero differential with two zeros of orders $k-2$ and $p-k$ at $P_1$ and $Q_1$ , respectively, and one pole of order p, whereas $(X_2,\omega _2)$ is a genus-zero differential with one zero of order $p-2$ at $Q_2$ and one pole of order p. In both cases, we shall define $r_1$ as the geodesic ray on $(X_1,\omega _1)$ leaving from $Q_1$ with angle $0<\theta <\pi $ with respect to $b_1^-$ . Then we define $r_2$ as the geodesic ray leaving from $Q_2$ with angle $\pi -\theta $ with respect to $b_2^+$ . Once $\mathcal {P}$ is glued with $(X_1,\omega _1)$ and $(X_2,\omega _2)$ as described in §5.1.2.1, the rays $r_1$ and $r_2$ form a bi-infinite geodesic ray on the final surface, passing through the branch point obtained after identification and such that its developed image is a geodesic straight line in $\mathbb {E}^2$ . The construction has been done in such a way that r leaves the branch point with angle $\pi $ on the left. A similar construction can be done so that r leaves the branch point with angle $\pi $ on the right. See Figure 23a.
-
• Case 4: nonpositive volume and $p>2$ or $p=2$ with $k=2$ . In this last case, we realize a genus-one differential exactly as we have done in §5.1.2.4 if $p=2$ or as in §5.2.4 if $p>2$ . By adopting the notation used there, we can observe that the angle at Q is $\frac {3\pi }{2}$ in both constructions. There is enough room for finding a bi-infinite ray passing through the branch point such that one of the two angles is $\pi $ . Moreover, we can choose this bi-infinite ray such that the angle with respect to $b^-$ is $0<\theta <\pi $ . The construction has been done in such a way that r leaves the branch point with angle $\pi $ on the right. A similar construction can be done so that r leaves the branch point with angle $\pi $ on the left. See Figure 23a.
We finally observe that in all constructions the direction of the bi-infinite ray r depends on the angle $\theta $ which can be chosen with certain flexibility. In particular, $\theta $ can be chosen in such a way that r has direction v after developing with $v\neq w$ as desired. This concludes the proof of Lemma 5.8.
5.3.2 All poles with nonzero residue
Assume $n\ge 3$ , and now we deal with a representation of nontrivial-ends type $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ . Let $\gamma _i\subseteq S_{1,n}$ denote a simple closed curve enclosing the i-th puncture, and define $w_i=\chi (\gamma _i)$ . Since no puncture has zero residue, it follows that $w_i\in {\mathbb C}^*$ for any $i=1,\dots ,n$ . Recall that $w_1+\cdots +w_n=0$ as a consequence of the residue theorem. Before proceeding with this case, we introduce some notations and generalities.
Let us split $S_{1,n}$ as in Figure 21, and focus on the surface $S_{0,n} \cong \mathbb {S}^2\setminus \{P_1,\dots ,P_{n} \}$ of such a splitting. Let $\gamma _i$ be the simple closed curve enclosing the puncture $P_{i}$ on $S_{0,n}$ for $i=1,\dots ,n$ . For the reader’s convenience we recall that the $\chi _n$ -part of $\chi $ is a representation defined as follows:
Notice that, since $w_1+\cdots +w_n=0$ , the representation $\chi _{n}$ is well defined. We now need to extend our earlier Definition 4.8 as follows:
Definition 5.9. A real-collinear representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ is called rational if the image $\text {Im}(\chi )$ is contained in the $\mathbb Q$ -span of some $c\in {\mathbb C}^*$ . A real-collinear representation $\chi $ is not rational otherwise.
Definition 5.10 (Reordering property)
Let $w_1,\dots ,w_n\in \mathbb R^*$ be nonzero real numbers with zero sum, namely they satisfy $w_1+\cdots +w_n=0$ . We shall say that $\{w_1,\dots ,w_n\}$ satisfy the reordering property if there is a permutation $\sigma \in \mathfrak {S}_n$ and an integer smaller than n such that
-
• $w_{\sigma (i)}>0$ for any $1\le \sigma (i)\le h$ ,
-
• $w_{\sigma (i)}<0$ for any $h+1\le \sigma (i) \le n$ , and
-
• the following condition:
(53) $$ \begin{align} \sum_{\sigma(i)=1}^s w_{\sigma(i)} =-\sum_{\sigma(j)=t+1}^n w_{\sigma(j)} \end{align} $$holds only for $s=t=h$ .
Notice that this definition can naturally extend to sets of real-collinear complex numbers with zero sum.
This definition is slightly different from those used in [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22]. As we shall see, the reordering property plays an important role in this section. The following lemma holds, and the proof can be found in [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Appendix B].
Lemma 5.11. Let $W=\{w_1, \ldots , w_{n}\}\subset \mathbb R^*$ be a set of nonzero real numbers with zero sum. Suppose there exists a pair of numbers in W with irrational ratio. Then W satisfies the reordering property.
From [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22], we also need to invoke the following proposition about holonomy representations of genus-zero differentials with prescribed order of zeros and poles.
Proposition 5.12. Let $\chi _n\colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{0,n},\mathbb {Z}) \to \mathbb {C}$ be a nontrivial representation. Let $p_1, p_2, \ldots , p_n\in {\mathbb Z}^+$ be positive integers satisfying the following properties:
-
• Either
-
– $\chi _n$ is not real-collinear; that is, $\mathrm {Im}(\chi _{n})$ is not contained in the $\mathbb R$ -span of some $c\in {\mathbb C}^*$ ,
-
– $\chi _n$ is real-collinear but not rational; that is, $\mathrm {Im}(\chi _{n})$ is contained in the $\mathbb R$ -span but not in the $\mathbb Q$ -span of some $c\in {\mathbb C}^*$ ,
-
– at least one of $p_1, p_2, \ldots ,p_n$ is different from 1, and
-
-
• $p_i \geq 2$ whenever $\chi (\gamma _i) =0$ .
Then $\chi $ appears as the holonomy of a translation structure on $S_{0,n}$ determined by a meromorphic differential on $\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ with a single zero of order $m=p_1+\cdots +p_n-2$ and a pole of order $p_i$ at the puncture enclosed by the curve $\gamma _i$ , for each $1\leq i\leq n$ .
We shall need to consider two subcases depending on whether $\chi _n$ is rational. We begin with the following case:
5.3.2.1 The representation $\chi _{n}$ is not rational
Let $\alpha ,\beta $ be a pair of handle generators for $\text {H}_1(S_{1,2},\,\mathbb {Z})$ . By means of an auxiliary representation $\rho $ defined as in Equation (51) (see also Definition 5.7), we can realize a genus-one differential $(X_1,\omega _1)\in \mathcal {H}_1(2p;-p,-p)$ with rotation number k and period character defined as
We apply Proposition 5.12 to our representation $\chi _n$ and realize this latter as the period character of a genus-zero differential $(X_2,\omega _2)\in \mathcal {H}_0\big ((n-2)p;-1,-1,-p,\dots ,-p\big )$ .
In order to realize the desired surface, we shall glue them along a bi-infinite geodesic ray. Recall that, according to Lemma 5.8, we can always find a bi-infinite geodesic ray on $(X_1,\omega _1)$ with prescribed direction (hence slope) once developed such that:
-
(i) it passes through the zero of $\omega _1$ only once with angle $\pi $ on its right, and
-
(ii) it joins the poles of $\omega _1$ .
Let $r\subset (X_1,\omega _1)$ be a ray as above with direction v once developed. What remains to do is to find a proper bi-infinite ray on $(X_2,\omega _2)$ with the same direction and passing through the unique zero of $\omega _2$ with angle $\pi $ on its left. Here, $\text {Im}(\chi _n)$ is assumed to be not contained in the $\mathbb {Q}$ -span of any $c\in {\mathbb C}^*$ , and hence, according to [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Proof of Proposition 10.1], there are two possible situations:
-
1. The first one arises if $\text {Im}(\chi _n)$ is not contained in the $\mathbb {R}$ -span of any $c\in {\mathbb C}^*$ . Whenever this is the case, we can reorder the punctures in such a way that the points $\{\arg (w_i)\}\subset \mathbb {S}^1$ , with $w_i=\chi (\gamma _i)$ , are cyclically ordered. With respect to this ordering, the vectors $w_i$ yield a convex polygon $\mathcal {P}$ with n sides. Denote the edges of $\mathcal {P}$ as $e_i^-$ , for $i=1,\dots ,n$ . To any side, we can glue a half-infinite strip $\mathcal {S}_i$ bounded by the edge $e_i^+$ and two infinite parallel rays $r_i^{\pm }$ oriented so that $r_i^+=r_i^-+w_i$ . The quotient space $\mathcal {P}\cup \bigcup \mathcal {S}_i$ obtained by identifying the vertices of $\mathcal {P}$ and the rays $r_i^{\pm }$ , for $i=1,\dots ,n$ , turns out to be an n-punctured sphere with a translation structure with all simple poles and a single zero of maximal order. In this case, it is an easy matter to see that for almost any slope $\theta \in \mathbb {S}^1$ (hence almost any directions), there is a bi-infinite geodesic ray with slope $\theta $ . Therefore, we can find a bi-infinite geodesic ray, say $\overline {r}$ , with direction v and such that it passes through the zero of $\omega _2$ by leaving an angle of magnitude $\pi $ on its left. Such a ray joins two adjacent poles say $P_j$ and $P_{j+1}$ . We define $(X_2,\omega _2)$ as the translation structure obtained by bubbling p copies of the standard differential $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ to all poles with the only exceptions being $P_j$ and $P_{j+1}$ . Finally, glue $(X_1,\omega _1)$ and $(X_2,\omega _2)$ as in Definition 3.9 by slitting them along the rays r and $\overline r$ , respectively. The resulting surface is homeomorphic to $S_{g,n}$ and carries a translation surface with poles $(Y,\xi )\in \mathcal {H}_1\big (np;-p,\dots ,-p \big )$ with rotation number k by construction.
-
2. The second possibility arises in the case $\chi _n$ is real-collinear but not rational. In order to recall the construction, we assume for a moment that $\arg (w_i)\in \{0,\pi \}$ , that is, $w_i\in \mathbb R$ , because the general case of $\arg (w_i)\in \{\delta ,\delta +\pi \}$ follows by rotating the following construction by $\delta $ . Up to relabelling the punctures, there is a positive integer, say h less than n, such that $\{w_1,\dots ,w_h\}$ are all positive real numbers and $\{w_{h+1},\dots ,w_n\}$ are all negative real numbers. Since $\text {Im}(\chi _n)$ is not contained in the $\mathbb {Q}$ -span of any $c\in {\mathbb C}^*$ it is possible to find a pair of reals in $\{w_1,\dots ,w_n\}$ with irrational ratio; hence, Lemma 5.11 applies and the reals $w_1,\dots ,w_n$ satisfy the reordering property. Let $\zeta _1=0$ , and let us define $\zeta _{l+1}=\zeta _{l}+w_l$ . Consider the infinite strip $\{ z \in \mathbb {C} \,\, \vert \,\, 0 < \Re (z) < \zeta _{h+1} \}$ . In this infinite strip, we make half-infinite vertical slits pointing upwards at the points $\zeta _2, \ldots , \zeta _{h}$ and half-infinite vertical slits pointing downwards at the points $\zeta _{h+2}, \ldots , \zeta _{n}$ ; see Figure 24. By gluing the rays $r_i^+$ and $r_i^-$ for $i=1,\dots ,n$ , we obtain a translation surface $(Z, \eta )$ with all simple poles and a single zero of maximal order.
In this case, for any $\theta \neq 0$ we can find a bi-infinite geodesic ray, say $\overline r$ joining two punctures and passing through the branch point by leaving an angle $\pi $ on its left. In fact, we can consider a ray leaving from $\zeta _h$ with angle $\theta $ with respect to $r_h^+$ . Such a ray points towards the puncture $P_h$ . Then consider a ray leaving from $\zeta _{h+1}$ with angle $\pi -\theta $ with respect to $r_h^-$ pointing towards the puncture $P_{h+1}$ . These rays determine the desired bi-infinite geodesic ray, say $\overline r$ , on $(Z,\eta )$ . In fact, by construction it joins two punctures and leaves an angle of magnitude $\pi $ on its left at the unique branch point of $(Z,\eta )$ . We define $(X_2,\omega _2)$ as the structure obtained by bubbling p copies of the differential $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ to all poles with the only exceptions being $P_h$ and $P_{h+1}$ . As above, we glue $(X_1,\omega _1)$ and $(X_2,\omega _2)$ as in Definition 3.9 by slitting them along r and $\overline r$ , respectively. The final surface is homeomorphic to $S_{g,n}$ and carries a translation structure with poles in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1\big (np;-p,\dots ,-p \big )$ with rotation number k by construction.
For more details about these constructions, the reader can consult the proofs of [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Propositions 6.1 and 10.1].
5.3.2.2 The representation $\chi _{n}$ is rational
It remains to deal with the case of $\chi _n$ being rational. The strategy developed in paragraph §5.3.2.1 does not always apply because for a rational representation (Definition 5.9) the reordering property (Definition 5.10) fails in general. Whenever a rational representation $\chi _n$ satisfies the reordering property, then the construction developed for a nonrational real-collinear representation as in paragraph §5.3.2.1 applies mutatis mutandis. Therefore, in what follows, we shall restrict ourselves to rational representations for which the reordering property fails. In this very special situation, we shall adopt a strategy which is a blend of our construction so far with [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Proof of Proposition 10.1 - Case 3]. In particular, we do not rely on the splitting introduced at the beginning of §5.3.
Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a nontrivial representation with rational $\chi _n$ -part. Let $\Sigma \subset S_{1,n}$ be any handle, let $\alpha ,\beta $ be a pair of handle generators for $\text {H}_1(\Sigma ,\,\mathbb {Z})\subset \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})$ and define $a,b$ as their respective images via $\chi $ . The restriction of $\chi $ to $\Sigma $ is a representation of trivial-end type, say $\chi _1$ , and hence, the notion of volume for $\chi _1$ is well defined. According to the sign of $\text {vol}(\chi _1)$ , we shall distinguish two constructions. We shall treat the positive volume case in detail; the nonpositive volume one will follow after a simple modification of the first case. Let $\mathcal {P}$ be the parallelogram defined by the chain
where $P_0\in {\mathbb C}$ is any point. As usual, we label the sides of $\mathcal {P}$ with $a^{\pm }_0$ and $b_0^{\pm }$ according to our convention.
We now consider the $\chi _n$ -part of $\chi $ . The representation $\chi _n\colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{0,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ is a nontrivial representation, and we denote $\chi _n(\gamma _i)=w_i\in {\mathbb C}^*$ for any i, where $\gamma _i$ is a simple closed curve around the i-th puncture. We assume $W=\{w_1,\dots ,w_n\}\subset {\mathbb C}^*$ is a set of real-collinear complex numbers. Up to permutation of the labels of the punctures, we can assume that all numbers in $\{w_1,\dots ,w_h\}$ have the same argument $\delta \in ]-\pi ,\,\pi ]$ and all numbers in $\{w_{h+1},\dots ,w_n\}$ have the same argument $\pi +\delta $ for some $1\le h\le n-1$ . Assume that W does not satisfy the reordering property. According to Definition 5.10, there are two positive integers $1\le s < h$ and $h+1\le t < n$ such that
The indices $s,t$ yield the following two partitions: $W_1^\delta \cup W_2^\delta =\{w_1,\dots , w_s\}\cup \{w_{s+1},\dots ,w_h\}$ of $\{w_1,\dots ,w_h\}$ and the partition $W_2^{\pi +\delta }\cup W_1^{\pi +\delta }=\{w_{h+1},\dots ,w_{t}\}\cup \{w_{t+1},\dots ,w_n\}$ of $\{w_{h+1},\dots ,w_n\}$ . We can observe that the collections $W_1=W_1^\delta \cup W_1^{\pi +\delta }$ and $W_2=W_2^\delta \cup W_2^{\pi +\delta }$ both have zero sum by construction. Generally, the indices $s,t$ are not uniquely determined, and hence, there can be different partitions. On the other hand, the following construction does not depend on the choice of the partition wherever there are more than one. Finally, we can assume without loss of generality that $\delta $ has magnitude such that $-\arg (b)<\delta \le \arg (b)$ . Let us proceed with our construction.
Let $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ be a copy of the standard genus-zero meromorphic differential, and slit it along a geodesic segment $b_1$ with extremal points $P_1$ and $Q_1=P_1+\chi (\beta )$ . Consider the collection $W_1$ above. According to our notation, we set $\zeta _1=Q_1$ and thus define the point $\zeta _{l+1}=\zeta _l+w_{l}$ , where $w_{l}\in W_1$ ( $l=1,\dots , s,t+1,\dots ,n$ ). Define $e=\overline {\zeta _1\,\zeta _{s+1}}$ , and notice that $e\cap b_1=\zeta _1$ because $\delta \neq -\arg (b)$ . We next slit the structure $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along the edge e and label the resulting sides as $e^{\pm }$ , where the sign is taken according to our convention. We partition the edge $e^+$ as follow: We define $e_l^+=\overline {\zeta _l\,\zeta _{l+1}}$ for $l=1,\dots , s$ . Notice that these segments are pairwise adjacent or disjoint. Moreover, by construction, $e^+=e_1^+\cup \cdots \cup e_s^+$ . In the same fashion, we partition the edge $e^-$ as follows: We define $e_{l}^-=\overline {\zeta _{l}\,\zeta _{l+1}}$ for $l=t+1,\dots , n$ . By construction, $e^-=e_{t+1}^-\cup \cdots \cup e_{n}^-$ . We eventually slit $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along the ray $\overline r_1$ starting from $\zeta _1$ , orthogonal to e with oriented angle $\frac {\pi }{2}$ with respect to e. Finally, we introduce $n+s-t$ half-strips as follows: For any $l=1,\dots ,s$ , we define $\mathcal {S}_l$ as an infinite half-strip bounded by the geodesic segment $e_l^-$ and by two infinite rays $r_l^{\pm }$ pointing in the direction $\delta +\frac {\pi }{2}$ ; and for any $l=t+1,\dots ,n$ , the strip $\mathcal {S}_l$ is bounded by the geodesic segment $e_l^+$ and by two infinite rays $r_l^{\pm }$ pointing in the direction $\delta -\frac {\pi }{2}$ .
We next consider another copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ ; we slit it along a geodesic segment $b_2$ with extremal points $P_2$ and $Q_2=P_2+\chi (\beta )$ . Here, we consider the collection $W_2=\{w_{s+1},\dots , w_t\}$ above and then we similarly proceed as above: We set $\zeta _{s+1}=Q_2$ and thus define the point $\zeta _{l+1}=\zeta _l+w_{l}$ , where $w_{l}\in W_2$ . Define $\overline e=\overline {\zeta _{s+1}\,\zeta _{h+1}}$ and notice that $\overline e\cap b_2=\zeta _{s+1}$ because $\delta \neq -\arg (b)$ . We then slit the structure $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along the edge $\overline e$ and label the resulting sides as $\overline e^{\pm }$ . As above the edge $\overline e^+$ is partitioned by segments $e_l^+=\overline {\zeta _l\,\zeta _{l+1}}$ for $l=s+1,\dots , h$ . By construction, $\overline e^+=e_{s+1}^+\cup \cdots \cup e_h^+$ . In the same fashion, the edge $e^-$ is partitioned by segments $e_{l}^-=\overline {\zeta _{l}\,\zeta _{l+1}}$ for $l=h+1,\dots , t$ . It follows by construction that $\overline e^-=e_{h+1}^-\cup \cdots \cup e_{t}^-$ . We eventually slit $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along $\overline r_{s+1}$ , the ray starting from $\zeta _{s+1}$ , orthogonal to $\overline e$ with oriented angle $\frac {\pi }{2}$ with respect to $\overline e$ . We introduce $t-s$ half-strips as follows: For any $l=s+1,\dots ,h$ , the infinite half-strip $\mathcal {S}_l$ is bounded by the geodesic segment $e_l^-$ and by two infinite rays $r_l^{\pm }$ pointing towards the direction $\delta +\frac {\pi }{2}$ ; for any $l=h+1,\dots ,t$ , let $\mathcal {S}_l$ be an infinite half-strip bounded by the geodesic segment $e_l^+$ and by two infinite rays $r_l^{\pm }$ pointing in the direction $\delta -\frac {\pi }{2}$ .
We can finally glue all the pieces together and then obtain the desired structure. We begin by some usual identifications, namely we identify the pair of edges $b_j^-$ and $b_{j+1}^+$ , for $j=0,1,2$ and $b_3^+=b_0^+$ , and then the pair of edges $a^+$ and $a^-$ . We next proceed with gluing the strips $\mathcal {S}_l$ , for $l=1,\dots ,n$ , in the following way. For any $l\notin \{1,s+1$ }, we paste the strip $\mathcal {S}_l$ by identifying $e_l^+$ with $e_l^-$ and then the rays $r_l^+$ and $r_l^-$ together. In the case $l\in \{1,s+1\}$ , we paste the strip $\mathcal {S}_l$ in a different way, by first identifying the edges $e_l^-$ with $e_l^-$ and then identifying $r_l^+$ with $\overline r_l^-$ and $r_l^-$ with $\overline r_l^+$ ; see Figure 25.
The resulting surface is a genus-one differential $(Y,\xi )$ with one single zero, two double poles and $n-2$ simple poles. It remains to bubble sufficiently many copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ in order to get the desired pole orders and rotation number. Once identified together, the rays $r_l^+$ and $r_l^-$ determine an infinite ray $\tilde r_l\subset (Y,\xi )$ joining the unique zero of $\xi $ and a simple pole for any $l\notin \{1,s+1\}$ . We bubble along any such a ray a copy of the genus-zero differential $({\mathbb C},\, z^{p-2}dz)$ . Equivalently, we bubble $p-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ . All simple poles are turned to higher-order poles of order p with nonzero residue. By construction, we can always find an infinite ray leaving from $Q_2$ and pointing towards the infinity. We bubble along such a ray a copy of $({\mathbb C},\, z^{p-2}dz)$ . Finally, we can find an infinite ray leaving from $P_1$ and another leaving from $Q_1$ which are disjoint and both point towards the infinity. We bubble a copy of $({\mathbb C},\, z^{k-2}dz)$ along the first ray and a copy of $({\mathbb C},\, z^{p-k}dz)$ along the second ray. The final surface is a genus-one differential $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal {H}_1(np; -p,\dots ,-p)$ where each pole has nonzero residue. By choosing $\alpha $ and $\beta $ as in §5.2.1, one can show that $(X,\omega )$ has rotation number equal to $\gcd (k,p)$ as desired.
So far, we have focused on the case that the representation $\chi _1$ has positive volume. The nonpositive volume case works in the same fashion with the only exception being that the interior of the parallelogram $\mathcal {P}$ defined by the above chain (55) is cut out from the first copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ considered above. The rest of the construction works mutatis mutandis for the case of nonpositive volume; see Figure 26. Alternatively, since $\chi $ is of nontrivial-ends type, Lemma 4.9 applies and one can find another pair of handle generators such that the respective volume is positive.
Remark 5.13. There is an exceptional case not covered by the construction above, which is a representation of nontrivial-ends type $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ as the holonomy of some genus-one differential in the connected component of the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(2n, -2,\dots ,-2)$ of translation surfaces with rotation number one. Recall that here we assume that $\chi $ has rational $\chi _n$ -part and $\text {Im}(\chi _n)$ does not satisfy the reordering property. Nevertheless, a slight modification of the previous construction permits to realize $\chi $ even in this special case. In short, the modification consists in pasting all the strips $\mathcal {S}_l$ in one copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ . This can be simply done as follows. We define $e=\overline {\zeta _1\,\zeta _{h+1}}$ and let $e^{\pm }$ be the edges we obtain by slitting $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along e. Then we partition $e^+=e_1^+\cup \cdots \cup e_h^+$ and $e^-=e_{h+1}^-\cup \cdots \cup e_n^-$ . The rest of the construction is essentially the same.
5.3.3 At least one pole has zero residue
Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a representation of nontrivial-ends type. As above, let $\gamma _i$ denote a simple closed curve enclosing the i-th puncture. In this subsection, we assume that $\chi (\gamma _i)\neq 0$ for $i=1,\dots ,m<n$ and $\chi (\gamma _i)=0$ for $i=m+1,\dots ,n$ . The representation $\chi $ naturally yields a new representation $\overline \chi \colon \text {H}_1(S_{1,m},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ of nontrivial-ends type obtained by ‘filling’ the punctures with labelling $i=m+1,\dots ,n$ .
Let $\chi _m\colon \text {H}_1(S_{0,m},\,\mathbb Z)\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be the $\chi _m$ -part of the representation $\overline \chi $ . We distinguish two cases as follows. If the representation $\chi _m$ is not real-collinear (see Definition 5.9), or it is real-collinear and satisfies the reordering property (see Definition 5.10), we need to introduce an auxiliary representation as in Definition 5.7:
where $\{\alpha ,\beta \}$ is a pair of handle generators of $\text {H}_1(S_{1,\,n-m+1},\,\mathbb Z)\subset \text {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\,\mathbb Z)$ . According to the constructions developed in Sections §5.1 and §5.2, we can realize $\rho $ as the holonomy of some translation structure $(X_1,\omega _1)$ in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1\big ( (n-m+1)p; -p,\dots ,-p \big )$ with $n-m+1$ poles of order p with zero residue and prescribed rotation number k. Notice that, from our constructions it is always possible to find an infinite ray r with fixed direction, say v, starting from the zero of $\omega _1$ and pointing towards a pole. For instance, such a ray can be taken as any ray leaving from any point labelled with ‘Q’ in our constructions and pointing towards a direction v. Next, we can realize $\chi _m$ as the holonomy of some translation surface $(X_2,\omega _2)\in \mathcal {H}_0\big (m-2;-1,\dots ,-1\big )$ . Up to changing the direction of v a little if needed, we can find an infinite ray, say $\overline r$ , leaving from the zero of $\omega _2$ and pointing towards one of the poles with direction v. We glue $(X_1,\omega _1)$ and $(X_2,\omega _2)$ by slitting and glue the rays r and $\overline r$ as described in Definition 3.9. Notice that the resulting translation structure is homeomorphic to $S_{1,n}$ , and it has one zero, $n-m$ poles of order p with zero residue, one pole of order p with nonzero residue and $m-1$ simple poles. We can finally find $m-1$ rays joining the zero of the resulting translation structure and the simple poles. We bubble along each one of these rays a copy of $({\mathbb C},\,z^{p-2}dz)$ . This final translation structure lies in $\mathcal {H}_0\left ( np; -p,\dots ,-p \right )$ . By construction it has period character $\chi $ and rotation number k as desired.
In the case that $\chi _m$ is rational and it does not satisfy the reordering property, we need to modify a little our construction in paragraph §5.3.2.2 as shown in Figure 27. We adopt the same notation as above with the only difference being that n is now replaced by m. Let $w_i=\chi (\gamma _i)$ for $i=1,\dots ,m$ , and consider the collection of $W=\{w_1,\dots ,w_m\}\subset {\mathbb C}^*$ . Since $\chi _m$ does not satisfy the reordering property, there are two integers $s<t$ such that $W=W_1\cup W_2=\{w_1,\dots ,w_s, w_{t+1},\dots ,w_m\}\cup \{ w_{s+1},\dots ,w_t\}$ . We introduce the same collections of (possibly unbounded) polygons that comprise the following pieces. A parallelogram $\mathcal {P}$ determined by the chain (55). A copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ slit along the edges $b=\chi (\beta )$ and e and along an infinite ray $\overline r_1$ . A second copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ slit along the edges $b=\chi (\beta )$ and $\overline e$ and along an infinite ray $\overline r_{s+1}$ and, finally, m strips $\mathcal {S}_l$ for $l=1,\dots ,m$ . As in paragraph §5.3.2.2, we slit e and we partition the edge $e^+$ into s subsegments each of length $|w_l|$ for $l=1,\dots ,s$ . Unlike above, here we denote $e^-=l_1^-$ . We next introduce $n-m$ new pieces, each of which is a copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ . We slit them along e, that is, a segment congruent and with the same direction as e, and we denote the resulting edges $l_i^+$ and $l_{i+1}^-$ for $i=1,\dots ,n-m$ . Finally, we partition $l_{n-m+1}^-$ into $n-t$ segments, say $e_l^-$ , each of which of length $|w_l|$ for $l=t+1,\dots ,n$ . Now, we paste all the pieces as done above by identifying the edges with the same label (and opposite sign) and eventually bubbling copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ in order to have all poles of order p. The resulting translation surface lies in $\mathcal {H}_1(np;-p,\dots ,-p)$ . In particular, bubbling copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ properly, we can realize a structure so that its rotation number is k as desired. The case of nonpositive volume works mutatis mutandis.
Remark 5.14. Since our construction relies on the discussion in paragraph §5.3.2.2, similarly in this case there is an exceptional case not covered by the construction above, which is to realize a representation of nontrivial-ends type $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ as the holonomy of some genus-one differential in the connected component of the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(2n, -2,\dots ,-2)$ of translation surfaces with rotation number one. However, this issue can be solved by using the same construction mentioned in Remark 5.13 by adding $n-m$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,z^{p-2}dz)$ each of which is slit along e.
5.4 General cases
We finally consider strata of genus-one differentials with poles of different orders and possibly multiple zeros. The following statements are now corollaries of the lemmas proved in the previous Sections §5.1–§5.3.
Corollary 5.15. Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be any nontrivial representation. If $\chi $ can be realized in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(m;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ , then it appears as the period character of a translation surface with poles in each connected component.
Proof. We begin with noticing that $m=p_1+\cdots +p_n$ , and hence, the following condition holds
For any k dividing p, we can realize the representation $\chi $ as the holonomy of some translation structure $(X,\omega )$ in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(np; -p,\dots ,-p)$ with rotation number k as done in the previous sections. According to our constructions, we can always find n rays $r_i$ joining the zero of $\omega $ with the puncture $P_i$ . By bubbling $p_i-p$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along the ray $r_i$ , we can realize a translation surface $(Y,\xi )\in \mathcal {H}_1(m;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ . In particular, we can choose these rays in such a way that the rotation number remains unaffected after any bubbling – for instance, by using the notation in Sections §5.1–§5.2, choose the ray $r_i$ as any ray leaving the point $Q_i$ ; see the dotted lines in Figures 8, 9, 10 and 11. This completes the proof.
Remark 5.16. Recall that our approach is to use an inductive foundation having as the base case strata with poles of order $2$ , as the intermediate step the case of strata with all poles of order $p\ge 3$ and then the general case. This motivates the reason why the proof of Corollary 5.15 relies on the previous constructions which are explicit.
Corollary 5.17. Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be any nontrivial representation. If $\chi $ can be realized in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ , then it appears as the period character of a translation surface with poles in each connected component.
Proof. It is sufficient to observe that if $d=\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k,p_1,\dots ,p_n)$ , then d divides $m=m_1+\cdots +m_k$ . Therefore, we can realize $\chi $ as the period character of a translation surface with a single zero of order m in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(m;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ . Then we can break the single zero as described in Section §3.1 to get the desired structure.
6 Higher genus meromorphic differentials with hyperelliptic structure
We begin to prove Theorem A for surfaces of genus at least two and we complete the proof in Section §7. Given a nontrivial representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ , in the present section we shall determine whether $\chi $ appears as the period character of a hyperelliptic translation surface with poles, that is, a translation surface admitting a special symmetry of order two already introduced in Section §2.2.2; see Definition 2.14. More precisely, our aim is to prove the following:
Proposition 6.1. Let $\chi $ be a nontrivial representation and suppose it arises as the period character of some meromorphic genus g differential in a stratum admitting a hyperelliptic component. Then $\chi $ can be realized as the period character of some hyperelliptic translation surfaces with poles in the same stratum.
According to Boissy (see [Reference BoissyBoi15, Proposition 5.3] and Section §2.3 above), a stratum admits a connected component of hyperelliptic translation surfaces if and only if it is one of the following:
for some $1\le p\le m$ . Therefore, in what follows we assume that $\chi $ can be realized as the period character of some translation surface in one of those strata. We shall consider two cases according to whether the representation $\chi $ is or is not of trivial-ends type. In Sections §6.2, §6.3 and §6.4, we prove Proposition 6.1 for strata of meromorphic differentials with exactly one zero of maximal order and we derive the general case by breaking zeros (see Section §3.1), as similarly done previously for genus-one differentials. Finally, in Section §6.5, we shall derive Theorem A for strata of genus-two meromorphic differentials listed above. We first premise the following.
6.1 Change of basis strategy
Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a representation. Let $\mathcal G=\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ be a system of handle generators for $\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})$ , and define pairs $\{\,a_i,\,b_i\,\}_{1\le i\le g}$ as
Notice that the image of $\chi $ is a $\mathbb Z-$ module $M_\chi =\mathbb Z[\,a_1,\,b_1,\dots ,a_g,\,b_g\,] \subset \mathbb C$ generated by the ordered basis $\mathcal B=\{a_1,b_1,\dots ,a_g,b_g\}$ . Two remarks are in order.
Remark 6.2. $M_\chi $ as a module on its own right, it appears as the image of different representations not necessarily in the same $\mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ -orbit.
Remark 6.3. A representation $\chi $ is real-collinear if there exists an element $A\in \mathrm {GL}(1,\,\mathbb C)<\mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb R)$ such that $A\cdot M_\chi \subset \mathbb R$ .
We may notice that $M_\chi $ is totally real if and only if $\chi $ is real-collinear. Being $M_\chi \cong \mathbb Z^{2g}$ , we notice that $\text {Aut}(M_\chi )$ identifies with ${\mathrm {SL}(2g,\,\mathbb {Z})}$ . In what follows, it will be convenient to define new pairs $\{u_i,v_i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ of complex numbers such that
Notice that the matrix $A_g$ associated to the linear system above has the form
which is recursively defined where $A_1=\begin {pmatrix} 0 & -1\\ 1 & 0 \end {pmatrix}$ .
Remark 6.4. It is an easy matter to check that $A_g\in {\mathrm {SL}(2g,\,\mathbb {Z})}$ for every $g\ge 1$ , and hence, the linear system (61) has a unique solution.
In order to prove Proposition 6.1, the gist of the idea is to create (possibly noncompact) polygons whose boundary contains segments of the form $P\longmapsto P+u_i$ and $P\longmapsto P+v_i$ and such that, once glued together in a proper way, the resulting translation surface admits a hyperelliptic involution and period character $\chi $ . For this purpose, it will be convenient to assume that $\arg (u_i),\arg (v_i)\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ . However, this is not guaranteed unless we replace the system of handle generators $\mathcal G$ with a new one. More precisely, the following holds.
Lemma 6.5 (Technical Lemma)
Given a period character $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow \mathbb C$ , there exists a system of handle generators $\mathcal G=\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ with periods $(a_1,b_1,\dots ,a_g,b_g)$ such that the linear system
admits a solution $(u_1,v_1,\dots ,u_g,v_g)\in \mathbb C^{2g}$ , where $\arg (u_i),\arg (v_i)\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ . Moreover, such a system $\mathcal G$ can be found starting from any given system and then applying Dehn twists recursively to pairs $\{\alpha _i,\beta _i\}$ .
Proof. Let $\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ be any system of handle generators with periods $(a_1,b_1,\dots ,a_g,b_g)\in \mathbb C^{2g}$ , and let $(u_1,v_1,\dots ,u_g,v_g)\in \mathbb C^{2g}$ be the solution of Equation (63). If the condition $\arg (u_i),\arg (v_i)\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ holds for every $i=1,\dots ,g$ , we are done. Next, we assume this is not the case and use induction to show the desired result. Let $k=1$ . If the pair $(u_1,v_1)$ does not satisfy the desired property then replace the pair $\{\alpha _1,\,\beta _1\}$ with either $\{\alpha _1^{-1},\,\beta _1^{-1}\}$ , $\{\beta _1,\,\alpha ^{-1}_1\}$ or $\{\beta ^{-1}_1,\,\alpha _1\}$ – notice that this can be done by using a mapping class element. The first two equations of Equation (63) are then replaced with either
that have solutions $(-u_1,-v_1)$ , $(v_1,-u_1)$ and $(-v_1,u_1)$ , respectively.
Since the condition $\arg (u_i),\arg (v_i)\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ holds for exactly one of these pairs, the result clearly holds for $k=1$ . With a small abuse of notation, denote let us denote this pair by $(u_1,v_1)$ . Now, we assume the result holds for the first $k-1$ pairs $(u_i,\,v_i)\in \mathbb C^2$ . Notice that the vector $w_{k-1}$ defined as
satisfies $\arg \big (\,w_{k-1}\,\big )\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ . Consider the following subsystem of Equation (63)
We claim there is an element
such that the following subsystem of Equation (63)
admits a solution $(u_k,\,v_k)$ with $\arg (u_k),\arg (v_k)\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ .
In the case $\chi $ is real collinear, we may assume $M_\chi \subset \mathbb R$ and $w_{k-1}>0$ at each step. It is easy to see that up to applying Dehn twists, we can make both $u_i,\,v_i>0$ and the result easily follows in this case. Assume $\chi $ to be not real-collinear, so at least one handle generator is not real. There always exists a mapping class $\varphi \in \mathrm {Mod}(S_{g,n})$ such that every handle generator is not real and we assume to already be in this case.
Since $\chi $ is not real collinear, we can use a mapping class in $\mathrm {Sp}(2,{\mathbb Z})$ to assume that $\Re (\,a_k\,) < 0$ , where $\Re (\cdot )$ denotes the real part. Since both $-a_k$ and w have positive real part, it follows that
notice that it cannot be zero. We next replace $\beta _k$ with $\alpha _k^{-n}\,\beta _k$ by using a mapping class in $\mathrm {Sp}(2,{\mathbb Z})$ and we may observe that
for $n\to \infty $ . Since $\Re (\,a_k\,) < 0$ , for $|n|$ big enough it follows that $\Re (\,x_k\,)=\Re \big (\,-n\,a_k+b_k+w_{k-1}\,\big )>0$ . Finally, $M_k$ is then the compositions of all mapping class elements applied along the proof and the desired claim follows.
Remark 6.6. We may finally notice that the system of handle generators $\mathcal G$ just defined is far from being unique. In fact, for every $k\ge 2$ , at the $k-$ th step there is $n_k\in \mathbb Z$ such that $2\arg \big (\,-n\,a_k+b_k+w_{k-1}\,\big )\in \left (-\pi ,\,\pi \,\right )$ for all $n\ge n_k$ .
Given any point $P_o\in \mathbb C$ , we now define a chain $\mathcal C$ as follows
Notice that, since $\arg (u_i),\arg (v_i)\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ , the chain just defined is embedded in $\mathbb C$ .
Let r be the straight line passing through $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ , and let $\mathcal {C}_{\mathrm {ext}}$ be the extended chain of edges $\mathcal {C}\,\cup \,\overline {P_{2g}\,P_0}$ . Notice that $\mathcal {C}_{\mathrm {ext}}$ always bounds a possibly self-overlapping polygon in $\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ on its right, but, in principle, it may not bound a polygon in $\mathbb C$ on its left. The following claim states that we can always change the pair $(u_g,v_g)$ above so that $\mathcal {C}_{\mathrm {ext}}$ bounds a polygon both on the left and on the right. This is equivalent to say that $\mathcal C$ lies on the right of r oriented from $P_0$ to $P_{2g}$ . More precisely, we can refine Lemma 6.5 as follows.
Corollary 6.7. With the same notation above, if $\chi $ is not real-collinear, then there exists a system of handle generators $\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ such that the chain $\mathcal {C}_{\mathrm {ext}}$ bounds a polygon on its left, that is, $\mathcal C$ entirely lies on the right of the line r.
Proof. If $\mathcal {C}$ already lies on the right of r, there is nothing to prove, and we are done. If $\mathcal {C}$ does not entirely lie on the right of r, there is no such a polygon bounded on the left of $\mathcal {C}_{\mathrm {ext}}$ . We show that, by changing the last pair $\{\alpha _g,\,\beta _g\}$ of handle generators, the chain $\mathcal {C}_{\mathrm {ext}}$ bounds a compact embedded polygon on its left. Therefore, by following the proof of Lemma 6.5, suppose we have already found $(u_1,v_1,\dots ,u_{g-1},v_{g-1})\in \mathbb C^{2g-2}$ and let us show how to determine the last pair $(u_g,v_g)\in \mathbb C^2$ such that the desired conclusion holds.
Since $\chi $ is not real-collinear, up to replacing the pair $\{\alpha _g,\,\beta _g\}$ with another one by using a judicious mapping class, we may assume
where $\overline {P_0\,P_j}$ is the segment joining the points $P_0$ and $P_j$ of $\mathcal C$ . Assume this to be in this case. We then apply the following mapping class
to replace $\{\alpha _g,\,\beta _g\}$ with $\{\alpha _g\,\beta _g^{\,-m},\,\alpha _g^{-1}\,\beta _g^{\,m+1}\}$ . Notice that
for $m\longrightarrow +\infty $ . Following the proof of Lemma 6.5, let us focus on the pair $(u_g,v_g)$ . We have that
Notice that the following chain of inequalities holds:
and $\left |\, -a_g + m b_g + w_{g-1} \,\right |\longrightarrow \infty $ for $m\longrightarrow \infty $ . As a consequence, there exists m such that the chain
bounds a polygon on its left as desired.
From now on, in every forthcoming subsection, we shall assume $\arg (u_i),\arg (v_i)\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ . Moreover, we assume $\mathcal {C}_{\mathrm {ext}}$ always bounds a polygon on both sides; this is a strong condition for the most of constructions, but it will be necessary in §6.4.1.1 and §6.4.2.
6.2 Poles with zero residue
In the present subsection, we shall consider representations of trivial-end type (see Definition 2.8), and we distinguish two cases depending on whether $n=1$ or $n=2$ .
6.2.1 One higher order pole
According to Section §8.2, a representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,1},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ can be realized in a stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2m;-2p)$ , for any $m\ge p\ge 1$ , as long as $\chi $ is nontrivial. Therefore, our aim here is to realize any such a representation as the period character of some hyperelliptic translation surface with poles. Let $\mathcal G=\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ be a system of handle generators for $\mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,1},\mathbb {Z})$ ; see Definition 4.2. Given a nontrivial representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,1},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ , we define
Since $\chi $ is nontrivial, Lemma 4.4 applies, and we can assume that both $a_i$ and $b_i$ are nonzero for all $i=1,\dots ,g$ . We now define new pairs $\{u_i,v_i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ of complex numbers as in §6.1 that we shall use to realize the representation $\chi $ as the period character of the desired structure. Let $P_0\in {\mathbb C}$ be any point and consider the chain, say $\mathcal {C}_1$ , of segments defined as in Equation (70), that is,
and recall that it is not self-intersecting because of our assumptions from §6.1. Let $r_1$ be a half-ray leaving from $P_0$ and parallel to $\mathbb R^-=\{x\in \mathbb R\,|\, x<0\}$ with the usual orientation, hence pointing rightwards. Similarly, we define $r_2$ as the half-ray leaving from $P_{2g}$ and parallel to $\mathbb R^+$ , hence pointing rightwards. We define $H_1$ as the (broken) half-plane bounded by the half-rays $r_1$ and $r_2$ and the chain $\mathcal C_1$ on their left; that is, $H_1$ is bounded by $r_1^-$ , $r_2^-$ and $\mathcal {C}_1^-$ (see Figure 28), where the sign is used according to the usual convention.
On another copy of $(\mathbb C, dz)$ , let us now define a second chain, say $\mathcal {C}_2$ as follows:
Notice that it differs from $\mathcal {C}_1$ by a rotation of order two about the midpoint of the segment $\overline {P_0\,P_{2g}}$ . Moreover, the half-rays $r_1$ and $r_2$ are swapped by this rotation. Define $H_2$ as the (broken) half-plane bounded by the rays $r_1$ and $r_2$ and the chain $\mathcal {C}_2$ on their right; that is, $H_2$ is bounded by the rays $r_1^+$ and $r_2^+$ and $\mathcal {C}_2^+$ .
Next, we identify the rays $r_1^+$ and $r_1^-$ together. In the same fashion, we also identify the rays $r_2^+$ and $r_2^-$ together. The resulting is a $4g$ -gon bounding a topological immersed disk on the Riemann sphere $\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ punctured at the infinity. We finally identify the edges with the same label; that is, we identify $u_i^+$ with $u_i^-$ and $v_i^+$ with $v_i^-$ for all $i=1,\dots ,g$ . The resulting space is a topological genus g surface with one puncture equipped with a translation structure $(X,\omega )$ with one branch point of order $2g$ and one pole of order $2$ and period character $\chi $ . By construction, such a structure admits an involution $\imath $ induced by the rotation of order two that exchanges $C_1$ with $C_2$ . Notice that $\imath $ has $2g+2$ fixed points corresponding to the midpoints of the edges $u_i,\,v_i$ – these are $2g$ points – the unique zero of $\omega $ and the point at infinity. Therefore, the resulting structure is hyperelliptic as desired, and lies in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2g;-2)$ .
It remains to show that the resulting structure has the prescribed periods. More precisely, we now determine close loops representing the desired handle generators $\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ . These are shown in Figure 29, and we can easily see that
as desired.
Remark 6.8. Such a system of handle generators can be found in all constructions we shall realize in the following. However, we avoid to draw pictures similar to Figure 29.
In order to get a structure in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2m;-2p)$ , we need to modify the broken half-planes as follows. Consider on $H_1$ a ray leaving from $P_0$ with angle $0<\theta <\frac {\pi }{2}$ with respect to $r_1^-$ and bubble $p-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ ; see Definition 3.12. Similarly, in $H_2$ consider a ray leaving from $P_{2g}$ with angle $\theta $ with respect to $r_2^+$ and then bubble $p-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ . Then proceed as above. The resulting space is again a genus g surface equipped with a translation structure with period character $\chi $ in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2m;-2p)$ by construction, where $m=g+p-1$ .
By breaking the zero of the structure obtained as above as two zeros both of order m, Lemma 3.4 implies that the resulting translation surface lies in the hyperelliptic component of $\mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-2p)$ , and it has period character $\chi $ as desired.
6.2.2 Two higher-order poles
Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a representation of trivial-ends type. We aim to realize $\chi $ as the period character of some hyperelliptic translation surface in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2m;-p,-p)$ , where $p>1$ . We assume $\chi $ to be nontrivial because, as we shall in §8.2, the trivial representation cannot be realized in any strata of the form $\mathcal {H}_g(2m;-p,-p)$ and $\mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-p,-p)$ .
This case follows from a modification of the construction developed in Section §6.2.1. We shall adopt the same notation as above. Given a nontrivial representation $\chi $ as above, we define
Once again, since $\chi $ is nontrivial, Lemma 4.4 applies, and hence, we can assume that both $a_i$ and $b_i$ are nonzero. We use again the change of basis strategy (see §6.1) to define new pairs $\{u_i,\,v_i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ such that $\arg (u_i),\arg (v_i)\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ for all $i=1,\dots ,g$ . Given any point $P_0\in {\mathbb C}$ , we define the broken half-plane $H_1$ exactly as in Section §6.2.1, that is, a half-plane bounded by two half-rays $r_1$ and $r_2$ and a chain of segments, say $\mathcal {C}_1$ , defined as in Equation (70), joining $P_0$ with $P_{2g}=P_0+\sum (u_i+v_i)$ . Notice that $r_1\cup \mathcal {C}_1\cup r_2$ bounds $H_1$ on its left.
In the same fashion, we define the broken half-plane $H_2$ exactly as in Section §6.2.1, that is, a half-plane bounded by two half-rays $r_1$ and $r_2$ and a chain of segments, say $\mathcal {C}_2$ , defined as in Equation (79), joining the points $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ . Notice that, in this case, $r_1\cup \mathcal {C}_2\cup r_2$ bounds $H_2$ on its right.
Next, we single out two broken half-planes, say $H_3$ and $H_4$ , defined as follows. Consider first the unique segment, say e, joining $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ . Recall that $\arg (u_i),\arg (v_i)\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ , so $\Re (P_{2g})\ge \Re (P_0)$ . We next extend e with the half-ray $s_1$ leaving from $P_0$ and parallel to $\mathbb R^-$ and the half-ray $s_2$ leaving from $P_{2g}$ and parallel to $\mathbb R^+$ . The chain $s_1\cup e\cup s_2$ is embedded in ${\mathbb C}$ ; in fact, it bounds an embedded triangle with one vertex at the infinity and splits the complex plane in two half-planes. Let $H_3$ be the broken half-plane on the right of $s_1\cup e\cup s_2$ , and let $H_4$ be the broken half-plane on the left. By design, the following identification hold $s_1=r_1$ and $s_2=r_2$ .
We finally glue these broken half-planes as follows; see Figure 30. The edges $e^+\subset H_3$ and $e^-\subset H_4$ are identified. Then, for $j=1,2$ , we identify $r_j^-\subset H_1$ with $s_j^+\subset H_3$ . Similarly, for $j=1,2$ , we identify the rays $r_j^+\subset H_2$ and $s_j^-\subset H_4$ . Finally, we identify $u_i^+$ with $u_i^-$ and $v_i^+$ with $v_i^-$ for all $i=1,\dots ,g$ . The resulting object is a translation surface $(X,\omega )$ with a single zero of order $2g+2$ and two poles both of order $2$ and zero residue. The resulting structure admits a hyperelliptic involution in the sense of Definition 2.14 that swaps $H_1\cup H_3$ with $H_2\cup H_4$ . In fact, even in this case there is an involution $\imath $ that fixes $2g+2$ points corresponding to the midpoints of the edges, the unique zero of $\omega $ and the midpoint of the edge e.
In order to get a structure in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2m;-p,-p)$ , we can modify the broken half-planes as in Section §6.2.1. On $H_1$ , we consider a ray leaving from $P_0$ with angle $0<\theta <\frac {\pi }{2}$ with respect to $r_1^-$ and bubble along it $p-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ . Similarly, on $H_2$ we consider a ray leaving from $P_{2g}$ with angle $\theta $ with respect to $r_2^+$ and bubble $p-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ . Then proceed as above. The resulting object is a genus g surface equipped with a translation structure with period character $\chi $ in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2m;-p,-p)$ by construction, where $m=g+p-1$ .
Again, by breaking the zero of the structure obtained as above as two zeros both of order m, Lemma 3.4 implies that the resulting translation surface lies in the hyperelliptic component of $\mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-p,-p)$ , and it has period character $\chi $ as desired.
6.3 Higher-order poles with nonzero residue
Suppose $p\ge 2$ , and let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a representation of nontrivial-ends type. We aim to realize $\chi $ as the period character of some hyperelliptic translation surface in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2m;-p,-p)$ . In this case, we realize a hyperelliptic translation surface with poles by extending the construction developed in §6.2.2. Let $u_i,v_i\in {\mathbb C}^*$ be defined as in §6.2.2, and recall that $\arg (u_i),\,\arg (v_i)\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ .
Let $\gamma $ be a simple loop around a puncture, say P, since $\chi $ is of nontrivial-ends type; let $\chi (\gamma )=w\in {\mathbb C}^*$ . Notice that we can assume $\arg (w)\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ if necessary. In fact, if Q is the second puncture and $\delta $ is a simple loop around oriented so that $\chi (\delta )=-w$ – notice that the minus sign appears because of the residue theorem. We shall distinguish two cases depending on whether w is parallel to $v=\sum _i\,(u_i+v_i)$ . Notice that, according to our choices, $\arg (v)\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ . We begin with the general case handled in the following subsection.
6.3.1 Generic case: v and w are not parallel
Given a representation $\chi $ of nontrivial-ends type, we can define four, possibly broken, half-planes $H_1,H_2,H_3,H_4$ as done in Section §6.2.2. Since we need to change a little the notation, we briefly summarize it as follows; see Figure 31. Let $P_0\in {\mathbb C}$ be any point, and set as above the point $P_{2g}=P_0+v$ . Let $\theta =\arg (v)$ , and let $R_\theta $ be the counterclockwise rotation of angle $\theta $ about the origin on ${\mathbb C}$ . In order to realize the desired regions, in this subsection we shall agree that all rays leaving from $P_0$ are parallel to $R_\theta \cdot \mathbb R^-$ , and similarly, all rays leaving from $P_{2g}$ are parallel to $R_\theta \cdot \mathbb R^+$ . The regions are:
-
1. $H_1$ is a broken half-plane bounded by chain of edges defined as in Equation (70) joining $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ and two rays, say $r_1^-$ and $r_2^-$ , respectively leaving from $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ ;
-
2. $H_2$ is a half-plane bounded by a geodesic edge $s_0^+$ joining $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ and two rays, say $r_3^+$ and $r_2^+$ , respectively leaving from $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ ;
-
3. $H_3$ is a half-plane bounded by a geodesic edge $r_0^-$ joining $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ and two rays, say $r_5^-$ and $r_4^-$ , respectively leaving from $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ ; finally,
-
4. $H_4$ is a broken half-plane bounded by a chain of edges as in Equation (79) joining $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ and two rays, say $r_5^+$ and $r_6^+$ , respectively leaving from $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ .
We next realize a cylinder with period w as follows. We join the points $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ by an edge, say $s_0^-$ . Extend $s_0^-$ with two rays, say $r_3^-$ and $r_6^-$ leaving from $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ , respectively. Notice that $s_0^-$ has slope $\theta $ , and therefore, $r_3^-\,\cup s_0^-\,\cup r_6^-$ is a straight line, say $l_1$ by design. Define $r_1^+=r_3^-\,+\,w$ and $r_4^+=r_6^-\,+\,w$ . Since w is not parallel to v, the chain $r_1^+\,\cup \,r_0^+\,\cup \,r_4^+$ is a parallel straight line, say $l_2$ . We define C as the strip bounded by the lines $l_1$ and $l_2$ . By construction, the cylinder obtained by identifying them has period w.
All the necessary pieces are now introduced and defined. We glue all rays with the same label together; that is, we glue $r_i^+$ with $r_i^-$ for $i=1,\dots ,6$ . Then glue the edges $r_0^+$ and $r_0^-$ as well as the edges $s_0^+$ and $s_0^-$ together. Finally, glue the edges $u_i^+$ and $v_i^+$ with $u_i^-$ and $v_i^-$ , respectively. The resulting object is a translation surface with two poles of order $2$ and a single zero of order $2g+2$ . By construction, this translation surface admits an involution $\imath $ that fixes the cylinder C and maps the half-planes $H_1$ , $H_2$ to $H_4$ , $H_3$ , respectively. This involution is hyperelliptic because it fixes $2g+2$ points corresponding to the midpoints of the edges, the unique zero of $\omega $ and one point in the cylinder C. Therefore, the structure just defined lies in the hyperelliptic component of the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2g+2;-2,-2)$ , and by breaking up the zero into two zeros each of order $m=g+1$ , we get a structure in $\mathcal {H}_g(g+1,g+1;-2,-2)$ . To get a structure in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2m;-p,-p)$ , we eventually bubble $p-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along a ray leaving from $P_0\in H_1$ – not necessarily parallel to $R_\theta \cdot \mathbb R^-$ – and, similarly, bubble $p-1$ copies along a ray leaving from $P_{2g}\in H_4$ – not necessarily parallel to $R_\theta \cdot \mathbb R ^+$ . Again, we apply Lemma 3.4 above in order to obtain a hyperelliptic translation structure in $\mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-p,-p)$ with period character $\chi $ as desired.
6.3.2 Exceptional case: v and w are parallel
In the above construction, the cylinder C has nonempty interior because v is not parallel to w, and thence, the lines $r_1^+\,\cup \,r_0^+\,\cup \,r_4^+$ and $r_3^-\,\cup s_0^-\,\cup r_6^-$ are parallel but disjoint. In the case v is parallel to w, the cylinder C degenerates to a straight line. However, this case can be handled as follows. Let $\rho \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be an auxiliary representation; see Definition 49, defined as
where $\gamma _1,\gamma _2$ are simple loops each around one of the punctures. We can realize $\rho $ as the period character of some translation surface, say $(X,\omega )$ , with poles in the hyperelliptic component of $\mathcal {H}_g(2m;-p,-p)$ as done in §6.2.2. Adapting the notation therein, we claim that, on $(X,\omega )$ there always exists a bi-infinite ray, say $l_0$ , joining the poles and orthogonal to the saddle connection e, arose from the identification of $e^+$ with $e^-$ , on its midpoint. The slope of e, after developing, is equal to $\arg (v)=\arg (w)\in \left [-\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\,\right [$ . Let $l_1^+\subset {\mathbb C}$ be a straight line with slope $\arg (w)+\frac \pi 2$ , and let $l_1^-=l_1^+\,+\,w$ . Define C as the strip between the lines $l_1^+$ and $l_1^-$ . Notice that the lines $l_0,l_1^+,l_1^-$ all have the same slope by design. Slit $(X,\omega )$ along $l_0$ and call $l_0^+$ , $l_0^-$ the resulting edges. Then glue $l_0^-$ with $l_1^+$ and $l_0^+$ with $l_1^-$ ; see also Definition 3.13. The resulting structure, say $(Y,\,\xi )$ , is a translation surface with poles in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2m;-p,-p)$ having period character $\chi $ . By construction, the straight line $l_0$ is invariant under the hyperelliptic involution of $(X,\omega )$ . As a consequence, $(Y,\xi )$ also admits a hyperelliptic involution that keeps the strip C (after gluing) invariant.
Finally, we apply again Lemma 3.4. By breaking the unique zero of $(Y,\xi )$ , we can realize $\chi $ as the period character of some structure in the hyperelliptic component of $\mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-p,-p)$ as desired.
6.4 Simple poles
Throughout this section, we always assume $p=1$ and we aim to realize a representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ as the period character of some translation surface in the hyperelliptic component of the following strata:
We shall distinguish two cases depending on whether $\chi $ is discrete; see Definition 4.11. For a given system of handle generators $\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ , let $a_i,\,b_i\in {\mathbb C}^*$ be the images of $\alpha _i\,,\,\beta _i$ via $\chi $ , respectively. Once again, we use the change of basis stratagem to define new pairs $\{u_i,v_i\}_{1\le i\le g}$ ; see Section §6.1. We begin with the following case:
6.4.1 The representation $\chi $ is not discrete
Recall that any system of handle generators yields a splitting, and hence, a well-defined representation $\chi _g\colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ . Since $\chi $ is a representation of nontrivial-ends type, Lemma 4.10 applies and we can assume $\mathrm {vol}(\chi _g)>0$ . We distinguish two subcases depending on whether $\chi $ is or is not real-collinear; see Definition 4.8.
6.4.1.1 $\chi $ is not real-collinear
Assume here that $\chi $ is not a real-collinear representation. Let $\gamma $ be a simple loop around a puncture, and let $w=\chi (\gamma )$ , and let $v=\sum _i(u_i+v_i)$ . According to the following remark, we can assume that v and w are not parallel.
Remark 6.9. In principle, v and w could be parallel. However, since $\chi $ is not real-collinear then Corollary 6.7 applies. Therefore, there is a handle generator, say $\beta _g$ , such that a stronger version of Equation (71) holds; more precisely
in particular, $b_g$ and w are not parallel. Following the proof of Corollary 6.7, in Equation (74) we may replace $(u_g,v_g)$ with $(u_g + nb_g,v_g+nb_g)$ with $n>0$ so that w and $v+2nb_g$ are no longer parallel.
Let $P_0\in {\mathbb C}$ be any point, and let $P_{2g}=P_0+v$ . Let r be the unique straight line passing through these points. Up to rotating the whole construction with an appropriate rotation in $\mathrm {SO}(2,{\mathbb R})<\mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ , let us assume for simplicity that r is horizontal parallel to the real line; in this case, $\arg (v)=0$ and $w\in {\mathbb C}\setminus \mathbb R$ . Define a chain, say $\mathcal C_1$ , as in Equation (70) starting from $P_0$ and necessarily ending at $P_{2g}$ .
According to Corollary 6.7, we can assume that the chain $\mathcal {C}_1$ entirely lies on the right of r with respect to the orientation induced by v. Let $r_1^-$ as the subray of r leaving from $P_0$ and not passing through $P_{2g}$ . Similarly, define $r_2^-$ as the subray of r leaving from $P_{2g}$ and not passing through $P_{0}$ . Let $P_0^{\prime }=P_0+w$ , set $P_{2g}^{\prime } = P_0^{\prime }+v=P_0+v+w$ , and let $r'$ be the unique straight line passing through these points. Clearly, $r'$ is parallel to r. We define a chain $\mathcal {C}_2$ exactly as in Equation (79) starting from $P_0^{\prime }$ and ending at $P_{2g}^{\prime }$ . By design, $\mathcal {C}_2$ lies on the left of $r'$ with respect to the orientation induced by v. Let $r_1^+$ be the subray of $r'$ leaving from $P_0^{\prime }$ and not passing through $P_{2g}^{\prime }$ , and similarly, define $r_2^+$ as the subray of r leaving from $P_{2g}^{\prime }$ and not passing through $P_{0}^{\prime }$ . Define $C\subset {\mathbb C}$ as the region bounded by $r_1^-\,\cup \mathcal {C}_1\,\cup r_2^-$ and $r_1^+\,\cup \mathcal {C}_2\,\cup r_2^+$ ; see Figure 32.
Finally, glue the half-rays $r_i^-$ and $r_i^+$ together and the edges $u_i^-$ , $v_i^-$ with $u_i^+$ , $v_i^+$ , respectively, for $i=1,\dots ,g$ . The resulting object is a topological surface homeomorphic to $S_{g,2}$ equipped with a translation structure with poles having period character $\chi $ . Notice that C is invariant with respect to a rotation of order $2$ about a point $O\in {\mathbb C}$ . Such a point can be explicitly determined; in fact, it turns out to be the intersection point of the diagonals of the parallelogram with vertices $P_0,\, P_{2g},\, P_{2g}^{\prime },\, P_0^{\prime }$ . As a consequence, the resulting structure above admits an involution, and it can been seen this is hyperelliptic. In particular, $\chi $ can be realized in the hyperelliptic component of $\mathcal {H}_g(2g;-1,-1)$ . By breaking the zero into two zeros each of order g, we obtain a hyperelliptic structure in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(g,g;-1,-1)$ as a consequence of Lemma 3.4.
6.4.1.2 $\chi $ is real-collinear
We now assume $\chi $ to be real-collinear. Up to replacing $\chi $ with $A\,\chi $ , for some appropriate $A\in \mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ , we can assume $\text {Im}(\chi )\subset \mathbb R$ . Let $\gamma $ be a simple loop around a puncture, and let $w=\chi (\gamma )$ . Let us assume $w>0$ for simplicity.
Lemma 4.13 applies, and we can find a system of handle generators with absolute periods $(a_1,b_1,\dots ,a_g,b_g)$ such that the linear system (63) admits a solution $(u_1,v_1,\dots ,u_g,v_g)$ such that all entries are positive reals such that
and we set $2\delta =w-v$ .
Let $l_1\subset {\mathbb C}$ be a straight line with slope $\frac \pi 2$ , let $l_2=l_1+w$ and define $\mathcal {S}$ as the vertical strip bounded by $l_1^+$ and $l_2^-$ . Let $P_0\in \mathcal S\subset {\mathbb C}$ be any point at distance $\delta $ from $l_1$ , and let $P_{2g}=P_0+v$ . Notice that $P_{2g}\in \mathcal {S}$ at distance $\delta $ from $l_2$ .
Let e be the edge joining $P_0$ and $P_{2g}$ . Slit $\mathcal S$ along e, and define $e^{\pm }$ the resulting edges according to our convention. We partition $e^-$ into $2g$ subedges $\{e_i^-\}_{1\le i\le 2g}$ of lengths $u_1,v_1,\dots ,u_g,v_g$ , respectively. In the same fashion, we partition the edge $e^+$ into $2g$ subedges $\{e_i^+\}_{1\le i\le 2g}$ of lengths $v_g,u_g,\dots ,v_1,u_1$ , respectively; see Figure 33. By gluing the lines $l_1^-$ and $l_2^+$ together, we get an infinite cylinder with period w slit along the edge e. We next glue the edges $e_i^-$ with $e_{2g-i+1}^+$ together for any $i=1,\dots ,2g$ . The resulting object is homeomorphic to $S_{g,2}$ , and it is equipped with a translation structure $(X,\omega )$ with period $\chi $ . We can observe that $\mathcal {S}\in {\mathbb C}$ is invariant under a rotation of order $2$ about the midpoint of the segment $\overline {P_0\,P_{2g}}$ . As a consequence, $(X,\omega )$ admits a hyperelliptic involution meaning that $\chi $ can be realized in the hyperelliptic component of $\mathcal {H}_g(2g;-1,-1)$ . By breaking the zero into two zeros each of order g we obtain a translation surface with period $\chi $ in the hyperelliptic component of the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(g,g;-1,-1)$ as a consequence of Lemma 3.4.
6.4.2 The representation $\chi $ is discrete of rank two
Now, assume that $\chi $ is a discrete representation of rank two; see Definition 4.11. The idea of this case is mostly subsumed in paragraph §6.4.1.1. Up to $\mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ , we assume without loss of generality that $\text {Im}(\chi )=\mathbb Z\oplus i\,\mathbb Z$ . Lemma 4.12 above applies in this case and it guarantees the existence of a system of handle generators such that
-
• $\chi (\alpha _g)=a\in {\mathbb Z}$ and $\chi (\beta _g)=i$ ,
-
• $0<\chi (\alpha _j)<\chi (\alpha _g)$ and $\chi (\alpha _j)=\chi (\beta _j)$ for all $j=1,\dots ,g-1$ .
Since $\chi $ is not real-collinear, it is an easy matter to check that Lemmas 6.5 and 6.7 hold in this case, and hence, we can proceed as done in §6.4.1.1 in order to get a translation surface with poles in the hyperelliptic component of the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2g;-1,-1)$ with period character $\chi $ ; see Figure 34. As above, by breaking the single zero into two zeros of order g, we can also realize $\chi $ as the period character of some hyperelliptic translation surface in $\mathcal {H}_g(g,g;-1,-1)$ .
6.4.3 The representation $\chi $ is discrete of rank one
We finally consider the case of discrete representation of rank one; see Definition 4.11. For any such a representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ of rank one, we can replace $\chi $ with $A\,\chi $ , for some appropriate $A\in \mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ , and assume that $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb Z}$ is surjective. Let $\gamma $ be a simple loop around a puncture, and let $w=\chi (\gamma )\in {\mathbb Z}$ be its period; that is, the residue (up to $2\pi i$ ). [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem D] provides necessary and sufficient conditions for such representations to appear as the holonomy of some translation surfaces with simple poles at the punctures. For the reader’s convenience, we review here a simplified version of that result.
Proposition 6.10 ([Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem D] for $n=2$ )
Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z}) \longrightarrow \mathbb {Z}$ be a discrete representation of nontrivial-ends type. Then $\chi $ appears as the period character of some translation surface with simple poles at the punctures and zeros of prescribed orders $(m_1,m_2,\ldots , m_k)$ that satisfy the degree condition $m_1+\cdots +m_k = 2g$ if and only if
where $w,\,-w\in {\mathbb Z}$ are the residues of the simple poles.
According to Proposition 6.10 above, we need to distinguish two subcases according to the value of $w\in {\mathbb Z}$ . In the case $w>2g$ , then $\chi $ appears as the period character of some translation surface with poles in both strata $\mathcal {H}_g(2g;-1,-1)$ and $\mathcal {H}_g(g,g;-1,-1)$ . In paragraph §6.4.3.1 below, we shall prove that $\chi $ can be realized in the hyperelliptic component of these strata. In paragraph §6.4.3.2, we shall consider the case $g<w\le 2g$ , then $\chi $ can be realized only in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(g,g;-1,-1)$ . Notice that this case requires an ad-hoc construction because we can no longer realize a structure with a single zero and then break it into two zeros of order g. Finally, if $0<w\le g$ , then $\chi $ cannot be realized in both strata, and hence, it cannot appear as the period character of some translation surface with simple poles and hyperelliptic involution. Before continuing, we state the following crucial remark:
Remark 6.11. For $\chi $ being discrete of rank one, Lemma 4.12 applies, so there exists a system of handle generators $\mathcal G_1=\{\alpha ^{\prime }_1,\beta ^{\prime }_1,\dots ,\alpha ^{\prime }_g,\beta ^{\prime }_g\}$ such that $a^{\prime }_i=b^{\prime }_i=1$ for all i. Notice that $z_1=(1,\dots ,1)\in \mathbb Z^{2g}$ is a primitive vector – the greatest common divisor of all entries is one. We next consider the following primitive vector $z_2=(-1,1,1,3,3,\dots ,2g-3,2g-3,2g-1)\in \mathbb Z^{2g}$ . Since they are both primitive, there is an element $A\in \mathrm {Sp}(2g,{\mathbb Z})$ such that $A(z_1)=z_2$ because $\mathrm {Sp}(2g,{\mathbb Z})$ acts transitively on primitive integer vectors in $\mathbb Z^{2g}$ . Therefore, there is another system of handle generators $\mathcal G_2=\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ such that
The crucial fact is that the linear system
has solutions $(u_i,\,v_i)=(1,1)$ for all $i=1,\dots ,g$ . Therefore, we can use $a_i,b_i$ in place of $u_i,v_i$ in this case. In what follows, we shall rely on this observation.
6.4.3.1 Case: $w>2g$
This case is completely subsumed in paragraph §6.4.1.2. In fact, as a consequence of Lemma 4.12 there is a system of handle generators $\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ such that $\chi (\alpha _i)=\chi (\beta _i)=1$ for all $i=1,\dots ,g$ . Let $v=\sum _i(a_i\,+\,b_i)$ as usual. Since $w>2g$ , then $w>v=2g$ , and hence, we can proceed exactly as in §6.4.1.2. Therefore, $\chi $ appears as the period character of some hyperelliptic translation surface with simple poles in $\mathcal {H}_g(2g;-1,-1)$ . By breaking the zero, we get a translation surface with simple poles in the hyperelliptic component of $\mathcal {H}_g(g,g;-1,-1)$ as desired.
6.4.3.2 Case: $g<w\le 2g$
We finally deal with this last case. Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z}) \longrightarrow \mathbb {Z}$ be a representation and assume that, for a simple loop $\gamma $ around a puncture, we have that $g\,<\,w=\chi (\gamma )\le 2g$ . Since $w\in {\mathbb Z}$ , we can write it as $w=g+1+l$ , where l is a nonnegative integer. We now define two half-infinite strips, say $\mathcal S_1,\,\mathcal S_2\subset {\mathbb C}$ of width w and pointing in opposite directions. More precisely, let $P_0\in {\mathbb C}$ be any point, and let $P_{2g+2}=P_0+w$ . Let s be the segment joining them, and define $r_1,\,r_2=r_1+w$ as the straight lines orthogonal to $P_0$ and $P_{2g+2}$ respectively. Define $\mathcal S_1$ as the strip bounded by $r_1^+\,\cup \,s^-\,\cup \,r_2^-$ , and in a similar fashion, define $\mathcal S_2$ as the strip bounded by $r_1^+\,\cup \,s^+\,\cup \,r_2^-$ . Consider these half-strips separately. We partition $s^-$ as the union of segments $s_1^-,\,\dots ,\,s_{2g+2}^-$ , from left to right, where each $s_i$ is of length $\frac 12$ , except that the last one is of width $\frac 12 + l$ , so the total length amounts to $\frac {2g+2}{2} + l = w$ . Similarly, we partition $s^+$ as the union of segments $s_{2g+2}^+,\dots ,s_{1}^+$ , from the left to the right, where each $s_i$ is of length $\frac 12$ , except that the first one is of width $\frac 12 + l$ . Again, the total length amounts to $\frac {2g+2}{2} + l = w$ . Glue the half-strips $\mathcal {S}_1,\,\mathcal {S}_2$ by identifying the edges with the same label and the rays $r_1^+$ with $r_2^-$ together. The resulting structure is a translation surface with two simple poles and two zeros each of order g. These two zeros appear in an alternating way as the end points of the $s_i$ . Notice that any absolute period is an integer as it consists of an even number of the $s_i$ . Finally, the structure is hyperelliptic because the half-strips are symmetric with respect to a rotation of order two by design.
6.5 Nonhyperelliptic translation surfaces in genus two
For certain strata of genus-two meromorphic differentials, we are now ready to complete the proof of Theorem A. In fact, by performing appropriate modifications to our construction developed in Sections §6.2 and §6.4 we can prove the following propositions.
Proposition 6.12. Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{2,\,1},\,{\mathbb Z}) \longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a nontrivial representation. Assume $\chi $ appears as the period character of some translation surface with poles in a stratum $\mathcal {H}_2(4;-2)$ or $\mathcal {H}_2(2,2;-2)$ , possibly both. Then $\chi $ can be realized in the nonhyperelliptic component of the same stratum.
Proposition 6.13. Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{2,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z}) \longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a nontrivial representation. Assume $\chi $ appears as the period character of some translation surface with poles in a stratum $\mathcal {H}_2(4;-1,-1)$ or $\mathcal {H}_2(2,2;-1,-1)$ , possibly both. Then $\chi $ can be realized in the nonhyperelliptic component of the same stratum.
Sketch of the proofs of Propositions 6.12 and 6.13
Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{2,\,1},\,{\mathbb Z}) \longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a representation that appears as the period character of some translation surface in $\mathcal {H}_2(4;-2)$ or $\mathcal {H}_2(2,2;-2)$ . In Section §6.2, we have realized $\chi $ as the period character of some hyperelliptic translation surface by gluing broken half-planes designed in such a way that the resulting structure turned out to be hyperelliptic. The gist of the idea was to realize these broken half-planes so that they were invariant under a rotation of order $2$ about a certain point in ${\mathbb C}$ . For this purpose, in Section §6.1 we introduced g pairs of complex numbers $\{u_i,\,v_i\}$ and then found unbounded regions of ${\mathbb C}$ bounded by chains as in Equations (70) and (79).
However, it is also possible to design broken half-planes so that they are no longer symmetric with respect to a rotation of order two. Given a system of handle generators $\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ , we define broken half-planes as noncompact regions bounded by chains that are now defined by using the absolute periods $(a_1,b_1,\dots ,a_g,b_g)$ . It is an easy matter to show that, up to replacing a pair $\{\alpha _i,\beta _i\}$ with either $\{\alpha _i^{-1},\beta _i^{-1}\}$ , $\{\beta _i,\alpha ^{-1}_i\}$ or $\{\beta ^{-1}_i,\alpha _i\}$ , we may assume $\Re (\,a_i\,)>0$ and $\Re (\,b_i\,)>0$ . In all construction done in the previous sections, in place of the chain (70) we can use the following one:
and, in place of the chain (79) use
along with the half-rays $r_1,\,r_2$ (we adopt the same notation). Notice that these chains differ because the edges $a_i,\,b_i$ are sorted in a different way. Glue the half-planes as usual. The resulting translation surface still lies in $\mathcal {H}_2(4;-2)$ or $\mathcal {H}_2(2,2;-2)$ , but it is no longer hyperelliptic. We finally recall that for these genus-two strata under considerations, the connected components are distinguished by the hyperellipticity as well as by the spin parity; see Section §2.3. A direct computation shows that all hyperelliptic structures realized in §6.2 and §6.4 have even spin parity whereas all structures realized by defining the broken half-plane $H_2$ as above have odd spin parity. In Section §6.4, we have adopted the same strategy for representations $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{2,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z}) \longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ , and hence, the same discussion holds for them; see Figure 35.
Corollary 6.14. For a partition $\kappa $ of $4$ and a partition $\nu $ of $2$ , define $\mathcal {H}_2(\kappa ;-\nu )$ as the stratum of meromorphic genus-two differentials with zeros and poles of orders prescribed according to $\kappa $ and $-\nu $ , respectively. Then Theorem A holds for any stratum $\mathcal {H}_2(\kappa ;-\nu )$ thus defined.
Proof. We begin with the following observation. Let $\kappa $ be a partition of $4$ , and let $\nu $ be a partition of $2$ . According to Boissy (see [Reference BoissyBoi15, Theorem 1.2]), a stratum $\mathcal {H}_2(\kappa ;-\nu )$ of genus-two meromorphic differentials admits at most two connected components. More precisely, the stratum is connected whenever $\kappa \neq \{4\},\,\{2,\,2\}$ . For $\kappa =\{4\}$ or $\kappa =\{2,\,2\}$ , it admits two connected components one of which is hyperelliptic and the other is not. Suppose a representation $\chi $ can be realized in a certain stratum $\mathcal {H}_2(\kappa; -\nu )$ . If the stratum is connected then the claim follows from [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorems C and D]. We next assume that the stratum is not connected. This is one of the strata $\mathcal {H}_2(4;-2)$ , $\mathcal {H}_2(2,2;-2)$ , $\mathcal {H}_2(4;-1,-1)$ and $\mathcal {H}_2(2,2;-1,-1)$ . Now, Proposition 6.1 says that $\chi $ can be realized in the hyperelliptic component of each stratum. On the other hand, Propositions 6.12 and 6.13 say that $\chi $ can be realized in the nonhyperelliptic component of each stratum. The claim thus follows.
Remark 6.15. According to Boissy, [Reference BoissyBoi15], the connected components of strata in Corollary 6.14 are also distinguished by the spin parity; see §2.2.3. In fact, by a direct computation, one can see that hyperelliptic translation surfaces have even parity and nonhyperelliptic ones have odd parity. See Figures 36 and 37 for an example related to Figures 34 and 35.
7 Higher genus meromorphic differentials with prescribed parity
We aim to determine whether a representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ can be realized as the period character of some translation surface with prescribed spin parity; see §2.2.3. In this section, we assume the representation $\chi $ to be nontrivial and we shall handle the trivial representation in Section §8. Recall that a genus g meromorphic differential $\omega $ on a Riemann surface X determines a well-defined spin structure if and only if the set of zeros and poles is of even type; see Definition 2.20. Our aim is to prove the following.
Proposition 7.1. Let $\chi $ be a nontrivial representation and suppose it arises as the period character of some meromorphic genus g differential in a stratum admitting two connected components distinguished by the spin parity. Then $\chi $ can be realized in both components of the same stratum as the period character of some translation surfaces with poles.
7.1 Inductive process
The strategy we shall adopt in the present section is based on an inductive foundation on the genus g of surfaces. We begin with an explanation of our strategy which we shall develop in Section §7.2. In the explanation below, we shall mainly consider strata of differentials with a single zero of maximal order because the general case follows by breaking a zero.
7.1.1 Higher-order poles
Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a nontrivial representation, possibly of nontrivial-ends type, and let $\mathcal {H}_g(2m+2g-2;-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ be a stratum of genus g differentials of even type, where $n\ge 2$ and $m=p_1+\cdots +p_n$ . According to [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem C], $\chi $ can be realized in such a stratum. Let $\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ be a system of handle generators for $S_{g,n}$ (see Definition 4.2), and define an auxiliary representation $\rho \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,n},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ as follow:
where $\{\alpha ,\beta \}$ is a pair of handle generators for $\mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})$ and $\delta _i$ is a peripheral loop around the i-th puncture. Notice that this auxiliary representation differs from that defined in Definition 49. Since $\chi $ is a nontrivial representation, Lemmas 4.4 and 4.5 apply, and we can assume $\chi (\alpha _1),\,\chi (\beta _1)\in {\mathbb C}^*$ . As a consequence, the auxiliary representation $\rho $ is also nontrivial. Next, we realize $\rho $ as the period character of some translation surface with poles in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(2n;-2,\dots ,-2)$ as in Section §5. This structure serves as the base case for an inductive foundation. The inductive process consists in showing that at each step we always obtain a translation surface with poles with enough room to bubble a handle so that the resulting structure has the desired parity. Notice that, once the polar part $\nu =(2,\dots ,2)$ is fixed, the genus determines the order of the zero uniquely; this is the Gauss–Bonnet condition; see Remark 2.3. Therefore, bubbling a handle yields a sequence of mapping between strata as follows:
According to Lemmas 3.5 and 3.8, at each step bubbling a handle does not alter the spin parity. Therefore, as we shall see in Section §7.2, the spin parity is completely determined by the rotation number of the initial genus-one differential. The stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(2n;-2,\dots ,-2)$ has exactly two connected components: One of these comprises genus-one differentials with rotation number $k=1$ , and the other one comprises differentials with rotation number $k=2$ . In the former case, each bubbling gets the access to the connected component of translation surfaces with even spin parity. In the latter case, each bubbling gets the access to the connected component of translation surfaces with odd spin parity.
Once a structure in a stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2n+2g-2;-2,\dots ,-2)$ is realized with prescribed parity and period character $\chi $ , then we can get the access to all other strata of genus g differentials by bubbling copies of the differential $({\mathbb C},\,z\,dz)$ along suitable rays joining the single zero with the punctures. Note that these copies of $({\mathbb C},\,z\,dz)$ flat geometrically can be represented by gluing entire Euclidean planes; hence, the residues at the original poles are unchanged in the process. Moreover, Lemma 3.16 ensures that the parity remains unaltered. Finally, by breaking a zero (see §3.1), we get the desired result for all possible strata $\mathcal {H}_{g}(\kappa ;-\nu )$ , where $\kappa =(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k)\in 2\,{\mathbb Z}_+^k$ and $\kappa , \nu $ satisfy the Gauss–Bonnet condition (13).
7.1.2 Two exceptional cases
The strategy above does not apply for strata of differentials with a single pole of order $2$ . The problem is due to the connectedness of the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(2;-2)$ ; see [Reference BoissyBoi15, Theorem 1.1] or Section §2.3. We bypass this issue by using genus-two differentials as the base case for the induction. More precisely, given a representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,1},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ and a system of handle generators $\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ , we define an auxiliary representation $\rho \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{2,1},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ as
Next, we realize $\rho $ as the period character of some translation surface in $\mathcal {H}_2(4;-2)$ . We shall use this structure as the base case for the induction and then we can rely on the same kind of process described in Section §7.1.1. Bubbling a handle yields a sequence of mapping similar to Equation (92), that is,
Recall that bubbling does not alter the spin parity of the structure (whenever it is defined). Since $\mathcal {H}_2(4;-2)$ has two connected components distinguished by the spin parity, by bubbling a genus-two differential with even parity we get a translation surface with even parity in each stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2g;-2)$ . Similarly, by bubbling a genus-two differential with odd parity we get a structure with odd parity in each stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2g;-2)$ . We next induct on the order of the pole. More precisely, by bubbling $p-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,z\,dz)$ along an infinite ray joining the single zero and the pole we can access to the stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2g+2p-2;-2p)$ . Notice that, again, Lemma 3.16 ensures that the spin parity only depends on the parity of the initial structure. By breaking a zero, we get the access to all strata of the form $\mathcal {H}_g(\kappa ;-2p)$ , where $\kappa =(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k)\in 2\,{\mathbb Z}_+^k$ .
In the light of Remark 2.18, for two-punctured surfaces there is an additional case to take into account. This is the second exceptional case. Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a nontrivial representation of nontrivial-ends type and let $\mathcal {H}_g(2g;-1,-1)$ be a stratum of genus g meromorphic differentials with two simple poles. A nonrational representation (see Definition 5.9) can be realized in that stratum; see [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem C]. However, if $\chi $ is rational, then necessary and sufficient conditions for the realization are given by [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem D]; see also Proposition 6.10 above. Once again, we rely on an inductive foundation and, since the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(2;-1,-1)$ is connected, genus-two differentials will serve as the base case for the induction. In fact, the stratum $\mathcal {H}_2(4;-1,-1)$ has two connected components distinguished by the spin parity. We shall realize an auxiliary representation in this stratum with prescribed parity and then bubbling will provide the access to connected components of all the other strata $\mathcal {H}_g(2g,-1,-1)$ according to the sequence of mapping
Once again, by breaking a zero we get the access to all strata of the form $\mathcal {H}_g(\kappa ;-1,-1)$ , with $\kappa \in 2\,{\mathbb Z}_+^k$ .
In both exceptional cases, the basic cases for the inductive process have already been realized in Section §6; see Remark 6.15. In the next section, we move to develop our inductive process. We have already mentioned above that bubbling copies of $({\mathbb C},\,z\,dz)$ along rays and breaking a zero into zeros of even order do not alter the spin parity and do not change the existing residues. Since these operations provide the access to all other strata with poles of order greater than $2$ and multiple zeros, in what follows we can reduce to consider strata with poles of order $2$ and then prove Proposition 7.1 for these strata. The generic case immediately follows.
7.2 Into the process
We discuss the inductive foundation by distinguishing two cases according to Sections §7.1.1 and §7.1.2 above.
7.2.1 Generic case
Let $n\ge 2$ , and let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a nontrivial representation, possibly of nontrivial-ends type. Let $\mathcal {G}=\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ be a system of handle generators, and let $\rho \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,n},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be an auxiliary representation defined as in Equation (91). Assume without loss of generality that $\rho $ is a nontrivial representation. According to our constructions in Section §5, $\rho $ can be realized as the period character of some translation surface with poles, say $(X,\omega )$ , in $\mathcal {H}_1(2n;-2,\dots ,-2)$ with rotation number $k=1$ or $k=2$ .
More precisely, we realize $\chi $ according to the following list:
-
• If $\chi $ is of trivial-ends type, then $(X,\omega )$ is realized as in Section §5.1, otherwise
-
• If $\chi $ is of nontrivial-ends type and
In order to be consistent in what follows we adopt the notation of these sections. Notice that all constructions but one developed in these sections just mentioned contain an entire copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ ; that is, a copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ has been glued along an infinite ray. Moreover, we can always find rays starting the single zero of $\omega $ the punctures along which we can glue copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ to increase the order of poles and then get the access to all other stratum.
Remark 7.2. Among those constructions mentioned above, only one does not contain a whole copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ . In fact, if $n=2$ and we aim to realize $\rho $ as the period character of $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal H_1(4;-2,-2)$ with rotation number $2$ , then we proceed as in §5.1.2.4. In this case, $(X,\omega )$ is obtained by gluing the closures of the exteriors of two isometric triangles each one in a different copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ ; see §5.1.2.4 for details.
Nevertheless, we always have enough room for bubbling handles with positive or nonpositive volumes. We proceed in a recursive way as follows. Choose an initial point $O_1$ according to the following rule:
-
• If $(X,\omega )$ contains an entire copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , then pick $O_1$ as any of the points $Q_i$ for $i=1,\dots ,n-1$ ; otherwise
-
• we are in the special case mentioned in Remark 7.2 above. The starting point $O_1$ can be taken as $P+\chi (\alpha )$ ; see Figure 14.
In both case,s we can find a straight line $l_1$ passing through $O_1$ so that one of the two sides is an embedded half-plane, say $H_1$ . Without loss of generality, we can orient $l_1$ so that $H_1$ lies on the left of $l_1$ . We will show that all bubbling can be done within $H_1$ .
Remark 7.3. An alternative approach may be the following. If a pair $(X,\omega )$ is a meromorphic differential with all poles of order at least $2$ , then any saddle connection in the boundary of its convex core is contained in such a line. For more about this notion, the reader may consult [Reference FilipFil24, Section §3.3]. On the other hand, since our approach is to show that higher genus differentials with prescribed parity can be obtained from genus-one meromorphic differentials with prescribed rotation number, we shall proceed with an inductive foundation as follows.
We are now ready to implement the recursion we just alluded above, namely we will show that all bubbling can be done within $H_1$ . For $j=2,\dots ,g$ , let $l_{j-1}$ be a straight line parallel and with the same orientation with respect to $l_1$ and passing through a point $O_{j-1}$ which will be recursively determined step by step. Finally, define $H_{j-1}$ as the half-plane on the left side of $l_{j-1}$ . Next, consider the j-th pair of handle generators $\{\alpha _j,\,\beta _j\}\subset \mathcal {G}$ . Then, depending on the value $\Im \left (\,\overline {\chi (\alpha _j)}\,\chi (\beta _j)\,\right )$ , we proceed as follows:
-
• If $\Im \left (\,\overline {\chi (\alpha _j)}\,\chi (\beta _j)\,\right )>0$ , then we bubble a handle with positive volume. Up to replacing $\{\alpha _j,\,\beta _j\}$ with their inverses and renaming the curves if needed, we can assume that the edge, say $e_j$ , joining $O_{j-1}$ with $O_{j-1}+\chi (\alpha _j)$ entirely lies in $H_{j-1}$ . Let $\mathcal {P}_j\subset {\mathbb C}$ be the parallelogram bounded by the chain
$$ \begin{align*} O_{j-1}\mapsto O_{j-1}+\chi(\alpha_j)\mapsto O_{j-1}+\chi(\alpha_j)+\chi(\beta_j)\mapsto O_{j-1}+\chi(\beta_j)\mapsto O_{j-1}. \end{align*} $$According to our convention, let us denote by $a_j^+$ (respectively $a_j^-$ ) the edge of $\mathcal {P}_j$ parallel to $\chi (\alpha _j)$ that bounds the parallelogram on its right (respectively left). Similarly, we denote by $b_j^+$ (respectively $b_j^-$ ) the edge of $\mathcal {P}_j$ parallel to $\chi (\beta _j)$ that bounds the parallelogram on its right (resp. left). Next, we slit $H_{j-1}$ along $e_j$ and denote $e_j^{\pm }$ the resulting edges. Then identify the edge $b_j^+$ with $b_j^-$ , the edge $a_j^+$ with $e_j^-$ and the edge $a_j^-$ with $e_j^+$ . The resulting structure is a genus j surface and the newborn handle has periods $\chi (\alpha _j)$ and $\chi (\beta _j)$ . Finally, define . -
• If $\Im \left (\,\overline {\chi (\alpha _j)}\,\chi (\beta _j)\,\right )=0$ , then we bubble a handle with null volume. Up to replacing $\{\alpha _j,\,\beta _j\}$ with their inverses, we can assume that the edge, say $e_j$ , joining $O_{j-1}$ with $O_{j-1}+\chi (\alpha _j)+\chi (\beta _j)$ entirely lies in $\overline H_{j-1}$ . Notice that here we need to consider the closure of $H_{j-1}$ because $\chi (\alpha _j)$ and $\chi (\beta _j)$ can be parallel to $l_1$ . Slit $e_j$ , and denote $e_j^{\pm }$ the resulting sides. On $e_j^+$ , define $a_j^+$ the subedge joining $O_{j-1}$ with $O_{j-1}+\chi (\alpha _j)$ , and define $b_j^+$ the subedge joining $O_{j-1}+\chi (\alpha _j)$ with $O_{j-1}+\chi (\alpha _j)+\chi (\beta _j)$ . On $e_j^-$ , define $b_j^-$ the subedge joining $O_{j-1}$ with $O_{j-1}+\chi (\beta _j)$ , and define $a_j^+$ the subedge joining $O_{j-1}+\chi (\beta _j)$ with $O_{j-1}+\chi (\alpha _j)+\chi (\beta _j)$ . Identify the edge $a_j^+$ with $a_j^-$ and the edge $b_j^+$ with $b_j^-$ . The resulting structure is a genus j surface, and the newborn handle has periods $\chi (\alpha _j)$ and $\chi (\beta _j)$ . Finally, define . In the case $O_j$ lies in $l_{j-1}$ , then $l_{j-1}=l_j$ and $H_{j-1}=H_j$ .
-
• If $\Im \left (\,\overline {\chi (\alpha _j)}\,\chi (\beta _j)\,\right )<0$ , then we bubble a handle of negative volume. Up to replacing $\{\alpha _j,\,\beta _j\}$ with their inverses, we can assume that the edge, say $e_j$ , joining $O_{j-1}$ with $O_{j-1}+\chi (\alpha _j)+\chi (\beta _j)$ entirely lies in $H_{j-1}$ . Let $\mathcal {Q}_j\subset H_{j-1}$ be the quadrilateral bounded by the chain
$$ \begin{align*} O_{j-1}\mapsto O_{j-1}+\chi(\alpha_j)\mapsto O_{j-1}+\chi(\alpha_j)+\chi(\beta_j)\mapsto O_{j-1}+\chi(\beta_j)\mapsto O_{j-1}. \end{align*} $$We can assume without loss of generality that $\mathcal {Q}_j\,\cap \,l_{j-1}=\{\,O_{j-1}\,\}$ . In fact, if one of the edges of $\mathcal {Q}_j$ would lie on $l_{j-1}$ , then we can replace $\{\alpha _j,\,\beta _j\}$ with a new set of handle generators obtained by applying suitable Dehn twists so that the resulting quadrilateral enjoys the desired property. Remove the interior of $\mathcal {Q}_j$ , and denote by $a_j^+$ , respectively $a_j^-$ , the edge of $\mathcal {Q}_j$ parallel to $\chi (\alpha _j)$ . Denote by $b_j^+$ , respectively $b_j^-$ , similarly as before. Identify the edge $a_j^+$ with $a_j^-$ and the edge $b_j^+$ with $b_j^-$ . The resulting structure is a genus j surface, and the newborn handle has periods $\chi (\alpha _j)$ and $\chi (\beta _j)$ as desired. Finally, define .
It remains to show that the translation surface, say $(Y,\,\xi )$ , obtained after g steps has the desired parity. This can be seen with a direct computation as follows:
because bubbling handles does not alter the spin parity; see Lemmas 3.5 and 3.8. The third equality holds because the parity of $\gcd \left (\mathrm {Ind}(\alpha _1),\,\mathrm {Ind}(\beta _1),\,2 \right )$ is always the opposite of $\left (\mathrm {Ind}(\alpha _1)+1 \right )\left (\mathrm {Ind}(\beta _1)+1 \right )$ and bubbling handles preserves the spin parity.
7.2.2 Exceptional case: single pole of order $2$
Let $n=1$ , and let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,1},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a nontrivial representation. Fix a set of handle generators $\mathcal {G}=\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ , define an auxiliary representation as in Equation (93) and finally realize $\rho $ as the period character of some translation surface $(X,\omega )$ as in Section §6.2.1. In order to be consistent and facilitate reading, we adopt the same notation.
Remark 7.4. Since X has genus two, the extremal points of the broken chain (70) are $P_0$ and $P_{4}$ .
Let $O_1=P_{4}$ be an initial point, and let $l_1$ be a straight line passing through $O_1$ , orthogonal to $r_2$ and oriented so that the broken chains (70) and (79) lie on the left. In this case, we set $E_1$ as the half-plane on the right of $l_1$ . We can now implement the same recursion as in §7.2.1, and hence, after $g-2$ steps, we get a genus g differential $\xi $ on a Riemann surface Y. A straightforward computation shows that the parity of $\xi $ is determined by the parity of $\omega $ can be computed as in Equation (96).
Since $(X,\omega )$ can be realized with both even or odd parity, Proposition 7.1 follows in this case.
7.2.3 Exceptional case: two simple poles
Let $n=2$ , and let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a representation of nontrivial-ends type. Let $w\in {\mathbb C}^*$ such that $\mathrm {Im}(\chi _2)=\langle \,w\,\rangle $ , where $\chi _2$ is the representation encoding the polar part of $\chi $ ; see Section §2.1. Let $\mathcal {G}=\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ be a system of handle generators, and define an auxiliary representation $\rho \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{2,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ as
We already know from §6.4 how to realize $\rho $ as the period character of some translation surfaces with poles, say $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal {H}_2(4;-1,-1)$ , and prescribed parity. For simplicity, we shall adopt the same notation as therein, and we proceed with a discussion case by case as follows.
7.2.3.1 $\chi $ is not real-collinear.
Consider first nonreal-collinear representations. By Corollary 4.10, we can assume that any pair $\{\alpha _j,\,\beta _j\}\subset \mathcal {G}$ has positive volume, that is, $\Im \left (\,\overline {\chi (\alpha _j)}\,\chi (\beta _j)\,\right )>0$ . Without loss of generality, we can also assume that the auxiliary representation $\rho $ is also not real-collinear. Notice that $\rho $ can be discrete of rank two even if the overall representation $\chi $ is not (it cannot be discrete of rank one because all pairs of handle generators have positive volume). If $\rho $ is discrete of rank two, then Lemma 4.12 applies and we renormalize the handle generators $\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\alpha _2,\beta _2\}$ so that
Under these conditions, we realize $(X,\omega )$ as in §6.4.1.1 or §6.4.2 depending on whether $\rho $ is discrete or not. Let $O_1=P_{4}$ be the initial point. For any $j=3,\dots ,g$ , consider the pair of handle generators $\{\alpha _j,\,\beta _j\}$ . Notice that least one between $\chi (\alpha _j)$ and $\chi (\beta _j)$ is not parallel to w, otherwise $\Im \left (\,\overline {\chi (\alpha _j)}\,\chi (\beta _j)\,\right )=0$ .
Remark 7.5. By replacing $\{\alpha _j,\,\beta _j\}$ with either $\{\alpha _j^{-1},\,\beta _j^{-1}\}$ , $\{\,\beta _j,\,\alpha ^{-1}_j\}$ or $\{\,\beta _j^{-1},\,\alpha _j\}$ and then renaming the new pair of handle generators as $\{\alpha _j,\,\beta _j\}$ (with a little abuse of notation), we can assume that $\chi (\alpha _j)$ is not parallel to w and points rightwards, that is, $\arg \left (\, \chi (\alpha _j)\,\right )\in \left [ -\frac \pi 2,\,\frac \pi 2\right [$ . Notice that this changing does not alter the volume of the handle.
For $j=3,\dots ,g$ , let , and let $e_{j-2}$ be the edge joining $O_{j-2}$ with $O_{j-1}$ ; see Figure 38. Notice that $e_j$ is a geodesic segment that ‘wraps’ around the cylindrical ends on $(X,\omega )$ without overlapping itself because $\chi (\alpha _j)$ is not parallel to w by design. Let $\mathcal {P}_j\subset {\mathbb C}$ be the parallelogram bounded by the chain
As usual, according to our convention, we denote by $a_j^+$ , respectively $a_j^-$ , the edge of $\mathcal {P}_j$ parallel to $\chi (\alpha _j)$ that bounds the parallelogram on its right, respectively left. Similarly, we denote by $b_j^+$ , respectively $b_j^-$ , the edge of $\mathcal {P}_j$ parallel to $\chi (\beta _j)$ that bounds the parallelogram on its right, respectively left. Next, we slit $(X,\omega )$ along $e_{j-2}$ and denote by $e_{j-2}^{\pm }$ the resulting sides. Identify the edge $e_{j-2}^-$ with $a_j^+$ and $e_{j-2}^+$ with $a_j^-$ . Finally, identify the edge $b_j^+$ with $b_j^-$ . After repeating this process $g-2$ times, we obtain a translation surface $(Y,\xi )$ with period character $\chi $ and spin parity $\varphi (\xi )$ equal to $\varphi (\omega )$ because bubbling handles with positive volume, as in Section §3.2, does not alter the spin parity. Since $(X,\omega )$ can be realized with prescribed parity, both even and odd parity are achievable, and the desired conclusion follows in this case.
7.2.3.2 $\chi $ is real-collinear but not discrete
We now assume $\chi $ to be real-collinear but not discrete. Up to replacing $\chi $ with $A\,\chi $ , for some $A\in \mathrm {GL}^+(2,\mathbb {R})$ , we can assume that $\mathrm {Im}(\,\chi \,)\subset {\mathbb R}$ . Lemma 4.13 applies, and hence, we can find a system of handle generators $\mathcal {G}=\{\alpha _1,\beta _1,\dots ,\alpha _g,\beta _g\}$ such that $a_j=\chi (\alpha _j)$ and $b_j=\chi (\beta _j)$ satisfy the inequality
By introducing an auxiliary representation $\rho $ as in Equation (97), we first realize a translation surface $(X,\omega )$ in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_2(4;-1,-1)$ with period character $\rho $ and prescribed parity as in §6.4.1.2. If we aim to realize $\rho $ in the hyperelliptic component of $\mathcal {H}_2(4;-1,-1)$ , then recall that our construction relies on §6.1 and hence involve the introduction of two pairs $(u_1,v_1),\,(u_2,v_2)\in {\mathbb C}^2$ . By construction, there is a closed saddle connection, say s, of length
depending on whether $\rho $ is realized in the hyperelliptic component of $\mathcal {H}_2(4;-1,-1)$ or not. In both cases, since $v<w$ we have enough room on s for bubbling $g-2$ handles with zero volume. After $g-2$ steps, we obtain a translation surface, say $(Y,\xi )$ , with period character $\chi $ and spin parity $\varphi (\xi )$ equal to $\varphi (\omega )$ . Since the initial structure $(X,\omega )$ can be realized with either even or odd parity, the desired conclusion follows in this case.
7.2.3.3 $\chi $ is discrete of rank one
We are left to consider discrete representations of rank one that require a deeper discussion. We can assume $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb Z}$ without loss of generality. Recall that realizing such a representation in a certain stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k;-1,-1)$ depends only on whether the condition
holds, where $\gamma $ is a simple loop around a puncture.
In the case $w>2g$ , the auxiliary representation $\rho $ defined as in Equation (97) can be realized as in §6.4.3.1 as the holonomy of some translation surface with poles and with prescribed parity. On the other hand, this latter construction can be done as in §6.4.1.2. Therefore, we can proceed exactly as in §7.2.3.2.
Let us assume $w\le 2g$ , and let $\mathcal {H}_g(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k;-1,-1)$ be a stratum such that the condition (100) holds. It is easy to observe that $m_1+\cdots +m_k=g$ for this stratum; therefore, $m_i\le g$ and the equality holds if and only if $k=1$ . Without loss of generality, assume that
holds. Consider the auxiliary representation $\rho \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{m_1,\,2},\,{\mathbb Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb Z}$ defined as follows:
Since $w>2m_1$ , then $\rho $ can be realized as the period character of some translation surface, say $(X_1,\omega _1)$ , in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_{m_1}(2m_1;-1,-1)$ with prescribed parity; see paragraph §6.4.3.2. If $k=1$ , we are done; otherwise, we proceed as follows.
From paragraph §6.4.3.2, we recall that $(X_1,\omega _1)$ is obtained by gluing two infinite half-strips $\mathcal S_1, \mathcal {S}_2\subset {\mathbb C}$ . Let us focus on $\mathcal S_1$ . This region is bounded by a segment $s^-$ of length w and two half-rays $r_1^+$ and $r_2^-$ . The sign as usual denote on which side the region is bounded according to their orientation. Since $w>2m_2$ , the interior of $\mathcal S_1$ contains a segment, say $s_2$ , of length $2m_2$ and parallel to $s^-$ . On the other hand, the interior of $\mathcal S_1$ is embedded in $(X_1,\omega _1)$ , and hence, there is an isometric copy of $s_2$ inside $(X_1,\omega _1)$ . With a little abuse of notation, this latter is also denoted by $s_2$ . Next, we divide $s_2\subset (X_1,\omega _1)$ into $2m_2$ subsegments, say $s_{2,\,1},s_{2,\,2},\dots ,s_{2,\,2m_2-1},s_{2,\,2m_2}$ , each of length $1$ . Slit all of them, and reglue as follows: $s_{2,\,2i-1}^-$ is identified with $s_{2,\,2i}^+$ and $s_{2,\,2i-1}^+$ is identified with $s_{2,\,2i}^-$ . The resulting space, say $(X_2,\omega _2)$ , is a surface of genus $m_1+m_2$ . As a consequence of Lemma 3.8, $(X_1,\omega _1)$ and $(X_2,\omega _2)$ have the same parity. Again, if $k=2$ we are done; otherwise, there is always a segment, say $s_3$ of length $2m_3$ , that lies in the interior of $\mathcal S_1$ . If this is the case, we proceed as we have just done. After k steps, we obtain a surface $(X_k,\omega _k)=(Y,\xi )$ of genus $m_1+\cdots +m_k=g$ with period character $\chi $ . Moreover, since bubbling a handle with zero volume does not alter the spin parity (see Lemma 3.8), the resulting structure has the same parity as $(X_1,\omega _1)$ . This latter, according to Section §6 can be realized with even or odd parity (see also Remark 6.15); hence, Proposition 7.1 also holds for discrete representations of rank one. Notice that the same argument would have been valid if we have chosen $\mathcal S_2$ in place of $\mathcal S_1$ . Since there are no other cases to consider, this concludes the proof of Proposition 7.1 and indeed the proof of Theorem A which is specific for nontrivial representations.
8 Meromorphic exact differentials
We finally consider the trivial representation, and we aim to prove Theorem B. On a compact Riemann surface $\overline {X}$ , any nonconstant rational function $f\colon \overline {X}\longrightarrow \mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ yields a finite degree branched covering and the meromorphic differential $\omega =d\!f$ has trivial absolute periods; that is, $\omega $ determines a trivial period character. Let us denote by $X=\overline {X}\setminus \{\mathrm { poles of } \omega \,\}$ . Then the couple $(X,\omega )$ is a translation surface with poles in the sense of Definition 2.1. Conversely, if $(X,\omega )$ is a translation surface with poles on $S_{g,n}$ and with zero absolute periods, then the developing map (see Section §2) boils down to a holomorphic mapping $X\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ that extends to a rational function $f\colon \overline {X}\longrightarrow \mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ and $\omega =d\!f$ .
Definition 8.1. A meromorphic differential $\omega $ on a compact Riemann surface is called an exact differential if all absolute periods of $\omega $ are equal to zero. On a Riemann surface X of finite type $(g,n)$ , we say that a holomorphic differential $\omega $ with finite-order poles at the punctures is exact if all absolute periods are zero.
8.1 Bubbling handles with trivial periods
We describe here how to glue handles with trivial periods. More precisely, we provide a surgery to add a handle with trivial periods on a genus-zero differential in order to obtain a genus-one differential with prescribed rotation number; see §8.1.1. We next provide an alternative construction (see §8.1.2), which will be useful later on.
Let $(X,\omega )$ be any translation structure on a surface $S_{g,n}$ , and let $\mathrm {dev}\colon \widetilde {S}_{g,\,n}\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be its developing map. We introduce the following terminology.
Definition 8.2 (Twin paths)
On a translation surface $(X,\omega )$ , let P be any branch point of order m. Consider a collection of $m+1$ embedded path $c_i\colon [\,0,\,1\,]\longrightarrow (X,\omega )$ such that $c_i(0)=P$ for $i=0,\dots ,m$ , each of which is injectively developed, and all of which overlap once developed; that is, there is a determination of the developing map around $c_0\,\cup \,\cdots \,\cup \,c_m$ which injectively develops $c_0,\,c_1,\dots ,c_m$ to the same arc $\widehat {c}\subset {\mathbb C}$ . For any $2\le k\le m$ , the paths $c_{i_1},\dots ,c_{i_k}$ are called twin paths. For any pair $c_i,\,c_j$ , we may notice that the angle at P between them is a multiple of $2\pi $ .
Convention. In what follows, we shall agree that all twin paths $c_0,\dots ,c_m$ at P as defined in the above are counterclockwise ordered if not otherwise specified.
The following technical lemma is straightforward and the proof is left to the reader.
Lemma 8.3. On a translation surface $(X,\omega )$ , let P be any branch point of order m, and let $B_{4\varepsilon }(P)$ be a simply connected open metric ball centered at P. Break P into two zeros, say $P_1$ and $P_2$ of orders $m_1$ and $m_2$ , respectively, such that $P_1$ and $P_2$ are joined by a saddle connection, say s, of length $\varepsilon $ . Then there are $m_1$ paths, say $c_1,\dots ,c_{m_1}$ , all leaving from $P_1$ , such that s and $c_i$ are twins for every $i=1,\dots ,m_1$ . Similarly, there are $m_2$ paths, say $c_{m_1+1},\dots ,c_m$ , all leaving from $P_2$ , such that $c_{m_1+j}$ and s are twins for every $j=1,\dots ,m_2$ .
Remark 8.4. Notice that by choosing sufficiently small $\varepsilon $ so that the open metric ball $B_{4\varepsilon }(P)$ is simply connected then all twins are contained inside it.
8.1.1 Handles with trivial periods
Let $(X,\omega )$ be a translation surface with poles, let P be a branch point of order $m_1+m_2$ and let $B_{4\varepsilon }(P)$ be a simply connected open ball. Finally, assume the open ball $B_{4\varepsilon }(P)$ does not contain branch points other than P. Break P into two branch points, say $P_1$ and $P_2$ , of orders $m_1$ and $m_2$ , respectively, so that they are joined by a saddle connection s of length $\varepsilon $ . After breaking P into $P_1$ and $P_2$ , the resulting open ball does not contain branch points other than them.
Fix an orientation on s, say from $P_1$ to $P_2$ . The saddle connection s has $m_1$ twins leaving from $P_1$ , and it determines on each of them an obvious outbound orientation. In the same fashion, s has $m_2$ twin paths leaving from $P_2$ , and it determines on each of them an obvious inbound orientation to $P_2$ . Let $c_1$ be the twin of s leaving from $P_1$ that forms an angle of $2\pi $ on its right. Define $c_2$ as the twin of s leaving from $P_2$ that forms an angle of $2\pi (r+1)$ on its left. Next, slit both $c_1$ and $c_2$ , and we denote the resulting sides $c_1^{\pm }$ and $c_2^{\pm }$ where the signs are taken according to our convention. Then, identify $c_1^+$ with $c_2^-$ and similarly identify $c_1^-$ with $c_2^+$ . If the initial translation surface $(X,\omega )$ has genus g, the resulting surface $(Y,\xi )$ has genus $g+1$ .
Let $\alpha $ be a simple closed curve around $c_2$ that winds around $P_2$ but not around the other branch point. It can be checked that $\alpha $ has index equal to $m_2+1$ because $P_2$ has order $m_2$ . Next, Let $\beta \subset (X,\omega )$ be a smooth path starting from the midpoint of $c_1^-$ to the midpoint of $c_2^+$ that crosses s, and it does not contain any branch point in its interior (hence it misses both $P_1$ and $P_2$ ). On $(Y,\xi )$ , the smooth curve $\beta $ closes up to a simple closed curve such that along with $\alpha $ they provide a basis of handle generators; see Definition 4.2 for the newborn handle. It can be checked that $\beta $ has index equal to r because it turns of an angle $2\pi $ around $P_1$ counterclockwise, and then it turns of an angle $2\pi (r+1)$ around $P_2$ clockwise. See Figure 39.
By denoting $P_1^{\prime }$ the extremal point of $c_1$ other than $P_1$ and by $P_2^{\prime }$ the extremal point of $c_2$ other than $P_2$ , we can notice that they are both regular. Next, identify $P_1$ with $P_2^{\prime }$ and $P_2$ with $P_1^{\prime }$ . Once the identification is done, we get two branch points of angles $2\pi (m_1+2)$ and $2\pi (m_2+2)$ . The following holds.
Lemma 8.5. Let $(X,\,\omega )\in \mathcal {H}_0(m_1,\dots ,m_{k-1}-1,\,m_k-1;\,-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ be a genus-zero differential with trivial periods. Let $P_{k-1}$ and $P_k$ be the zeros of orders $m_{k-1}-1$ and $m_k-1$ , respectively, and assume there is a saddle connection joining them. Assume we can bubble a handle with trivial periods as described above, and let $(Y,\,\xi )$ be the resulting translation surface. Then $(Y,\xi )$ is a genus-one differential with rotation number equal to $\gcd (r,m_1,\dots ,m_k,p_1,\dots ,p_n)$ .
Proof. The fact that $(Y,\xi )$ is a genus-one differential directly follows from the construction. By adopting the notation above, $\alpha $ has index equal to $m_k$ and $\beta $ has index r. Then the desired conclusion follows.
8.1.2 Alternative construction
We now introduce an alternative way for adding a handle with trivial periods. We shall use this version later on for the inductive foundation in Section §8.6. Let $(X,\omega )\in \Omega \mathcal {M}_{g,n}$ be a translation surface with poles, and let $P\in (X,\omega )$ be a branch point of even order $2m$ ; that is, the angle at P is $(4m+2)\pi $ . Let $B_{4\varepsilon }(P)$ be an open ball of radius $4\varepsilon $ at P. Consider three geodesic twin paths $c_1,\,c_2,\,c_3$ at P, all leaving from P with length $\varepsilon $ and counterclockwise ordered as in our convention such that the angle between $c_1$ and $c_2$ and the angle between $c_2$ and $c_3$ are both $2\pi $ . Then the angle between $c_3$ and $c_1$ is $(4m-2)\pi $ . Let $Q_1,\,Q_2,\,Q_3$ denote the extremal regular points of $c_1,\,c_2,\,c_3$ , respectively, other than P. For each $i=1,2,3$ , assume that $c_i$ is oriented from P to $Q_i$ . By slitting all of these paths, the branch point P splits into three points $P_1,\,P_2,\,P_3$ , and we get a surface of genus g with piecewise geodesic boundary. We can assume that $P_1,\,Q_1,\,P_2,\,Q_2,\,P_3,\,Q_3$ are cyclically ordered as shown in Figure 40. Then the corner angles at all vertices but $P_3$ is $2\pi $ and the angle at $P_3$ is $(4m-2)\pi $ .
Notice that, by prolonging each $c_i$ to a geodesic ray $r_i$ of length $4\epsilon $ , the open ball $B_{4\varepsilon }(P)$ is divided into three sectors, say $S_1,\,S_2,\,S_3$ . We assume $S_i$ is the sector containing $P_i$ after slitting $c_1,\,c_2,\,c_3$ . We next consider the following smooth arcs on the surface with boundary obtained after slitting. See Figure 40.
-
• Let $\alpha $ be a smooth arc joining a point $A_1\in {P_2\,Q_2}$ at distance $\varepsilon /3$ from $P_2$ and a point $A_2\in {P_1\,Q_3}$ at distance $\varepsilon /3$ from $P_1$ . We can take this arc such that it lies in the sectors $S_1$ and $S_2$ without crossing the sector $S_3$ .
-
• Let $\beta _1$ be a smooth arc joining a point $B_1\in P_1\,Q_1$ at distance $2\varepsilon /3$ from $P_1$ and a point $B_2\in P_1\,Q_3$ at distance $2\varepsilon /3$ from $P_1$ . We can assume that $\beta _1$ lies entirely in the sector $S_1$ . Notice that, by construction, $\alpha $ and $\beta _1$ cross.
-
• Finally, let $\beta _2$ be a smooth arc joining a point $B_3\in P_3\,Q_3$ at distance $2\varepsilon /3$ from $P_2$ and a point $B_4\in P_3\,Q_2$ at distance $2\varepsilon /3$ from $P_3$ . We can take $\beta _2$ such that it does not cross the sector $S_1$ and is disjoint from $\alpha $ .
We next glue the edges of the hexagonal boundary as follows. First, identify $P_1\,Q_1$ with $P_3\,Q_2$ , then $P_2\,Q_1$ with $P_3\,Q_3$ and, finally, $P_2\,Q_2$ with $P_1\,Q_3$ . The resulting surface, say $(Y,\xi )$ , has genus $g+1$ . By construction, the arc $\alpha $ closes up to a simple closed curve of index $2$ . Moreover, $B_1$ identifies with $B_4$ and $B_2$ identifies with $B_3$ . Therefore, $\beta _1\cup \beta _2$ yields a simple closed curve $\beta $ of index $2$ . The pair of curves $\{\alpha ,\,\beta \}$ determines a set of handle generators for the newborn handle. The points $P_1,\,P_2,\,P_3$ are identified according to our construction and they determine a branch point of angle $(4m+2)\pi $ . Similarly, $Q_1,\,Q_2,\,Q_3$ are also identified and they determine a branch point of angle $6\pi $ because the extremal points are all assumed to be regular. The following holds.
Lemma 8.6. Let $(X,\,\omega )\in \mathcal {H}_g(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k;\,-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ be a translation surface with poles and trivial periods. Let $(Y,\,\xi )$ be the translation surface obtained by adding a handle with trivial periods as described above. Then $(Y,\xi )\in \mathcal {H}_{g+1}(2,2m_1,\dots ,2m_k;\,-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ which is a stratum of even type, it has trivial periods, and its parity is given by $\varphi (\xi )=\varphi (\omega )+1$ .
Proof. The fact that $(Y,\xi )$ belongs to a stratum of even type directly follows from the construction. By adopting the notation above, since $\alpha $ has index $2$ and $\beta $ has index $0$ , then
Therefore, $\varphi (\xi )=\varphi (\omega )+1$ .
We shall use the surgeries above to realize translation surfaces with poles and trivial periods in a given stratum with prescribed parity.
8.2 Hurwitz type inequality
In [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem B], the authors provided necessary and sufficient conditions for realizing the trivial representation in a given stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ . One of these conditions relates the order of zeros with the order of poles as follows:
In what follows, we shall make a strong use of this constraint which led to consider several exceptional cases. We shall refer to it as Hurwitz type inequality.
8.3 Genus-zero exact differentials
We briefly recall the strategy adopted in [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Section §8] to realize the trivial representation as the period character of some exact differentials on $\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1$ with prescribed zeros and poles. The aim is to make the autonomous explanation of the next subsections as self-contained as possible.
Suppose we want to realize the trivial representation in a stratum $\mathcal {H}_0(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ . We consider n translation surfaces $({\mathbb C},\omega _i)$ for $1\leq i\leq n$ , where the differential $\omega _i$ has a pole of order $p_i\ge 2$ at the infinity and a zero of order $p_i-2$ at $0\in {\mathbb C}$ . We consider some, possibly all, of these translation surfaces and we glue them, by slitting along a segment of finite length, to define a sequence of translation surfaces $(Y_j,\,\xi _j)$ . Here, each $(Y_j,\,\xi _j)$ is a sphere with an exact meromorphic differential with poles of orders $p_1, \ldots , p_t$ for some $1\leq t \leq n$ and zeros of orders $m_1, \ldots , m_{s-1}$ and $\widetilde {m}_s$ for some $1\leq s\leq k$ , where $\widetilde {m}_s \geq m_s$ and $\widetilde {m}_s \leq m_s+ m_{s+1} + \cdots +m_k$ . Since the degree of any meromorphic differential on the sphere is $-2$ , we have
The sequence $(Y_j,\,\xi _j)$ is constructed such that, as j increases, s and t increase until $t=n$ . The process runs until all the $({\mathbb C},\omega _i)$ ’s are exhausted. We finally break the last zero to get the desired differential.
Remark 8.7. The key observation here is for the translation surface $(Y_1,\,\xi _1)$ obtained after the first step with poles $p_1,\dots ,p_t$ and two zeros $m_1, \widetilde {m}_2$ , where $\widetilde {m}_2\ge m_2$ . In the case $t=n$ , then only the following cases arise:
-
• $\widetilde {m}_2=m_2$ , and hence, the desired genus-zero differential belongs to $\mathcal {H}_0(m_1,m_2;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ ; otherwise
-
• $\widetilde {m}_2>m_2$ , and hence, the desired genus-zero differential belongs to a certain stratum $\mathcal {H}_0(\kappa ;-\nu )$ , where $\kappa =(m_1,m_2,\dots ,m_k)$ and $\nu =(p_1,\dots ,p_n)$ . In this case, the zero of order $\widetilde {m}_2$ is broken into $k-1$ zeros of orders $m_2,\dots ,m_k$ .
This constriction can be performed in such a way that if $P_i$ and $P_j$ are two zeros such that $|\,i-j\,|=1$ , then there exists at least one saddle connection joining $P_i$ and $P_j$ , that is, a geodesic segment with no zeros in its interior. Finally, we can arrange the zeros so that two different zeros have different developed images. As a consequence, if $s_i$ is the saddle connection joining $P_i$ with $P_{i+1}$ , all twins of $s_i$ leaving from $P_i$ do not contain any zero other than $P_i$ and $P_{i+1}$ themselves. See [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Section §8.3.4] for more details.
8.4 Trivial periods and prescribed rotation number
The aim of this section is to prove the following proposition concerning genus-one differentials.
Proposition 8.8. Suppose the trivial representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ can be realized in a stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k;\,-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ . Then it can be realized in each connected component of the same stratum with the only exceptions being the strata $\mathcal {H}_1(2,2;\,-4)$ , $\mathcal {H}_1(2,2,2;\,-2,-2,-2)$ and $\mathcal {H}_1(3,3;-3,-3)$ .
The proof of this proposition is based on the construction done before in subsection §8.1.1. We recall for the reader’s convenience that the connected components of $\mathcal {H}_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k;\,-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ are distinguished by the divisors of $\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k,p_1,\dots ,p_n)$ . Clearly, if the greatest common divisor is one there is nothing to prove and the realization is subject to [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem B]. Throughout the present subsection, for a generic stratum let $p=p_1+\cdots +p_n\,=\,m_1+\cdots +m_k$ and let r be a divisor of $\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k;p_1,\dots ,p_n)$ . We shall need to distinguish several cases according to certain mutual relationships among $p,\,r,\,n$ and k.
8.4.1 Strata with two zeros
It is not hard to show that the trivial representation $\chi :\mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ cannot be realized in every stratum with a single zero of maximal order because the Hurwitz type inequality (103) never holds for these strata. Therefore, strata with two zeros appear as the simplest minimal strata in which the trivial representation can be realized. Recall that our aim is to realize r as the prescribed rotation number for a trivial representation. The first case we consider is the following:
8.4.1.1 All poles have order r
Let us realize the trivial representation in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(m_1,m_2;-r^n)$ . In this case, $m_1+m_2=nr$ and $m_1,\,m_2$ are both divisible by r by assumption. Moreover, $m_1$ and $m_2$ are also subject to the Hurwitz type inequality (103); hence,
A few remarks are in order.
Remark 8.9. We may also notice that $n\ge 2$ . In fact, let us assume that $n=1$ , and hence, $m_1+m_2=r$ . Since $m_1,\,m_2$ are both divisible by r we would get the following equality:
with $k_1,\,k_2\in \mathbb Z^+$ . This is possible if and only if $k_1=1$ and $k_2=m_2=0$ , up to relabelling. Since the trivial representation cannot be realized in the strata of type $(m;\,-m)$ , we get the desired contradiction.
The present paragraph is entirely devoted to show the following:
Lemma 8.10. Let $\mathcal H_1(m_1,m_2;\,-r^n)$ be a stratum of genus-one differentials with $r\ge 3$ . Then the trivial representation can be realized in the connected component with rotation number r. Furthermore, the trivial representation can be realized in the connected component with rotation number $1$ with the only exception being the stratum $\mathcal H_1(3,3;\,-3,-3)$ (that corresponds to the case $n=2$ and $r=3\,$ ).
In this case, we first realize the trivial representation in $\mathcal H_0(m_1-1,m_2-1;-r^n)$ by using the saddle connection configuration description in [Reference Eskin, Masur and ZorichEMZ03, Section §9.3]. More precisely, we choose n pairs of positive integers, say $(a_i, b_i)$ , such that $a_i + b_i = r$ for $i = 1,\dots ,n$ , and moreover, $a_1 +\cdots + a_n = m_1$ and $b_1 + \cdots + b_n = m_2$ .
Remark 8.11. The existence of these pairs $(a_i,b_i)$ can be explained as follows. We first notice that, the Hurwitz type inequality (103) for $\mathcal H_1(m_1, m_2; -r^n)$ implies $n < m_1, m_2 < (r-1)n$ . We want pairs of positive integers $a_i, b_i$ to satisfy the conditions above. In particular, $0 < a_i < r$ ensures $b_i$ to be positive. The extreme case happens when $m_1 = n+1$ , where we can take $a_1 = 2$ and $a_2 = \cdots = a_n = 1$ – recall that r is at least $3$ ; see Equation (105) above. If $m_1$ increases, we increase $a_1$ , until it reaches $r-1$ , then we increase $a_2$ , and so on.
For every $i=1,\dots ,n$ , consider a copy of $({\mathbb C},\, z^{r-2}dz)$ , and fix any vector $c\in \mathbb C^*$ . Let $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1,\omega _i)$ be the translation surface with poles obtained by breaking the zero of $({\mathbb C},\, z^{r-2}dz)$ into two zeros, say $P_i$ and $Q_i$ , of orders $a_i-1$ and $b_i-1$ , respectively, so that the resulting saddle connection joining them, say $c_i$ , is parallel to c with the same length, that is, $|\,c\,|=|\,c_i\,|$ . See Figure 41.
Slit every $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1,\omega _i)$ along $c_i$ , and denote by $c_i^{\pm }$ the resulting edges according to our convention. Identify $c_i^-$ with $c_{i+1}^+$ for every $i=1,\dots ,n-1$ , and finally glue $c_n^-$ with $c_1^+$ . The resulting space is now a pair $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1, \omega )$ , where $\omega $ is a meromorphic differential with two zeros, say $P_o$ and $Q_o$ , of orders $m_1-1$ and $m_2-1$ and n poles of order r. Let $s_1$ be the saddle connection resulting from the identification of $c_1^+$ with $c_n^-$ . We extend the notation by defining $s_{i+1}$ to be the saddle connection resulting from the identification of $c_i^-$ with $c_{i+1}^+$ for every $i=1,\dots ,n-1$ . In the resulting space, mark the saddle connection arising from the identification of $c_1^+$ with $c_n^-$ , and define it as the beginning saddle connection as the saddle connection. This is purely a convention as in principle any other saddle connection arising from the identification of $c_i^+$ with $c_{i+1}^-$ could be equally entitled as the beginning saddle connection. We shall use this terminology later on.
In order to bubble the desired handle, we shall need to slit two paths, say $s_o$ and $s_{n+1}$ , at $P_1$ and $Q_n$ , respectively, with the same holonomy as the saddle connections; that is, we want to find $s_o$ and $s_{n+1}$ such that any pair $s_i,\,s_j$ in the collection $s_o,\,s_1,\dots ,s_n,\,s_{n+1}$ are twins in $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1,\,\omega )$ . We need to make sure that $s_o$ and $s_{n+1}$ exists, and they do not coincide with any preexisting saddle connection in $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1, \omega )$ .
Remark 8.12. For this purpose, we need to choose the pairs $(a_i,b_i)$ in a proper way. Let $A_i = a_1 + \cdots + a_i$ and $B_i = b_1 + \cdots + b_i$ , for $i = 1,\dots , n$ . The gist of idea is to find pairs of positive integers $(a_i, b_i)$ as above such that there exist two positive integers, say A and B, such that one of the following conditions holds:
-
1. $A \equiv B\, (\text {mod}\ r)$ and $A \neq A_i$ and $B \neq B_i$ for all $i=1,\dots ,n$ if we aim to get a structure with rotation number r, or
-
2. $A+1 \equiv B\, (\text {mod}\ r)$ or $A-1 \equiv B\, (\text {mod}\ r)$ , where $A \neq A_i$ and $B \neq B_i$ for all $i=1,\dots ,n$ if we aim to get a structure with rotation number $1$ .
Following Remark 8.12, we may pick $s_o$ that forms an angle $2\pi \, A$ away from the beginning saddle connection at $P_o$ . This is equivalent to pick $s_o$ that forms an angle $2\pi \, A$ away from $c_1^+$ in $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1,\,\omega _1)$ . In the same fashion, we pick $s_{n+1}$ that forms an angle $2\pi \, B$ away from the beginning saddle connection at $Q_o$ , that is, that forms an angle $2\pi \, B$ away from $c_n^-$ in $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1,\,\omega _n)$ . Then the two slits $s_o$ and $s_{n+1}$ do not coincide with any existing saddle connections on $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1,\,\omega )$ by the assumption on A and B.
Case 1: rotation number r
We begin with realizing a genus-one differential in the given stratum with rotation number r. We shall discuss this case in details because the other case of interest follows after small modifications.
We consider first the extreme case $m_1 = n+1$ ; see Remark 8.11. Then we can choose the pairs $(a_i, b_i)$ so that $a_1 = 2$ and $a_2 = \cdots = a_n = 1$ , $b_1 = r-2$ and $b_2 = \cdots = b_n = r-1$ . Since $r - 1 \geq 2$ , then $A = B = 1$ works. If $m_1$ increases, we increase $a_1$ until it reaches $r-1$ , then we increase $a_2$ , and so on. For all of them we can use $A = B = 1$ . Once we reach $a_1 = \cdots = a_{n-1} = r-1$ , that means $b_1 = \cdots = b_{n-1} = 1$ , $m_1$ might still increase, and then we need to increase $a_n$ , that is, decrease $b_n$ , until it drops to $2$ – in this case $m_2=n+1$ – and $A = B = 1$ still works.
We then choose the slits $s_o$ and $s_{n+1}$ to be of angle $2\pi $ away from the beginning saddle connection because $A=B=1$ , and hence, they do not coincide with any saddle connection $s_1,\dots ,s_n$ . Let $P_{n+1}$ and $Q_{n+1}$ be the extremal points of $s_{n+1}$ and $s_o$ , respectively. Slit both, and denote the resulting sides as $s_o^{\pm }$ and $s_{n+1}^{\pm }$ according to our convention. If any saddle connection $s_i$ is oriented from $P_o$ to $Q_o$ , then $s_o$ is oriented from $P_o$ to $Q_{n+1}$ , and similarly, $s_{n+1}$ is oriented from $P_{n+1}$ to $Q_o$ . Identify $s_o^+$ with $s_{n+1}^-$ , and identify $s_o^-$ with $s_{n+1}^+$ . Notice that the points $P_o$ and $P_{n+1}$ as well as $Q_o$ and $Q_{n+1}$ are now identified. The resulting space is a genus-one surface equipped with a meromorphic differential. By construction, this structure lies in $\mathcal H_1(m_1,m_2;\,-r^n)$ and has trivial period character. See Figure 42.
It remains to show that such a structure has rotation number r as desired. First, we can find a closed loop representing the desired handle generator $\alpha $ , with index $m_1$ in the following way – recall that $m_1$ is divisible by r by assumption. For every $i=1,\dots ,n$ , let $M_i$ be the midpoint of $c_i$ . Then consider a closed loop around $P_i$ based at $M_i$ that turns counterclockwise. For every i, we may take the corresponding loop so that it does not contain $Q_i$ in its interior. For $i=1,n$ , we may also assume that it does not intersect $s_o$ and $s_{n+1}$ , respectively. After the cut and paste process just described, these n loops define a smooth closed path of index $m_1$ as desired. We then find the handle generator $\beta $ . On $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1, \omega _1)$ , consider a circle of radius $\varepsilon $ centered at $P_1$ , and denote by $\delta _1$ the subarc representing the angle $2\pi \,A$ between $s_o$ and the beginning saddle connection $c_1^+$ . In the same fashion, on $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1,\,\omega _n)$ , consider a circle of radius $|\,c\,|-\varepsilon $ around $Q_n$ , and then denote by $\delta _2$ the subarc representing the angle $2\pi \,B$ between the beginning saddle connection $c_n^-$ and $s_{n+1}$ . On $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1,\omega )$ , the path $\delta _1\,\cup \,\delta _2$ is not closed, but it closes up to a simple loop $\beta $ once $s_o$ and $s_{n+1}$ are identified as described above. By construction, $\beta $ has index zero because $A=B=1$ , and along with $\alpha $ it provides the desired system of handle generators. As a consequence, the resulting structure has rotation number equal to $\gcd \big (\,\text {Ind}(\alpha ),\text {Ind}(\beta ),\,m_1,m_2,r\,\big )=\gcd \big (0,m_1,m_2,r\big )=r$ as desired.
Remark 8.13. More generally, we could pairs $(A,B)$ other than $(1,1)$ such that $A\equiv B\, (\text {mod}\ r)$ . In that case, the curve $\beta $ have index equal to $B-A$ . Since this latter is divisible by r we eventually get the same result.
Case 2: rotation number $1$
We now discuss the realization of genus-one differentials in the given stratum with rotation number $1$ . This case follows after the same construction with only exception being to take $A=1$ and $B=2$ . This works as soon as $b_n>2$ . In the case $b_n=2$ , then we may take $A=2$ and $B=1$ . In both cases, $\beta $ has $|\,\text {Ind}(\,\beta \,)\,|=1$ , and hence, the resulting structure necessarily has rotation number one.
8.4.1.2 Al least one pole has order bigger than r – premise
From now on, until the end of Section §8.4.1, in the forthcoming paragraphs we shall always assume $p>nr$ which means at least one pole has order bigger than r, say $p_1$ , without loss of generality. We aim to extend Lemma 8.10 as follows:
Lemma 8.14. Let $\mathcal H_1(m_1,m_2;\,-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ be a stratum of genus-one differentials. Let $r>1$ , then the trivial representation can be realized in the connected component with rotation number r. Moreover, the trivial representation can be also realized in the connected component with rotation number $1$ with the only exception being the strata $\mathcal H_1(2,2;\,-4)$ and $\mathcal H_1(3,3;\,-3,-3)$ .
In this case, the gist of the idea is to use the result obtain in Section §8.4.1 as the base case for an inductive foundation. This approach, however, has two issues: The first is that $r\ge 3$ if $p=nr$ , that is, the case $r=2$ is still uncovered;, the second is that an inductive arguments works if and only if at least one zero, say $m_1$ , has order less that $p-n-r$ . Moreover, in both cases $n\ge 2$ , and hence, we need an ad-hoc argument for $n=1$ . This led us to split the proof in different subcases as follows:
-
1. $n=1$ . In this case $r\ge 1$ ; see paragraph §8.4.1.3.
-
2. $r\ge 3$ and at least one zero has order less that $p-n-r$ . In this case, we shall use an inductive argument; see paragraph §8.4.1.4.
-
3. $r=2$ and at least one zero has order less that $p-n-r$ . In this case, we provide an ad-hoc construction; see paragraph §8.4.1.5.
Before mentioning the remaining cases, let us now assume that both zeros have order at least $p-n-r$ . In this case, we may observe that $2p - 2r - 2n \leq m_1 + m_2 = p$ ; that means
Remark 8.15. Equation (107) may hold even when one zero has order less that $p-n-r$ ; for example, the stratum with signature $\mu =(3,6;\,-3,-6)$ . It also holds for every stratum with a single pole.
Therefore, in the case both zeros have order at least $p-n-r$ , there are several isolated cases to consider which we define as special, and we shall treat them separately. The remaining cases are as follows:
-
4. $r\ge 3$ and both zeros have order at least $p-n-r$ ; see paragraph §8.4.1.6.
-
5. $r=2$ and both zeros have order at least $p-n-r$ ; see paragraph §8.4.1.7.
In both cases above, $n\ge 2$ . The forthcoming paragraphs are all devoted to the proof of Lemma 8.14, case by case according to the list above.
8.4.1.3 Proof of Lemma 8.14–case 1
In the present paragraph, we assume $n=1$ , that is, we consider strata with signature $\mu =(m_1,m_2;\,-p)$ with $m_1+m_2=p$ . Notice that $p>nr$ is automatically fulfilled. We aim to show the following lemmas that, combined together, cover all possible strata with two zeros and one pole. We begin with:
Lemma 8.16. Let $\mathcal H_1(m_1,m_2;\,-p)$ be a stratum of genus-one differentials. Let r be a divisor of $\gcd (m_1,m_2)$ such that $m_1,m_2\ge p-r-1$ . Then $m_1=m_2=r$ , and the trivial representation can be realized in the connected component of the same stratum with rotation number r if and only if $r\ge 2$ .
Proof. In the first place, we show that $r\ge 2$ is a sharp condition. By assumption, $m_i\ge p-r-1$ that means
being $m_1+m_2=p$ for both $i=1,2$ . As a consequence, $r+1\ge \max \{\,m_1,\,m_2\,\}$ . Since r divides $\gcd (m_1,m_2)$ , it follows that $m_1=r\,k_1$ and, similarly, $m_2=r\,k_2$ , and hence,
Now, it is an easy matter to see that
-
1. If $r\ge 2$ then $\max \{\,k_1,\,k_2\}=1$ , and hence, $m_1=m_2=r$ and $p=2r$ .
-
2. If $r=1$ , then $\max \{\,k_1,\,k_2\}\le 2$ . In this case, we have the following possibilities:
-
2.1 $m_1=m_2=1$ and $p=2$ ,
-
2.2 $m_1=1$ , $m_2=2$ and $p=3$ , and
-
2.3 $m_1=m_2=2$ and $p=4$ .
Among these three cases, $(1,1;-2)$ is the only signature having the desired form. The trivial representation cannot be realized in $\mathcal H_1(1,1;-2)$ because the Riemann–Hurwitz condition does not hold, and hence, $r\ge 2$ is a sharp condition as stated. The other two cases do not have the desired form and so are ruled out from our discussion.
-
The remaining part of the lemma can be proved exactly as Lemma 8.18. In fact, by choosing $e_P$ and $e_Q$ such that their turning angles are $2\pi $ their difference is zero, and hence, the same construction yields the desired structure in $\mathcal H_1(r,r;-2r)$ for all $r\ge 2$ .
Some comments about the other signatures that appeared in the proof of Lemma 8.16 are in order. In the first place, we remark that the trivial representation cannot be realized in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(1,2;-3)$ because the Riemann–Hurwitz condition does not hold. The stratum $\mathcal H_1(2,2;-4)$ is a more interesting case to discuss. Lemma 8.16 states that the trivial representation can be realized in the connected component with rotation number $r=2$ and leaves open the realization of the trivial representation in the other connected component, that is, the one with rotation number one.
Remark 8.17. Notice that $(2,2;-4)$ is the only signature such that $\gcd (m_1,m_2,p)$ has nontrivial divisors $r>1$ , and for all of them, $m_i>p-r-1$ holds.
It turns out that the trivial representation cannot be realized in the connected component of $\mathcal H_1(2,2;-4)$ with rotation number one, and this is handled by Lemma 8.27 in §8.4.1.8. It remains to assume that at least one zero has order less than $p-r-1$ .
Lemma 8.18. Let $\mathcal H_1(m_1,m_2;\,-p)$ be a stratum of genus-one differentials. Suppose that r is a divisor of $\gcd (m_1,m_2)$ such that $m_i < p-r-1$ for at least one zero. Then the trivial representation can be realized in the connected component of the same stratum with rotation number r.
Proof. Observe that $p>r$ because r divides $\gcd (m_1,m_2)$ . We first realize the trivial representation as the period character of some genus-zero differential in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_0(m_1-1,m_2-1;\,-p)$ . Let $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ be the complex plane seen as a translation surface. Pick two distinct points, say P and Q, and let s denote the edge joining them. Let $r_P$ be a half-ray leaving from P, and let $r_Q$ be a half-ray leaving from Q such that $r_P\,\cap \,r_Q=\phi $ ; for example, pick $r_P$ and $r_Q$ so that $r_P\,\cup \,s\,\cup \,r_Q$ are aligned. Bubble $m_1-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along the ray $r_P$ and then bubble $m_2-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along the ray $r_Q$ . Since $m_1+m_2-2=p$ , the resulting space is now a genus-zero meromorphic differential in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_0(m_1-1,m_2-1;\,-p)$ as desired. Orient s from P to Q, and denote by $s^-$ and $s^+$ the left and right side of s, respectively, according to our convention. Before bubbling, let us observe the following. Suppose $m_1<p-r-1$ . Then a simple manipulation shows that
where $p=m_1+m_2$ .
In order to bubble a handle with trivial periods as described in §8.1.1 above, choose a segment $e_P$ from P so that its angle with respect to $s^-$ is $2\pi $ and choose a segment $e_Q$ from Q so that its angle with respect to $s^+$ is $2\pi (r+1)$ . Notice that, as a consequence of Equation (110), we have that $2\pi (r+1)< 2\pi m_2$ , and hence, there is enough room for finding such a segment for every divisor r of $\gcd (m_1,m_2)$ such that at least one zero satisfies $m_i<p-r-1$ .
Slit the edges $e_P$ and $e_Q$ , and denote the resulting sides $e_P^{\pm }$ and $e_Q^{\pm }$ , according to our convention. Then glue $e_P^+$ with $e_Q^-$ and similarly glue $e_P^-$ with $e_Q^+$ . The resulting space is now a genus-one differential with trivial periods in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(m_1,m_2;\,-p)$ with rotation number r as desired. In fact, consider an arc joining the midpoint of $e_P$ with the midpoint of s that winds clockwise around P. Next, prolong this arc with another one joining the midpoint of s with the midpoint of $e_Q$ that winds counterclockwise around Q. After the cut and paste described above, this arc closes up to a simple close curve $\alpha $ with index r by construction. Then pick $\beta $ as any simple loop around $e_P$ (or $e_Q$ ). This procedure is doable as long as $r+1<\max (m_1,m_2)$ , that is, if and only if there is at least one zero whose order is less that $p-r-1$ .
8.4.1.4 Proof of Lemma 8.14–case 2
Assume $m_1<p-n-r$ . Suppose we want to realize the trivial representation in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(m_1,m_2;\,-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ . Of course, r divides $p_i$ , hence we can write this latter as $p_i=r+h_i\,r$ , for some $h_i\ge 0$ for every $i=1,\dots ,n$ . Since $p>nr$ , it necessarily follows that $h_i\ge 1$ for some i. Suppose $h_1=1$ and $h_i=0$ for $i=2,\dots ,n$ . Then we can realize the trivial representation as the period character of some translation surface in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(m_1,m_2-r;\,-r^n)$ as done in the previous paragraph §8.4.1.1. Notice that this is possible because Hurwitz type inequality (103) still holds due to the assumption that $m_1 <(p - r)-n$ .
Remark 8.19. Notice that, since $m_1\le p-n-r-1$ and $m_1+m_2=nr+r> nr$ , because we are assuming $h_1=1$ , it directly follows that
Therefore, $m_2-r\ge 1$ .
Next, we bubble r planes along a ray from the zero of order $m_2-r$ to any pole of order r as described in Definition 3.12. Notice from the previous construction that this is always possible. If a closed curve crosses the ray before bubbling, then its index alters by r after, hence the rotation number remains unchanged. The resulting structure lies by design in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(m_1,m_2;\,-p_1,-r^{n-1})$ as desired. The most general case follows by applying a double induction. More precisely, we first induct on $h_1$ by keeping $h_2=\cdots =h_n=0$ , and then we induct on the number of poles with order greater than r that is on the number of poles whose orders $p_i$ satisfy $h_i\ge 1$ .
Remark 8.20. Notice that, if $p_i=2$ for all $i=1,\dots ,n$ , then the trivial representation cannot be realized in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(m_1,m_2;\,-2^n)$ because $m_1$ or $m_2$ is at least $n> p - n - 1=n-1$ , and we would have a contradiction with Hurwitz type inequality (103).
8.4.1.5 Proof of Lemma 8.14–case 3
Let $\mu =(2m_1,2m_2;-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ be a signature of even type such that $p>2n$ , compare with Remark 8.20. We first observe that, if $2m_1=2$ then $2m_2=p-2$ and the Hurwitz type inequality (103) readily implies that
Since this latter case has already been handled in paragraph §8.4.1.3 we assume $m_1,m_2\ge 2$ . The most general case now follows after a refinement of the construction developed in paragraph §8.4.1.1. In fact, as a preliminary remark we notice that we get the access
to the desired stratum from a lower stratum of genus-zero differentials having the same polar part. Let us assume first that $p_i\ge 2$ , which means $2p_i\ge 4$ for all $i=1,\dots ,n$ . In this situation, the construction used in §8.4.1.1 works mutatis mutandis. For simplicity, let us recall how to find the pairs $(a_i,b_i)$ in this setting. In the first place, we observe that $n+1\le 2m_1,\,2m_2$ , for otherwise we would get a contradiction with the Hurwitz type inequality (103). By adopting the same notation, we may take $a_1 = 2$ and $a_2 = \cdots = a_n = 1$ , that means $b_1 = 2p_1-2$ and $b_2 = \cdots = b_n = 2p_i-1$ . Since $2p_i - 1 \geq 3>2$ , if $m_1$ increases, we increase $a_1$ until it reaches $2p_1-1$ , then we increase $a_2$ , and so on. In this case, once we reach $a_1 = 2p_1-1,\dots ,a_{n-1}=2p_{n-1}-1$ , that means $b_1 = \cdots = b_{n-1} = 1$ , the value of $m_1$ might still increase, and then we need to increase $a_n$ , that is, decrease $b_n$ , until it drops to $2$ , that is, $m_2=n+1$ . Recall that $r=\gcd (2m_1,2m_2;-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ . We thus take $A,\,B$ such that $A-B\equiv 2\,(\text {mod}\ r)$ in order to realize a structure in $\mathcal H_1(\mu )$ with rotation number two, whereas we may take $A=B\pm 1$ in order to realize a structure with rotation number one.
Next, suppose $p_i=1$ , which means $2p_i=2$ , for some $i=1,\dots , l\,<\,n$ ; recall that $l=n$ cannot happen because $p>2n$ . Since $2m_i\ge n+1$ , it follows that $2m_i-l>0$ for $i=1,2$ and the trivial representation can be realized in the stratum with signature $\mu '=(2m_1-l,2m_2-l;-2p_{l+1},\dots ,-2p_n)$ because the Hurwitz type inequality (103) holds for both zeros. Let $(X_1,\omega _1)$ be the translation surface with poles and trivial absolute periods in $\mathcal H_1(\,\mu '\,)$ . If l is even, then $\mu '$ is also a signature of even type and the corresponding stratum has at least two connected components. On the other hand, if l is odd, the corresponding stratum may very well be connected. In both situations, we take $A=B$ or $A=B\pm 1$ . In the latter case, we always get a structure with rotation number one. Recall that, by construction, there is a marked saddle connection s, the beginning saddle connection.
We next realize a translation surface $(X_2,\omega _2)$ with trivial absolute periods in the stratum $\mathcal H_o(l-1,\,l-1; -2^l)$ . In particular, we can realize $(X_2,\omega _2)$ so that any saddle connection, say $s'$ , joining the zeros has relative period equal to that of s, that is,
We finally glue these structures along the beginning saddle connection to get a translation surface with poles, say $(Y,\xi )\in \mathcal H_1(\,\mu \,)$ , with trivial absolute periods. Let $\{\alpha ,\,\beta \}$ be the pair of handle generators of $(X_1,\omega _1)$ obtained as in §8.4.1.1. After gluing, the indices of $\alpha ,\,\beta $ are altered by $\pm l$ . As a consequence, the rotation number of $(Y,\xi )$ may change according to the parity of l as follows:
-
1. If l is even, the gluing does not change the parities of $\text {Ind}(\alpha )$ and $\text {Ind}(\beta )$ . Hence, the rotation number $(Y,\xi )$ has the same parity of the rotation number of $(X_1,\omega _1)$ .
-
2. If l is odd, the gluing changes the parities of $\text {Ind}(\alpha )$ and $\text {Ind}(\beta )$ . Hence, the rotation number $(Y,\xi )$ has the opposite parity of the rotation number of $(X_1,\omega _1)$ .
Since the rotation number of $(X_1,\omega _1)$ is one or even, we get the desired result, and case $3$ is now completed.
8.4.1.6 Proof of Lemma 8.14–case 4
In this paragraph, we still assume that $p>nr$ and that both zeros have order at least $p-n-r$ . Let us observe the following:
Remark 8.21. If both zeros have order at least $p-n-r$ , then $r\ge 5$ in Equation (107) readily implies that $n=1$ , and therefore, $p\ge 6$ . In other words, under the conditions above, $r\ge 5$ holds only for strata with a single pole.
Since strata with a single pole have already been handled in §8.4.1.3, we may assume $n\ge 2$ and, as a consequence, $r\le 4$ . On the other hand, if both zeros have order at least $p-n-r$ , then Equation (107) holds if $n\le 3$ . Therefore, $n\in \{2,3\}$ , and we have only a few isolated cases to discuss. In order to avoid a further proliferation of paragraphs and subparagraphs, we list all these special cases here, and we handle them one by one by using the following lemmas. Under the assumptions of the present paragraph, there are three families of strata to consider according to the following possibilities:
-
i. $3\le r\le 4$ and $n=2$ , and
-
ii. $r=3$ and $n=3$ .
Since the total pole order p is bounded between $(n+1)r\le p\le 2(n+r)$ (see inequality (107)), there are a few isolated cases to consider as follows:
-
1. $n=2$ and $r=3$ . In this case, we consider strata of the form $\mathcal H_1(3k_1, 3k_2;\,-3h_1,-3h_2)$ for some positive integers $k_1,k_2,h_1,h_2$ . A direct check shows that $9\le p\le 10$ . Since $3h_1+3h_2=10$ has no integral solutions, we only need to consider $p=9$ . This forces $k_1=h_1=1$ and $k_2=h_2=2$ – up to relabelling. Notice that $h_1$ and $h_2$ cannot be zero because we consider strata with two poles. Therefore, we only need to consider the stratum $\mathcal H_1(3,6;\,-3,-6)$ . Since
(115) $$ \begin{align} m_1=3<4=9-2-3=p-n-r, \end{align} $$the argument given in paragraph §8.4.1.4 applies, and hence, we are done in this case. -
2. $n=2$ and $r=4$ . This case is quite similar. We consider strata of the form $\mathcal H_1(4k_1, 4k_2;\,-4h_1,-4h_2)$ for some positive integers $k_1,k_2,h_1,h_2$ . A direct check shows that $p=12$ and the Diophantine equation $4h_1+4h_2=12$ has $(h_1,\,h_2)=(h_2,\,h_1)=(1,2)$ as the only possible solutions with positive integers. Assume, without loss of generality that $(h_1,\,h_2)=(1,2)$ – the other pair leads to the same stratum, namely $\mathcal H_1(4,8;\,-4,-8)$ . Since
(116) $$ \begin{align} m_1=4<6=12-2-4=p-n-r, \end{align} $$we fall once again in the case considered in paragraph §8.4.1.4, and hence, in this case, we are done. -
3. $n=3$ and $r=3$ . We consider strata of the form $\mathcal H_1(3k_1,3k_2;\,-3h_1,-3h_2,-3h_3)$ for some positive integers $k_1,k_2,h_1,h_2,h_3$ . A direct check shows that $p=12$ , and hence, $(1,1,2)$ is the only triple of positive integers that satisfies $3(h_1+h_2+h_3)=12$ , up to permutation. There are two strata to consider in this case according to the following partitions of $4$ as the sum of two positive integers:
-
i. $k_1=k_2=2$ that leads to $\mathcal H_1(6,6;\,-3,-3,-6)$ , and
-
ii. $k_1=1$ and $k_2=3$ that leads to $\mathcal H_1(3,9;\,-3,-3,-6)$ .
In the case ii above, it is easy to check that $m_2=9>8=p-n-1$ , and hence, the trivial representation cannot be realized in this stratum because the Hurwitz type inequality (103) does not hold. The case i above, however, needs a special treatment. Notice that we cannot apply the induction, as in §8.4.1.4, to the stratum $\mathcal H_1(3,6;\,-3,-3,-3)$ because the trivial representation cannot be realized in the latter; in fact, the Hurwitz type inequality (103) does not hold.
-
Lemma 8.22. The trivial representation can be realized in the connected component of $\mathcal H_1(6,6;\,-3,-3,-6)$ with rotation number $r=3$ .
Sketch of the proof
The proof is very similar to the argument given in §8.4.1.4, and hence, we provide it briefly. We first realize the trivial representation in $\mathcal H_0(5,5;\,-3,-3,-6)$ by using the saddle connection configuration description in [Reference Eskin, Masur and ZorichEMZ03] with $(a_1, b_1)=(2,1)$ , $(a_2,b_2)=(1,2)$ and $(a_3,b_3)=(3,3)$ . Notice that $a_1+a_2+a_3 =m_1+1=6$ and $b_1 + b_2 + b_3 = m_2+1=6$ .
For every $i=1,\dots ,n$ , consider a copy of $({\mathbb C},\, z^{r-2}dz)$ and fix any vector $c\in \mathbb C^*$ . Let $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1,\omega _i)$ be the translation surface with poles obtained by breaking the zero of $({\mathbb C},\, z^{r-2}dz)$ into two zeros, say $P_i$ and $Q_i$ , of orders $a_i-1$ and $b_i-1$ , respectively, so that the resulting saddle connection joining them, say $c_i$ , is parallel to c with the same length, that is, $|c|=|c_i|$ .
Next, we slit every $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1,\omega _i)$ along $c_i$ and denote by $c_i^{\pm }$ the resulting edges according to our convention. Identify $c_i^-$ with $c_{i+1}^+$ for every $i=1,2$ , and glue $c_3^-$ with $c_1^+$ . The resulting space is now a pair $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1, \omega )$ , where $\omega $ is a meromorphic differential with two zeros, say $P_o$ and $Q_o$ , of orders $5$ , two poles of order $3$ and one pole of order $6$ . Let s be the saddle connection resulting from the identification of $c_1^+$ with $c_n^-$ . Orient s from $P_o$ to $Q_o$ .
In $(\mathbb {C}\mathrm {\mathbf {P}}^1,\,\omega )$ , there is a segment, say $e_1$ , leaving from $P_o$ such that s and $e_1$ are twins (see Definition 8.2), and the angle on the left is $2\pi $ . Similarly, there is only segment, say $e_2$ , leaving from $Q_o$ such that s and $e_2$ are twins and the angle on the right is $2\pi $ . Slit both $e_1$ and $e_2$ , and denote the resulting sides $e_1^{\pm }$ and $e_2^{\pm }$ according to our convention. Glue $e_1^+$ with $e_2^-$ , and glue $e_1^-$ with $e_2^+$ . The resulting space is a genus-one surface equipped with a translation structure with trivial periods. By construction, it lies in the connected component of $\mathcal H_1(6,6;\,-3,-3,-6)$ with rotation number $r=3$ ; see Figure 43.
We finally notice that for $n\ge 4$ the inequality (107) holds if and only if $r\le 2$ . Therefore, there are no other cases to consider for $r\ge 3$ .
8.4.1.7 Proof of Lemma 8.14–case 5
We continue to assume that $p>nr$ and that both zeros have order at least $p-n-r$ . It remains to consider the cases $r=1,2$ . For both of them, we no longer have any upper bound on the number of poles because Equation (107) holds for every $n\ge 1$ .
If $r = 1$ , the assumption implies that $m_1, m_2\geq (p-1)-n$ , but the Hurwitz type inequality (103) then implies that $m_1 = m_2 = p- n -1$ . Hence, $p = m_1 + m_2 = 2p - 2n - 2$ , so $p = 2n+2$ and $m_1 = m_2 = n+1$ . Since each $p_i \geq 2$ , the only cases are
-
1. $\mathcal H_1(n+1, n+1; -2^{n-1}, -4)$ . This stratum is connected whenever n is even whereas it has exactly two connected components whenever n is odd. Therefore, this latter case is worth of interest for us. See Lemmas 8.25 and 8.27.
-
2. $\mathcal H_1(n+1, n+1; -2^{n-2}, -3, -3)$ . It is an easy matter to check that such a stratum is connected for every $n\ge 3$ because $\gcd (2,3,n+1)=1$ . On the other hand, for $n=2$ we get $\mathcal H_1(3,3;\,-3,-3)$ which has two connected components. See Lemma 8.28 for this special case which turns out to be an exceptional stratum.
If $r=2$ , the assumption implies that $m_1, m_2 \geq (p - 2) - n$ . Hence, $p = m_1 + m_2 \geq 2p - 2n - 4$ and $p \leq 2n + 4$ . The Hurwitz inequality is that $m_1, m_2 \leq p - n - 1$ . Since each $p_i$ is even, the only cases are
-
3. $\mathcal H_1(n+1, n+1; -2^{n-1},\, -4)$ . If n is even the stratum is connected, and it has two connected components if n is odd. See Lemmas 8.25 and 8.27.
-
4. $\mathcal H_1(n+2, n+2; -2^{n-1}, -6)$ . If n is odd the stratum is connected, and hence, the interesting cases arise for n even. See Lemma 8.23. Finally,
-
5. the last family of strata is given by $\mathcal H_1(n+2, n+2; -2^{n-2}, -4, -4)$ . For n odd the stratum is connected, and it has two connected components if n is even. See Lemma 8.24.
We have the following lemmas.
Lemma 8.23. Let $n=2k$ be an even positive integer. For every $k\ge 1$ , the trivial representation can be realized in both connected components of the stratum $\mathcal H_1(2k+2,2k+2;\,-2^{2k-1}, -6)$ .
Proof. In this case, we only need to show that the trivial representation can be realized in the connected component of $\mathcal H_1(2k+2,2k+2;\,-2^{2k-1}, -6)$ with rotation number $2$ . In fact, since
for every $n\ge 0$ , it follows that $m_1=m_2< p-n-1$ . We can proceed as in §8.4.1.4, and hence, we are already done if $r=1$ . In order to realize the trivial representation as the period character of some exact differential with rotation number $2$ , we proceed as follows. We use the saddle connection configuration description as in [Reference Eskin, Masur and ZorichEMZ03]. We need to find pairs $(a_i,b_i)$ such that $a_1 + b_1 = 6$ and $a_i + b_i = 2$ for all $2\leq i\leq n$ , that satisfy $a_1 + \cdots + a_n = b_1 + \cdots + b_n = n+1$ . We choose these pairs to be $(3,3),\, (1,1),\, \dots ,\, (1,1)$ . More precisely, consider the differential $z^4\,dz$ on ${\mathbb C}$ , break the sole zero into two zeros of the same order and denote by $c_1$ the resulting saddle connection. Denote the resulting translation surface as $({\mathbb C},\,\omega )$ . Next, we consider $n-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , and we consider on each of them a marked segment $c_i$ , for $2\leq i\leq n$ so that $c_1,\dots ,c_n$ are all parallel with the same length. The desired handle with trivial periods can be realized in $({\mathbb C},\omega )$ . Let P, and Q denote the zeros of order two of $({\mathbb C},\,\omega )$ , and let $c_1$ be the saddle connection joining them. According to our Lemma 8.3, there are two edges $e_1$ and $e_2$ leaving from P such that $s,\,e_1,\,e_2$ are pairwise twins. Similarly, there are two edges $e_3,\,e_4$ leaving from Q such that $c_1,\,e_3,\,e_4$ are pairwise twins. Assume without loss of generality that $c_1,e_1,e_2$ and $s,e_3,e_4$ are ordered counterclockwise around P and Q, respectively. Slit the edges $e_1$ and $e_4$ , and denote the resulting sides $e_1^{\pm }$ and $e_4^{\pm }$ according to our convention. Then glue the edges $e_1^+$ with $e_4^-$ , and similarly glue $e_1^-$ with $e_4^+$ . The resulting space is a genus-one differential, say $(Y,\xi )\in \mathcal H_1(3,3;\,-6)$ with trivial periods and rotation number $1$ ; see Figure 44.
In fact, on $({\mathbb C},\,\omega )$ , we consider an arc joining the midpoint of $e_1$ with the midpoint of $c_1$ that winds clockwise around P. Next, we prolong the arc above with another arc leaving from the midpoint of $c_1$ with the midpoint of $e_4$ that winds counterclockwise around Q. Notice that, since $c_1,e_3,e_4$ are ordered counterclockwise, this second arc winds twice around Q. In the resulting space $(Y,\xi )$ , the union of these arc just described close up to a simple close curve, say $\alpha $ of index one; see Figure 44. We define $\beta $ as any simple close loop around $e_1$ . Notice that its index is equal to $3$ .
In the resulting space $(Y,\xi )$ , there is by construction a saddle connection, say $c_1$ with a small abuse of notation, joining the two zeros of order $3$ which is still parallel to $c_2,\dots ,c_n$ . We glue the remaining $n-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ by slitting the saddle connections $c_i$ as already explained in Paragraph §8.4.1.1. In this process, the indices of $\alpha $ and $\beta $ are both altered by $\pm (n-1)$ . Since n is even it follows that $n-1$ is odd. In particular, both $\mathrm {Ind}(\alpha )\pm (n-1)$ and $\mathrm {Ind}(\beta )\pm (n-1)$ are even. Therefore, the resulting translation surface lies in $\mathcal H_1(n+2,n+2;\,-2^{n-1},-6)$ , and it has rotation number $2$ as desired.
Notice that, if we had chosen $e_3$ in place of $e_4$ we would have got a translation surface in the same stratum with rotation number one. Finally,
Lemma 8.24. Let $n=2k$ be an even positive integer. For every $k\ge 1$ , the trivial representation can be realized in both connected components of the stratum $\mathcal H_1(2k+2,2k+2;\,-2^{2k-2}, -4,-4)$ .
Proof. This proof is quite similar to that of Lemma 8.23. In fact, in this case we only need to show that the trivial representation can be realized in the connected component of $\mathcal H_1(2k+2,2k+2;\,-2^{2k-2}, -4,-4)$ with rotation number $2$ . Since
for every $n\ge 0$ , it follows that $m_1=m_2< p-n-1$ we can proceed as in §8.4.1.4, and hence, we are already done if $r=1$ . In order to realize the trivial representation as the period character of some exact differential with rotation number $2$ , we proceed as follows. We use the saddle connection configuration description as in [Reference Eskin, Masur and ZorichEMZ03]. We need to find pairs $(a_i,b_i)$ such that $a_1 + b_1 = a_2 + b_2 = 4$ and $a_i + b_i = 2$ for all $3\leq i\leq n$ , and $a_1 + \cdots + a_n = b_1 + \cdots + b_n = n+2$ . We choose these pairs to be $(2,2),\, (2,2),\, (1,1),\, \dots ,\, (1,1)$ . More precisely, in this case consider two copies of $({\mathbb C},\,z^2dz)$ and break on each of them the sole zero into two zeros each of order one. In both cases, the sole zero of $z^2dz$ can be broken so that the resulting saddle connections, say $c_1$ and $c_2$ are parallel with the same length. Next, we consider $n-2$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , each of which with a marked segment $c_i$ , for $3\leq i\leq n$ so that $c_1,c_2,c_3,\dots ,c_n$ are all parallel with the same length. The desired handle with trivial periods can be bubbled inside the copy $({\mathbb C},\omega _1)$ . We then proceed as in the proof of Lemma 8.23 to realize the desired structure in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(2k+2,2k+2;\,-2^{2k-2}, -4,-4)$ with rotation number $2$ and trivial periods. More precisely, we first realize an intermediate structure $(Y,\xi )\in \mathcal H_1(2,2;-4)$ with rotation number $2$ , and then we glue the remaining translation surfaces by slitting the saddle connection as done in paragraph §8.4.1.1.
Lemma 8.25. Let $n=2k+1$ be an odd positive integer. For every $k\ge 1$ , the trivial representation can be realized in both connected components of the stratum $\mathcal H_1(2k+2,2k+2;\,-2^{2k}, -4)$ .
Proof. This is the most delicate case to consider. Once again, we wish to realize the trivial representation by using the saddle connection configuration description as in [Reference Eskin, Masur and ZorichEMZ03]. We need to find n pairs $(a_i,b_i)$ such that $a_1 + b_1 = 4$ and $a_i + b_i = 2$ for all $2\leq i\leq n$ , that satisfy $a_1 + \cdots + a_n = b_1 + \cdots + b_n = n+1$ . The only possible case is given by the pairs $(2,2),\,(1,1),\dots ,(1,1)$ . We shall need to distinguish two cases depending on which connected component of $\mathcal H_1(2k+2,2k+2;\,-2^{2k}, -4)$ we aim to realize the trivial representation.
Suppose we aim to realize a translation surface with trivial periods and rotation number two in that stratum. Then we can proceed exactly as in Lemma 8.24 above. The only difference is that there is only one pair $(2,2)$ , but this is irrelevant to the construction because the handle with trivial periods is realized in $({\mathbb C},\omega _1)$ – in the above notation. Therefore, this case is essentially subsumed in the proof of Lemma 8.24.
It remains to realize a translation surface with trivial periods in $\mathcal H_1(2k+2,2k+2;\,-2^{2k}, -4)$ with rotation number one. Let $({\mathbb C},\omega )$ be a translation surface with trivial periods and two zeros, say P and Q, each of order one and a single pole of order $4$ . Denote by $c_1$ the saddle connection joining them. Lemma 8.3 states that there is a segment $e_P$ at P such that $e_P$ and $c_1$ are twins. For the same reason, there is a segment $e_Q$ at Q such that $e_Q$ and $c_1$ are twins.
Pick $n-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , and denote them by $({\mathbb C},\omega _i)$ for $2\leq i\leq n$ . On each such copy, we thus consider an edge, say $c_i$ , such that $c_i,\,c_j$ are parallel and with the same length. On $({\mathbb C},\,\omega )$ slit $c_1,\, e_P,$ and $e_Q$ , and denote by $c_1^{\pm }$ , $e_P^{\pm }$ and $e_Q^{\pm }$ the resulting edges according to our convention. Next, for every $2\leq i\leq n$ , slit $({\mathbb C},\,\omega _i)$ along $c_i$ , and denote the resulting sides as $c_i^{\pm }$ . We glue the sides as follows: For $1\leq i \leq n-2$ identify $c_i^+$ with $c_{i+1}^-$ and identify $c_{n-1}^+$ with $c_1^-$ . Then identify the edge $e_P^+$ with $e_Q^-$ , next identify $e_P^-$ with $c_n^+$ and finally identify $e_Q^+$ with $c_n^-$ . The resulting space is a translation surface in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(2k+2,2k+2;\,-2^{2k}, -4)$ as desired. It remains to show it has rotation number $1$ . We can define $\alpha $ as the simple closed curve shown in Figure 45; since n is odd, it follows that $\mathrm {Ind}(\alpha )=\pm (n-2)$ is also odd, and hence, the rotation number is necessarily one.
8.4.1.8 Exceptional strata
We finally consider the exceptional cases. The following one corresponds to the case $k=0$ of Lemma 8.25 above. We first introduce the following definition.
Definition 8.26. Let $\mathcal H_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k;\,-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ be a stratum of genus-one differentials. We define the primitive component of this stratum as the unique connected component with rotation number (equivalently torsion number) one.
Notice that, if a stratum is connected then it coincides with its primitive component. In Lemma 8.27, Lemma 8.28 and Lemma 8.36, we shall consider strata with exactly two connected components; one of which is primitive and the other is nonprimitive.
Lemma 8.27. The trivial representation can only be realized in the connected component of $\mathcal H_1(2,2;\,-4)$ with rotation number $2$ , that is, the nonprimitive component.
Proof. Suppose that $(X,\omega )$ is a translation surface in $\mathcal H_1(2,2;\,-4)$ with trivial periods. Let $Z_1$ , $Z_2$ and P be the two zeros and the unique pole of $\omega $ , respectively. The trivial period condition is equivalent to the existence of a triple cover of X to $\mathbb {C}\mathbf {P}^1$ totally ramified at $Z_1$ , $Z_2$ and P, where $\omega $ arises from differentiating the rational function associated to the cover. This implies the linear equivalence relation $3Z_1\sim 3Z_2\sim 3P$ . On the other hand, by assumption $2Z_1 + 2Z_2\sim 4P$ . It follows that $Z_1+Z_2 \sim 3Z_1+3Z_2-(2Z_1 + 2Z_2) \sim 2P$ , which implies by definition that $(S,\omega )$ belongs to the nonprimitive component of $\mathcal H_1(2,2;\,-4)$ .
Lemma 8.28. The trivial representation can only be realized in the connected component of $\mathcal H_1(3,3;\,-3,-3)$ with rotation number $3$ , that is, the nonprimitive component.
Proof. Suppose that $(X,\omega )$ is a translation surface in $\mathcal H_1(3,3;\,-3,-3)$ with trivial periods. Let $Z_1$ , $Z_2$ , $P_1$ and $P_2$ be the zeros and poles of $\omega $ , respectively. The trivial period condition is equivalent to the existence of a quadruple cover of X to $\mathbb {C}\mathbf {P}^1$ totally ramified at $Z_1$ , $Z_2$ , and having $2P_1+2P_2$ as the fiber over infinity. This implies the linear equivalence relation $4Z_1\sim 4Z_2\sim 2P_1+2P_2$ . On the other hand, by assumption $3Z_1 + 3Z_2\sim 3P_1+3P_2$ . It follows that $Z_1+Z_2 \sim 4Z_1+4Z_2-(3Z_1 + 3Z_2) \sim P_1 + P_2$ , which implies by definition that $(S,\omega )$ belongs to the nonprimitive component of $\mathcal H_1(3,3;\,-3,-3)$ .
8.4.2 Strata with more than two zeros
We now consider the general case of $\mathcal H_1(m_1, \dots , m_k; -p_1, \dots , -p_n)$ with $k\ge 3$ . We begin with the following observation reported here as:
Lemma 8.29. Let $\kappa =(m_1,\dots ,m_k)$ and $\nu =(p_1,\dots ,p_n)$ be tuples such that $m_1+\cdots +m_k=p_1+\cdots +p_n$ . Suppose there is a pair $m_i,\,m_j$ such that $m_i+m_j<p-n$ . Let $\overline \kappa =(m_1,\dots ,\widehat m_i,\widehat m_j,\dots ,m_i+m_j,\dots ,m_n)$ . Finally, let r be a divisor of $\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k,p_1,\dots ,p_n)$ . If the trivial representation can be realized in the connected component of $\mathcal H_1(\,\overline \kappa ;-\nu )$ with rotation number r, then it can also be realized in the connected component of $\mathcal H_1(\kappa ;-\nu )$ with rotation number r.
Explicitly, if there exist a pair $m_i,\, m_j$ such that $m_i + m_j < p - n$ , then we can do induction by splitting a zero of order $m_i + m_j$ as the Hurwitz type inequality (103) still holds for the merged zero order. It remains to determine whether the trivial representation can be realized in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(\,\overline \kappa ;-\nu )$ above. In the case there is another pair of zeros, say $m_h,\,m_l$ such that $m_h+m_l<p-n$ , then Lemma 8.29 applies once again. This process iterated finitely many times leads to one of the following situations:
-
1. We fall in a stratum with two zeros, and hence, we may apply the results of subsection §8.4.1, or
-
2. We end up with a stratum $\mathcal H_1(m_1, \dots , m_k; -\nu )$ in which $m_i + m_j \geq p - n$ for all pairs $i, j$ .
In paragraph §8.4.1.7, we have shown the existence of two strata with two zeros that are exceptional in the sense the trivial representation cannot be realized in every connected component. These are $\mathcal H_1(2,2;-4)$ and $\mathcal H_1(3,3;-3,-3)$ . We need to make sure that, by iterating the process just described, if we fall in a stratum with two zeros, then this stratum cannot be exceptional. It is easy to check that, by merging zeros, one gets the access to $\mathcal H_1(2,2;-4)$ only from strata $\mathcal H_1(1,1,1,1;\,-4)$ and $\mathcal H_1(1,1,2;\,-4)$ which are connected. Similarly, by merging zeros one gets the access to $\mathcal H_1(3,3;\,-3,-3)$ from $\mathcal H_1(1,2,3;\,-3,-3)$ and $\mathcal H_1(1,1,2,2;\,-3,-3)$ which are also connected. Since we begin with strata $\mathcal H_1(m_1, \dots , m_k; -\nu )$ with more than one connected component, we never fall in those exceptional cases.
Suppose it to be in the second case above. If $m_i + m_j \geq p - n$ for all pairs $i, j$ , then summing over all pairs we obtain that
that is $(k-2)p \leq kn$ . Since
and $k \ge 3$ , it necessarily follows that $r \leq 3$ .
Remark 8.30. Let $l=\gcd (p_1,\dots ,p_n)$ , and notice that $n\,l\leq p$ . It is easy to check that the equality holds if and only if $p_i=l$ for all $i=1,\dots ,n$ . Equation (120) above also holds if we replace r with l, in fact
and, since $(k-2)p\leq kn$ and $k\ge 3$ , we get that $l\leq 3$ . On the other hand,
holds and, as a consequence, $\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k,p_1,\dots ,p_n)$ cannot exceed $l\leq 3$ . Therefore, for a given stratum $\mathcal H_1(\kappa ;-\nu )$ that satisfies the condition $m_i + m_j \geq p - n$ for all pairs $i, j$ , it necessarily follows $\gcd (\kappa , \nu )$ cannot be greater than $3$ .
Assume in the first place $\gcd (p_1,\dots ,p_n)=r=3$ . In this case, the inequalities (119) and (120) above readily implies $k\le 3$ ; on the other hand, k is supposed to be at least $3$ by assumption, and hence, the only possible case is $k=3$ . For $n=3h$ and $h\ge 1$ , the collection of strata $\mathcal H_1(3h,3h,3h;\,-3^{3h})$ is the only one that satisfies all these conditions. In principle, one might need to deal with strata of the form $\mathcal H_1(3h_1,3h_2,3h_3;-3^{h_1+h_2+h_3})$ with $h_1\le h_2\le h_3$ . If we assume $3h_1+3h_2\ge p-n=2(h_1+h_2+h_3)$ , we readily obtain $h_1+h_2\ge 2h_3$ , and hence, $h_1+h_2= 2h_3$ . This implies $h_1=h_2=h_3$ . We have the following:
Lemma 8.31. The trivial representation can be realized in each connected component of the stratum of differentials $\mathcal H_1(3h,3h,3h;\,-3^{3h})$ .
Proof. Let $n=3h\ge 3$ . We can first realize the trivial representation in the stratum $\mathcal H_0(2n-2, n; -3^n)$ . This is possible because the Hurwitz type inequality (103) is satisfied. Then split the first zero into two nearby zeros each of order $n-1$ . By construction, there is a saddle connection, say s, joining the newborn zeros, say $P_1$ and $P_2$ . Moreover, our Lemma 8.3 applies, and hence, there are $n-1$ paths $c_1,\dots ,c_{n-1}$ , all leaving from $P_1$ such that s and $c_i$ are twins. Similarly, there are $n-1$ paths $c_{n+1},\dots , c_{2n-1}$ , all leaving from $P_2$ such that s and $c_{n+i}$ are twins for $i=1,\dots ,n-1$ . We may suppose without loss of generality that both collections of paths $c_1,\dots ,c_{n-1},s$ , all based at $P_1$ , and $s,c_{n+1},\dots ,c_{2n-1}$ , all based at $P_2$ , are in positive cyclic order. For any $i=1,\dots ,n-1$ , slit $c_{i}$ and $c_{n+i}$ and denote $c_i^{\pm }$ and $c_{n+i}^{\pm }$ the resulting edges. Then glue $c_i^+$ with $c_{n+i}^-$ , and glue $c_i^-$ with $c_{n+i}^+$ . The resulting space is a genus-one differential with rotation number $3$ . Notice that the choice of the slit is crucial here because the angle difference divisible by $3$ modulo $2\pi $ . A different choice of paths so that the angle difference is no longer divisible by $3$ modulo $2\pi $ would have produced a genus-one differential with rotation number $1$ .
Since there are no other strata $\mathcal H_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ with $\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k;p_1,\dots ,p_n)=3$ , we next consider the case of strata with $\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k;p_1,\dots ,p_n)=2$ .
We now assume $r=\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k;p_1,\dots ,p_n)=2$ and let $\mathcal H_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k;\, -p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ be a stratum of genus-one differentials. The key observation here is the following reduction process: If there is some pole of order $p_i> 2$ and if there is at most one zero, say $P_j$ , of order $m_j \geq p-n-2$ , then we can do induction from the connected component of the reduce stratum $\mathcal H_1( \dots , m_j-2, \dots; \dots , -p_i+2, \dots )$ with the rotation number $1$ or $2$ , by bubbling $2$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along a ray from $P_j$ to the pole of order $p_i-2$ .
The reduced stratum now satisfies only of the following conditions:
-
1. In the reduced stratum there is at most one zero of order $m_h=m_j-2\ge p-n-4$ . In this case, we can reduce the stratum one more time.
-
2. There are now at least two zeros of orders $m_h,\,m_l\ge p-n-4$ .
Suppose to be in the second case; that is, suppose there are two zeros of orders $m_1, m_2 \geq p-n-2$ . Then
where the second inequality holds because $m_i\ge 2$ for all $i=1,\dots ,k$ . There is only one case we need to consider given by the stratum $\mathcal H_1(n, n, 2; -2, \dots , -2, -4)$ with n even. The following holds:
Lemma 8.32. Let $n=2h$ . The trivial representation can be realized in each connected component of the stratum $\mathcal H_1(2h,\,2h, 2; -2^{2h-1}, -4)$ .
Proof. We begin by realizing the trivial representation as the period character of genus-zero differential in the stratum $\mathcal H_0(n,n;\,-2^{n-1},-4)$ . Notice that this is possible because the Hurwitz type inequality (103) holds and the realization is guaranteed by [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem B]. Let $(Y,\xi )$ such a structure. Let Q be a zero of order n, and let $\varepsilon>0$ such that the open ball $B_{4\varepsilon }(Q)$ does not contain the other zero. Break Q into two zeros of order $n-1$ and $1$ as described in §3.1. Since $n=2h>0$ , both zeros have order at least one. Denote the newborn zeros as $P_1$ and $P_2$ , respectively. Moreover, we can break Q so that the resulting saddle connection, say s, joining $P_1$ and $P_2$ has length $\varepsilon $ . According to our Lemma 8.3, there are $n-1$ edges, say $e_1,\dots ,e_{n-1}$ , leaving from $P_1$ so that $s,\,e_1,\dots ,e_{n-1}$ are pairwise twins. By the same lemma, there is an edge $e_n$ leaving from $P_2$ so that $s,\,e_n$ are twins. Orient s from $P_1$ to $P_2$ , and denote by $s^+$ and $s^-$ the right and left, respectively. Let $e_i$ be any edge from $P_1$ , slit the edges $e_i$ and $e_n$ and denote the resulting sides as $e_i^{\pm }$ and $e_n^{\pm }$ according to our convention. Then identify $e_i^+$ with $e_n^-$ , and identify $e_i^-$ with $e_n^+$ . The resulting space is a genus-one differential in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(2h,\,2h, 2; -2^{2h-1}, -4)$ . Suppose, without loss of generality that $e_1,\dots ,e_{n-1}$ are ordered counterclockwise around $P_1$ . If i is odd, then it is easy to check that the resulting structure has rotation number $2$ whereas, if i is even the resulting structure has rotation number one. This construction works as long as $n=2h\ge 4$ and the case $n=2$ ; that is, $h=1$ , needs a special treatment as follows.
We provide explicit constructions for realizing the trivial representation in both connected components of the stratum $\mathcal H_1(2,2,2;\,-2,-4)$ . Let us start by realizing a translation surface in this stratum with rotation number $1$ . Let $P,\,Q,\,R$ be three not aligned points on the complex plane equipped with the standard differential $dz$ . Let e be the edge joining P and Q, and let r be a half-ray leaving from R such that $e\,\cap \,r=\phi $ . Consider four copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , and perform the following surgeries:
-
1. Slit the first copy along $e_1$ , and denote the resulting sides as $e_1^{\pm }$ ,
-
2. Slit the second copy along $r_2$ , and denote the resulting sides as $r_2^{\pm }$ , finally
-
3. Slit the third and fourth copy along the edges $e_3$ and $e_4$ , respectively, and along the rays $r_3$ and $r_4$ , respectively. Denote the resulting sides as $e_3^{\pm }$ , $e_4^{\pm }$ , $r_3^{\pm }$ and $r_4^{\pm }$ ,
where the signs are always taken according our convention. Identify the edge $e_1^+$ with $e_3^-$ , then $e_3^+$ with $e_4^-$ , and finally, identify $e_4^+$ with $e_1^-$ . Next, identify the half-ray $r_2^+$ with $r_3^-$ , then $r_3^+$ with $r_4^-$ , and finally, identify $r_4^+$ with $r_2^-$ . The resulting surface is a genus-one differential with trivial periods and rotation number $1$ as desired. In fact, a close loop around anyone of the $e_i$ ’s, say $\alpha $ , has index one, and this forces the rotation number to be one as well. See Figure 46.
We finally realize the trivial representation in the connected component of $\mathcal H_1(2,2,2;\,-2,-4)$ with rotation number $2$ . Once again let $P,\,Q,\,R$ be three not aligned points on the complex plane equipped with the standard differential $dz$ . Let a be the edge joining P and Q, let b be the edge joining Q and R and, finally, let c the edge joining P and R. As above, let r be a half-ray leaving from R such that it does not intersect none of the segments $a,b,c$ . Consider four copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ and perform the following surgeries:
-
1. Slit the first copy along the edges $a_1,\,b_1$ and $c_1$ and the ray $r_1$ . Denote the resulting sides as $a_1^{\pm }$ , $b_1^{\pm }$ , $c_1^{\pm }$ and $r_1^{\pm }$ .
-
2. Slit the second copy along $b_2$ and $r_2$ , and denote the resulting sides as $b_2^{\pm }$ and $r_2^{\pm }$ ,
-
3. Slit the third copy along the edges $c_3$ and $r_3$ . Denote the resulting sides as $c_3^{\pm }$ and $r_3^{\pm }$ , finally
-
4. Slit the fourth copy along $a_4$ , and denote the resulting sides as $a_4^{\pm }$ ,
where the signs are always taken according our convention. Identify the edge $a_1^+$ with $a_4^-$ and $a_1^-$ with $a_4^+$ . Next, identify $b_1^+$ with $b_2^-$ and $b_1^-$ with $b_2^+$ . Finally, identify $c_1^+$ with $c_3^-$ and $c_1^-$ with $c_3^+$ . Then identify the half-ray $r_1^+$ with $r_2^-$ , then $r_2^+$ with $r_3^-$ and finally $r_3^+$ with $r_1^-$ . The resulting surface is a genus-one differential with trivial periods and rotation number $2$ as desired. In fact, we can find two simple closed curves $\alpha ,\,\beta $ such that $\mathrm {Ind}(\alpha )=\mathrm {Ind}(\beta )=2$ . See Figure 47.
Finally, we still assume $\gcd (m_1,\dots ,m_k,p_1,\dots ,p_n)=2$ , and we suppose that $p_i=2$ for all $i=1,\dots ,n$ , that is, we consider the case of strata $\mathcal H_1(m_1,\dots ,m_k;\,-2^n)$ . In this particular case, since $m_i + m_j \geq n$ for all possible pairs $(i, j)$ , we just have a few isolated cases to consider corresponding to $k=3,4$ . In fact, Equation (119) implies that $2n(k-2)\leq kn$ ; that is, $k\leq 4$ . Since $k\ge 3$ , it follows that $3\leq k \leq 4$ .
If $k=4$ , the only case to consider is the stratum $\mathcal H_1(m, m, m, m; -2^n)$ , where $n = 2m$ and m is even. In principle, one might need to deal with strata of the form $\mathcal H_1(2h_1,2h_2,2h_3,2h_4;\,-2^{h_1+h_2+h_3+h_4})$ , where, without loss of generality, $h_1\leq h_2\leq h_3\leq h_4$ . If we assume $2h_1+2h_2\geq n=h_1+h_2+h_3+h_4$ , we readily obtain that the only possibility is that $h_1=h_2=h_3=h_4$ .
Lemma 8.33. Let $n=2m$ . The trivial representation can be realized in each connected component of the stratum $\mathcal H_1(m,m,m,m; -2^n)$ .
Proof. In the first place, we notice that if m if odd, then $\mathcal H_1(m,m,m,m;\,-2^n)$ is connected, and hence, the trivial representation is realisable in this stratum if and only if $m\leq n-1$ (see [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem B]) that is satisfied for $m\geq 1$ – compare the Hurwitz type inequality (103) with the equation $4m=2n$ . Therefore, in what follows we assume m to be even.
We first provide a generic construction that works as long as $m\geq 4$ , and subsequently, we handle the case $m=2$ in a different way. Therefore, suppose in the first place that $m\geq 4$ . We realize the trivial representation as the period character of genus-zerp differential in the stratum $\mathcal H_0(2m-2,m,m;\,-2^n)$ . Notice that this is possible because the Hurwitz type inequality (103) holds, and the realization is guaranteed by [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem B]. Let $(Y,\xi )$ such a structure. Let Q be a zero of order $2m-2$ , and let $\varepsilon>0$ such that the open ball $B_{4\varepsilon }(Q)$ does not contain the other zero. Break Q into two zeros of order $m-1$ and $m-1$ as described in §3.1. Since $m>0$ is even, both zeros have order at least one. Denote the newborn zeros as $P_1$ and $P_2$ , respectively. Moreover, we can break Q so that the resulting saddle connection, say s, has length $\varepsilon $ . Now, we can proceed as in the first part of Lemma 8.32. By Lemma 8.3, there are $m-1$ edges, say $e_1,\dots ,e_{m-1}$ , leaving from $P_1$ so that $s,\,e_1,\dots ,e_{m-1}$ are pairwise twins and there are $m-1$ edges, say $e_m, \dots ,e_{2m-2}$ , leaving from $P_2$ so that $s,\,e_m,\dots ,e_{2m-2}$ are twins. Orient s from $P_1$ to $P_2$ and denote by $s^+$ and $s^-$ the right and left, respectively. Let $e_i$ be any edge from $P_1$ , slit the edges $e_i$ and $e_m$ and denote the resulting sides as $e_i^{\pm }$ and $e_m^{\pm }$ according to our convention. Then identify $e_i^+$ with $e_m^-$ , and identify $e_i^-$ with $e_n^+$ . The resulting space is a genus-one differential in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(m,m,m,m;\,-2^n)$ with trivial periods as desired. Suppose, without loss of generality, that $e_1,\dots ,e_{m-1}$ are ordered counterclockwise around $P_1$ . If i is odd, then it is easy to check that the resulting structure has rotation number $2$ whereas, if i is even the resulting structure has rotation number one.
It remains to deal with the special case $m=2$ . The argument above fails because, for $m=2$ , we do not have any edge for realizing a translation surface with rotation number one in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(2,2,2,2;\,-2^4)$ . However, the same proof still works for realizing a translation surface with trivial periods and rotation number two. We only realize the trivial representation in the connected component of $\mathcal H_1(2,2,2,2;\,-2^4)$ with rotation number one. Let $A,B,C$ and D be the vertices of a square in ${\mathbb C}$ . Let $a,b,c$ and d denote the edges $AB,\,BC,\,CD$ and $DA$ , respectively. Consider four copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , and perform the following slits:
-
1. In the first copy, we slit all the edges $a_1,\,b_1,\,c_1$ and $d_1$ ,
-
2. Then slit in the second copy the edges $a_2$ and $c_2$ ,
-
3. Slit in the third copy the edge $d_3$ and, finally,
-
4. Slit in the fourth copy the edge $b_4$ .
Identify the edge $a_1^+$ with $a_2^-$ and $a_1^-$ with $a_2^+$ . Similarly, identify $c_1^+$ with $c_2^-$ and $c_1^-$ with $c_2^+$ . Then identify the edge $d_1^+$ with $d_3^-$ and $d_1^-$ with $d_3^+$ . Finally, identify $b_1^+$ with $b_4^-$ and $b_1^-$ with $b_4^+$ . The resulting space is a genus-one differential with trivial periods, and it lies in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(2,2,2,2;\,-2^4)$ . It remains to show that it has rotation number one as desired. This follows because we can find a pair of curves $\alpha ,\,\beta $ so that $\mathrm {Ind}(\alpha )=3$ and $\mathrm {Ind}(\beta )=1$ as depicted in Figure 48.
It remains the case $k=3$ , that is, the case of strata of the form $\mathcal H_1(m_1, m_2, m_3; -2^n)$ with $m_i$ all even. We can do induction from the two components of the lower stratum $\mathcal H_1(m_1 - 2, m_2 - 2, m_3; -2^{n-2})$ , slit a saddle connection, say s joining two zeros $P_1$ and $P_2$ , and then add two copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ with the same slit. If a closed curve crosses s, then after the operation its index alters by $2$ , hence the rotation number remains unaltered. For this construction, we need to check a few conditions. First, we need
Notice that at least one of the three zeros satisfies this bound as soon as $n \geq 7$ . In fact, in the case $m_i\geq n-2$ we get that $2n \geq 3(n-2)$ that implies $n\leq 6$ . We check the cases of small n directly. Next, we need to find a saddle connection joining two specified zeros. Indeed, we can assume that there is a saddle connection joining any two of the three zeros to start with, and after adding more slit planes, clearly the statement of existing saddle connections between any two zeros still holds.
So it reduces to check the induction base cases for strata $\mathcal H_1(2^3;\,-2^3)$ , $\mathcal H_1(2,4,4; -2^5)$ and $\mathcal H_1(4,4,4; -2^6)$ . Notice that, combinatorially, the stratum $\mathcal H_1(2,2,4;\,-2^4)$ is allowed but the trivial representation cannot be realized inside it because the Hurwitz type inequality (103) fails. We have the following lemmas.
Lemma 8.34. The trivial representation can be realized in each connected component of $\mathcal H_1(2,4,4; -2^5)$ .
Proof. In this case, provide a unique construction, and as we shall see, the realization of the rotation number only depends on the choice of certain slits. The idea is to get the access to such a connected component from the stratum of genus-zero differentials $\mathcal H_0(1,3,4; -2^5)$ as follows. Let $A,\,B,\,C\in {\mathbb C}$ be distinct and not aligned points. Notice that the convex hull of $\{A,B,C\}$ is a nondegenerate triangle. Let $a,b,c$ denote the edges $AB$ , $BC$ and $CA$ . Consider five copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , and slit them as follows:
-
1. slit the first copy along the edge $b_1$ ;
-
2. slit the second copy along the edges $b_2$ and $c_2$ ; then
-
3. slit the remaining copies along $c_3$ , $c_4$ and $c_5$ , respectively;
-
4. finally, slit the first copy along $a_1$ and either
-
i. slit the third copy along $a_3$ if we aim to realize a translation surface with rotation number one, otherwise
-
ii. slit the fourth copy along $a_4$ if we aim to realize a translation surface with rotation number two.
-
Label the resulting sides with $\pm $ according to our convention. Identify the edges as follows: $c_1^+$ with $c_2^-$ and $c_1^-$ with $c_2^+$ . Next, identify $c_i^-$ with $c_{i+1}^+$ for $i=2,3,4$ and $c_5^-$ with $c_2^+$ . The resulting surface is a genus-zero differential in $\mathcal H_0(1,3,4;\,-2^5)$ . The last step is to identify $a_1^+$ with $a_4^-$ and $a_1^-$ with $a_4^+$ in the case we aim to realize a genus-one differential in $\mathcal H_1(2,4,4;\,-2^5)$ with trivial periods and rotation number one. Otherwise, identify $a_1^+$ with $a_3^-$ and $a_1^-$ with $a_3^+$ in the case we aim to realize a genus-one differential in $\mathcal H_1(2,4,4;\,-2^5)$ with trivial periods and rotation number two. See Figure 49.
Lemma 8.35. The trivial representation can be realized in each connected component of $\mathcal H_1(4,4,4;\,-2^6)$ .
Proof. Even in this case, provide a unique construction, and as we shall see, the realization of the rotation number only depends on the choice of certain slits. Let $A,\,B,\,C\in {\mathbb C}$ be distinct and not aligned points. Notice that the convex hull of $\{A,B,C\}$ is a nondegenerate triangle.
Let $a,b,c$ denote the edges $AB$ , $BC$ and $CA$ . Consider six copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , and slit them as follows:
-
1. slit the first copy along the edge $a_1$ ,
-
2. slit the second copy along the edges $a_2$ , $b_2$ and $c_2$ ,
-
3. slit the third and fourth copy along the edges $a_3$ and $a_4$ and the edges $b_3$ and $b_4$ ,
-
4. slit the fifth and sixth copy along the edges $c_5$ and $c_6$ , finally
-
i. if we aim to realize a translation surface with rotation number one, then slit the fifth copy along the edge $a_5$ , otherwise
-
ii. if we aim to realize a translation surface with rotation number two, slit the sixth copy along the edge $a_6$ .
-
Label the resulting sides with $\pm $ according to our convention. Identify the edges as follows: $a_1^+$ with $a_2^-$ and $a_1^-$ with $a_2^+$ . Next, identify the edges $b_2^+$ with $b_3^-$ , then $b_3^+$ with $b_4^-$ , and finally, $b_4^+$ with $b_2^-$ . Similarly, identify the edges $c_2^+$ with $c_5^-$ , then $c_5^+$ with $c_6^-$ , and finally, $c_6^+$ with $c_2^-$ . The resulting surface is a genus-zero differential in the stratum $\mathcal H_0(3,3,4;-2^6)$ . The last step is to identify $a_3^+$ with $a_5^-$ and $a_3^-$ with $a_5^+$ in the case we aim to realize a genus-one differential in $\mathcal H_1(4,4,4;\,-2^6)$ with trivial periods and rotation number one. Otherwise identify $a_3^+$ with $a_6^-$ and $a_3^-$ with $a_6^+$ in the case we aim to realize a genus-one differential in $\mathcal H_1(4,4,4;\,-2^6)$ with trivial periods and rotation number two. See Figure 50.
Lemma 8.36. The stratum $\mathcal H_1(2^3;\,-2^3)$ is exceptional; in fact, the trivial representation can only be realized in the nonprimitive connected component.
Proof. Suppose that $(X,\omega )$ is a translation surface in $\mathcal H_1(2^3;\,-2^3)$ with trivial periods. Let $Z_i$ and $P_i$ be the zeros and poles of $\omega $ for $i=1,2,3$ . The trivial period condition is equivalent to the existence of a triple cover of X to $\mathbb {C}\mathbf {P}^1$ totally ramified at the $Z_i$ and having $P_1+P_2+P_3$ as the fiber over infinity. This implies the linear equivalence relation $3Z_1\sim 3Z_2\sim 3Z_3 \sim P_1+P_2+ P_3$ . On the other hand, by assumption $2Z_1 + 2Z_2 + 2Z_3\sim 2P_1 + 2P_2 + 2P_3$ . It follows that $Z_1+Z_2+Z_3 \sim 3Z_1+3Z_2+3Z_3-(2Z_1 + 2Z_2 +2Z_3) \sim P_1+P_2+P_3$ , which implies by definition that $(S,\omega )$ belongs to the nonprimitive component of $\mathcal H_1(2^3;\,-2^3)$ .
This complete the proof of Proposition 8.8 and indeed the proof of Theorem B for genus-one differentials.
8.5 Hyperelliptic exact differentials
In subsection §8.2, we have seen that the trivial representation cannot appear as the period character of a hyperelliptic translation surface with a single zero. However, it is still possible to realize trivial representation as the period character of some exact hyperelliptic differentials in some cases. As alluded above, the order of zeros of a meromorphic exact differential $\omega $ , on a Riemann surface X, are subject to the constraint provided by the Hurwitz type inequality (103):
Such a formula, for strata $\mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-2p)$ and $\mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-p,-p)$ simplifies to
respectively. We also recall that, according to our Remark 2.3, the order of zeros and poles are subject to the so-called Gauss–Bonnet condition
otherwise, the stratum would be empty. Equations (125) and (126) above combined together readily imply the following:
Lemma 8.37. The trivial representation appears as the period of a translation surface in $\mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-2p)$ if and only if $g\le p-1$ . Similarly, the trivial representation appears as the period of a translation surface with poles in $\mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-p,-p)$ if and only if $g\le p-2$ .
We next wonder whether the trivial representation appears as the period of some hyperelliptic translation surface.
Proposition 8.38. Suppose the trivial representation can be realized in a stratum admitting a hyperelliptic component. Then it can be realized as the period character of some hyperelliptic translation surfaces with poles in the same stratum.
The remaining part of this subsection is devoted to prove Proposition 8.38. We shall distinguish two cases as follows.
8.5.1 Single higher-order pole
Let $(X,\omega )$ be a genus-zero meromorphic differential in $\mathcal {H}_0(p-1,p-1;-2p)$ , where $p\ge 2$ . This structure can be easily realized as follows. On $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , we consider two distinct points, say $P,\,Q\in {\mathbb C}$ , and let r be the unique straight line passing through them. Denote by $s_0$ the segment joining P and Q, and let $r_1$ and $r_2$ be the subrays of r leaving from P and Q, respectively. We next bubble $p-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along $r_1$ , and in the same fashion, we bubble $p-1$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along $r_2$ . The resulting structure $(X,\omega )$ is a translation surface with poles in $\mathcal {H}_0(p-1,p-1;-2p)$ having trivial periods. Notice that the straight line r splits the complex plane ${\mathbb C}$ into two half-planes. We orient r so that $s_0$ is oriented from P to Q. According to this orientation, we denote by $H_1$ the half-plane bounded by $r^-$ and by $H_2$ the half-plane bounded by $r^+$ . Around $P\in (X,\omega )$ , we can single out $p+1$ sectors, say $H_1,\, S_1,\dots , S_{p-1},\,H_2$ , in cyclic order. For $k=1,\dots ,p-1$ , each sector $S_k$ comes from a copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ glued along $r_1$ by construction. In particular, $S_k$ contains a segment, say $s_k$ , based at P that bounds a wedge of angle $2k\pi $ with $s_0$ . Let $Q_k$ be extremal point of $s_k$ other than P.
Similarly, around $Q\in (X,\omega )$ , we can single out other $p+1$ sectors, say $H_2,\, S_{p},\dots , S_{2p-2},\,H_1$ , in cyclic order. In this case, each sector comes from a copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ glued along the half-ray $r_2$ . For $k=1,\dots ,p-1$ , each sector $S_{p+k-1}$ , for $k=1,\dots ,p-1$ , comes from a copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ glued along $r_2$ by construction. In this case, $S_{p+k-1}$ contains a segment, say $s_{p+k-1}$ , based at Q that bounds a wedge of angle $2k\pi $ with $s_0$ . Finally, let $P_k$ be extremal point of $s_{p+k-1}$ other than Q.
Any orientation on $s_0$ naturally yields a preferred orientation on each segment $s_k$ and $s_{p+k-1}$ , for any k, because they all have the same image under the developing map. Recall that $s_0$ is oriented from P to Q. As a consequence, $s_k$ is oriented from P to $Q_k$ and $s_{p+k-1}$ is oriented from $P_k$ to Q for all $k=1,\dots ,p-1$ . Let $1\le g\le p-1$ . For $k=1,\dots ,g$ , slit $(X,\omega )$ along $s_k$ and $s_{p+k-1}$ , and denote the resulting edges by $s_k^{\pm },\,s_{p+k-1}^{\pm }$ , where the sign is taken according to our convention. Finally, identify $s_k^+$ with $s_{p+k-1}^-$ and $s_k^-$ with $s_{p+k-1}^+$ . The resulting space is surface of genus g equipped with a translation structure $(Y,\,\xi )\in \mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-2p)$ , where $m=g+p-1$ .
By construction, $\xi $ is an exact differential on Y; that is, $(Y,\xi )$ has trivial absolute periods. Since all sectors are cyclically ordered as $H_1,S_1,\dots ,S_{p-1},H_2,S_{p},\dots ,S_{2p-2}$ , the structure $(Y,\xi )$ is also naturally equipped with an involution of order two with $2g+2$ fixed points given by: the midpoint of $s_0$ , the midpoints of $s_k^{\pm }$ and of $s_{p+k-1}^{\pm }$ for $k=1,\dots ,g$ and the pole; see Figure 51. Therefore, the structure $(Y,\xi )$ is hyperelliptic with trivial periods as desired.
8.5.2 Two higher-order poles
This case is similar to the previous one, and in fact, the main difference is that we begin with two genus-zero meromorphic differential $(X_i,\,\omega _i)\in \mathcal {H}_0(p-2;-p)$ . These structures can be realized as follows: We begin with two copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , and we consider on each one two distinct points, say $P_i,\,Q_i\in {\mathbb C}$ such that
where $d(\cdot \,,\,\cdot )$ denotes the usual Euclidean metric. Let $l_i$ denote the unique straight line passing through $P_i$ and $Q_i$ , and denote by $e_i$ the unique segment joining them. For $i=1,2$ , we orient the line $l_i$ so that $e_i$ is oriented from $P_i$ to $Q_i$ . On the first copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ , we define $r_1\subset l_1$ as the ray leaving from $P_1$ not passing through $Q_1$ . Similarly, on the second copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ we define $r_2\subset l_2$ as the ray leaving from $Q_2$ and not passing through $P_2$ . Next, we bubble $p-2$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along $r_1$ , and similarly, we bubble $p-2$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ along $r_2$ . Define the resulting structures as $(X_1,\,\omega _1)$ and $(X_2,\,\omega _2)$ , respectively. Both structures have a pole of order p and $\xi _1$ has a zero of order $p-2$ at $P_1$ whereas $\xi _2$ has a zero of order $p-2$ at $Q_2$ .
Let us focus on $(X_1,\,\omega _1)$ . Around $P_1$ , we can single out $p-1$ sectors, say $S_1,\dots ,S_{p-1}$ in cyclic positive order, each of which is a wedge of angle $2\pi $ . One of these sector, say $S_1$ , is given by the first starting copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ . All the other sectors $S_2,\dots ,S_{p-1}$ come from the $p-2$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ bubbled along $r_1$ . For every $k=2,\dots ,p-1$ , inside the sector $S_k$ there is a segment, say $s_k$ , based at $P_1$ that forms a wedge of angle $2k\pi $ with $e_1$ . Let ${Q_k}'$ be the extremal point of $s_k$ other than $P_1$ . Furthermore, the fixed orientation on the edge $e_1$ determines a preferred orientation on $s_k$ from $P_1$ to ${Q_k}'$ .
Similar considerations hold for $(X_2,\,\omega _2)$ . Around $Q_2$ , we can single out $p-1$ sectors, say $S_{p},\dots ,S_{2p-2}$ in cyclic positive order, each of which is a wedge of angle $2\pi $ . One of these sector, say $S_p$ , is given by the second starting copy of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ . The other sectors $S_{p+1},\dots ,S_{2p-2}$ come from the $p-2$ copies of $({\mathbb C},\,dz)$ bubbled along $r_2$ . For every $k=1,\dots ,p-2$ , each sector $S_{p+k}$ contains a segment, say $s_{p+k}$ , based at $Q_2$ that forms a wedge of angle $2k\pi $ with $e_2$ . Let ${P_k}'$ be the extremal point of $s_{p+k}$ other than $Q_2$ . Even in this case, the already fixed orientation on $e_2$ determines a preferred orientation on $s_{p+k}$ from $Q_2$ to ${P_k}'$ .
Slit $(X_1,\omega _1)$ and $(X_2,\omega _2)$ along $e_1$ and $e_2$ , respectively, denote $e_1^{\pm }$ and $e_2^{\pm }$ the resulting sides and identify the edge $e_1^+$ with $e_2^-$ and the edge $e_1^-$ with $e_2^+$ . The resulting space is a translation surface, say $(X,\omega )$ , in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_0(p-1,p-1;-p,-p)$ . In fact, recall that $e_i$ is oriented from $P_i$ to $Q_i$ for $i=1,2$ ; hence, $P_1$ is identified with $P_2$ and, similarly, $Q_1$ is identified with $Q_2$ on $(X,\omega )$ . If we denote $P,\,Q$ the resulting points, respectively, it is easy to check that $\omega $ has two zeros of order $p-1$ at P and Q.
Let $1\le g\le p-2$ . Slit $(X,\omega )$ along the segments $s_2,\dots ,s_{g+1}$ (all leaving from P), and then slit along the segments $s_{p+1},\dots ,s_{p+g}$ (leaving from Q). Denote the resulting edges as ${s_{k+1}}^{\pm }$ and ${s_{p+k}}^{\pm }$ as usual, according to our convention, for $k=1,\dots ,g$ . Next, identify $s_{k+1}^+$ with $s_{p+k}^-$ , and identify $s_{k+1}^-$ with $s_{p+k}^+$ .
The resulting space is a genus g translation surface, say $(Z,\eta )\in \mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-p,-p)$ , where $m=g+p-1$ . By construction, $(Z,\eta )$ has trivial periods and it admits a hyperelliptic involution with $2g+2$ fixed points given by: the midpoints of $e_1,e_2$ and the midpoints of $s_{k+1}^{\pm }$ and of $s_{p+k+1}^{\pm }$ for all $k=1,\dots ,g$ ; see Figure 52. This concludes the case with two higher-order poles and indeed the proof of Proposition 8.38.
8.5.3 Realizing the trivial representation
As a consequence of subsections §8.5.1 and §8.5.2, we have the following:
Corollary 8.39. Suppose the trivial representation can be realized in a stratum admitting two connected components, one of which is hyperelliptic and the other is not. Then it can be realized in each connected component of the same stratum.
Sketch of the proof
Suppose a stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-\nu )$ , where $\nu =\{2m\}$ or $\nu =\{m,m\}$ admits two connected components on of which is hyperelliptic; for example, $\mathcal H_2(5,5;-4,-4)$ . We have seen above how to realize the trivial representation as the period of some hyperelliptic translation surface. We adopt the same notation above. In order to get an exact differential which is no longer hyperelliptic, it is sufficient to identify $s_{k+1}^+$ with $s_{2p-2-k}^-$ and $s_{k+1}^-$ with $s_{2p-2-k}^+$ . The resulting space is also a genus g translation surface in $\mathcal {H}_g(m,m;-p,-p)$ , but it does not admit any hyperelliptic involution.
8.6 Meromorphic exact differentials with prescribed parity
We aim to realize the trivial representation as the period character of an exact meromorphic differential with prescribed spin parity. The gist of the idea is, once again, to use the induction on the genus. Similarly to the other cases, the process we shall develop here consists in adding one handle with trivial periods at each step; see subsection §8.6.2. Once again, in order for inductive process to start, we need to treat genus-one surfaces in the first place and then explain how the induction works; see subsections §8.4. The main result of the present section is the following:
Proposition 8.40. Suppose the trivial representation can be realized in a stratum admitting two connected components distinguished by the spin parity. Then it can be realized as the period character of some translation surfaces with poles in both components of the same stratum with the only exceptions being the strata $\mathcal {H}_g(2^{g+2};\,-2^3)$ and $\mathcal {H}_g(2^{g+1};\,-4)$ for $g\ge 2$ .
The exceptional cases are handled by the following:
Proposition 8.41. In the strata $\mathcal {H}_g(2^{g+2};\,-2^3)$ and $\mathcal {H}_g(2^{g+1};\,-4)$ for $g\ge 2$ , the trivial representation can only be realized in the connected component with parity equal to $g \,(\mathrm {mod }2)$ .
We begin with a few considerations.
8.6.1 Reducing to lower genus surfaces
Suppose the trivial representation appear as the period character of some differential in a stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k, -2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ . For the moment, we do not consider any parity. According to [Reference Chenakkod, Faraco and GuptaCFG22, Theorem B], this is possible if and only if
and
Let us consider the string $\kappa =(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k)$ . We now introduce an algorithm to reduce $\kappa $ to a new, possibly shorter, string $\lambda =(2d_1,\dots ,2d_l)$ such that
that is, $\mathcal H_1(2d_1,\dots ,2d_l;\,-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ is a nonempty stratum of genus-one differentials.
Such a reduction process is defined as follow. Let $\{2e_1,\dots ,2e_t\}$ be any string of positive integers indexed in nonincreasing order, we distinguish two cases according to the list below
-
• we reduce as $\{2e_1,\dots ,2e_{t-1}, 2e_t\}\longmapsto \{2e_1,\dots ,2e_{t-1}, 2e_t-2\}$ in the case the last integer is then $2$ , that is, $e_t\geq 2$ , otherwise
-
• if the last integer is equal to $2$ , then reduce as $\{2e_1,\dots , 2e_{t-1}, 2\}\longmapsto \{2e_1,\dots ,2e_{t-1}\}$ .
Starting with a string $\kappa $ as above, after $g-1$ reductions we end up with a new string $\lambda =(2d_1,\dots ,2d_l)$ such that Equation (129) holds. Notice in the first place that, if $\kappa $ is indexed in nonincreasing order, then even $\lambda $ is indexed in the same way. We shall always assume that $2d_1\ge 2d_2\ge \cdots \ge 2d_l$ at each step, in particular in the constructions below the assumption $2m_i\ge 2m_j$ for $i\le j$ plays an important role.
Observe that, if the trivial representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ can be realized in a stratum $\mathcal {H}_g(\kappa ;-\nu )$ , then the trivial representation $\mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ can be realized in the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(\lambda ;\,-\nu )$ . Therefore, the gist of the proof is to undo the reduction by adding one handle with trivial periods time by time. The way this handle will be glued depends on how the reduction has been performed. We obtain in this way a finite sequence of translation surfaces with the last one being the desired structure.
8.6.2 Inductive process: higher genus surfaces
Let the induction start. The idea is to get the access to a genus $g+1$ stratum starting from a genus g one, similarly to what was done in Section §7, that is,
where $2m_k-2\ge 0$ . For genus-one surfaces, we have already seen in subsection §8.4 that as soon as the trivial representation $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ can be realized in a given stratum then it can be realized as the period character of some translation surface with poles in each connected component of the same stratum with only three exceptions. By ignoring the exceptional cases for a moment, we can use these structures as the base case for an inductive foundation. In fact, every nonconnected stratum $\mathcal H_1(2\kappa ;\,-2\nu )$ admits at least one component with odd rotation number and at least one component with even rotation number. We shall use the former case for realizing genus g meromorphic differentials with odd spin parity whereas we shall use the latter case for realizing genus g meromorphic differentials with even spin parity.
However, by applying the reduction just described above, it is possible to land to an exceptional stratum that we recall to be $\mathcal H_1(2,2;-4)$ , $\mathcal H_1(2^3;\,-2^3)$ or $\mathcal H_1(3,3;\,-3,-3)$ . Since we consider strata of even type, the polar part is necessarily a string of the form $(2p_1,\dots ,2p_n)$ . Since the reduction above preserves the polar part and only alters the string $\kappa =(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k)$ , it follows that we never land in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(3,3;\,-3,-3)$ of genus-one differentials.
We next wonder: from which strata do we land on an exceptional stratum? Once again, the key observation is that the reduction above preserves the polar part. In particular, we land in the stratum $\mathcal H_1(2,2;\,-4)$ if and only if the reduction starts from a stratum of the form $\mathcal H_g(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k;-4)$ with $g\ge 2$ . The Gauss–Bonnet condition (see Remark 2.3) implies that $m_1+\cdots +m_k=g+1$ and the Hurwitz type inequality (103) implies that $2m_i\leq 2$ . Therefore, we land in the exceptional stratum $\mathcal H_1(2,2;\,-4)$ if and only if the reduction starts from a stratum of the form $\mathcal H_g(2^{g+1};\,-4)$ for $g\geq 2$ . Finally, we observe that the same argument shows that we land in the exceptional stratum $\mathcal H_1(2^3;\,-2^3)$ if and only if the reduction starts from strata of the form $\mathcal H_g(2^{g+2};\,-2^3)$ for $g\geq 2$ . For $g\geq 2$ , we define every stratum $\mathcal H_g(2^{g+1};\,-4)$ and $\mathcal H_g(2^{g+2};\,-2^3)$ as an exceptional stratum of even type, and we shall consider them in §8.6.3. The remaining part of this subsection is devoted to prove Proposition 8.40 which handles nonexceptional strata of even type.
Proof of Proposition 8.40
Let $\mathcal H_g(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k;\,-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ be a nonexceptional stratum of even type, and suppose the Hurwitz type inequality (103) holds, that means the trivial representation can be realized in this stratum as the period character of some translation surface with trivial periods. Let $\kappa $ be the string encoding the order of zeros, and reduce it as described in §8.6.1. After $g-1$ steps, we get a new string, say $\lambda =(2d_1,\dots ,2d_l)$ with $l\leq k$ . In the reduced stratum $\mathcal H_1(\lambda ;\,-\nu )$ , the trivial representation can be realized as the period character of some genus-one differential with rotation number $1$ or $2$ , say $(X_1,\,\omega _1)$ . We then undo the reduction in order to realize an exact genus g meromorphic differential in the initial stratum. Finally, it remains to compute the parity of the spin structure. We bubble a handle with trivial periods as described in subsection §8.1.2 and, as we have already seen, such a surgery alters the spin parity. Therefore, for a given stratum $\mathcal H_g(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k;\,-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ we get the access to the even component from the odd component of the lower stratum of differentials $\mathcal H_{g-1}(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k-2;\,-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ . Similarly, we get the access to the odd component of the stratum above from the even one of the lower stratum of differentials $\mathcal H_{g-1}(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k-2;\,-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ .
We now explain how to undo the reduction. For $1\le h\le g-1$ , at each step we bubble a handle with trivial periods by using the alternative construction provided at subsection §8.1.2 and denote by $(X_{h+1},\omega _{h+1})$ the resulting structure. By using the same notation, suppose first that at the $h^{th}$ step the reduction is of the form $\{2e_1,\dots ,2e_{t-1},2\}\mapsto \{2e_1,\dots ,2e_{t-1}\}$ – this is the easiest case to handle. Let $P_{t-1}$ be the zero of order $2e_{t-1}$ and let $c_1,\,c_2,\,c_3$ be three paths all leaving from $P_{t-1}$ with length $\varepsilon $ and such that the angle between the paths $c_1$ and $c_2$ and the angle between the paths $c_2$ and $c_3$ are both $2\pi $ . The angle between the paths $c_3$ and $c_1$ is $(4e_{t-1}-2)\pi $ . Bubble a handle with trivial periods as described in §8.1.2. The resulting structure $(X_{h+1},\,\omega _{h+1})$ is a translation surface with poles and trivial periods. From now on, suppose that at the $h^{th}$ step the reduction is of the form $\{2e_1,\dots ,2e_t\}\mapsto \{2e_1,\dots ,2e_t-2\}$ with $2e_t-2\geq 2$ . We need the following:
Lemma 8.42. Let $(X,\omega )\in \mathcal H_g(m_1,\dots ,m_k;\,-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ be a translation surface with poles and trivial absolute periods. Let $P,\,Q$ be two zeros that satisfy
and let $s_1$ be a saddle connection joining them. Let $s_2$ be a geodesic segment leaving from P such that $s_1$ and $s_2$ are twins. Then $s_2$ is an embedded geodesic segment such that $s_1\,\cap \,s_2\subseteq \{P,\,Q\}$ .
Suppose the lemma holds. Let $(X_h,\omega _h) \in \mathcal H_g(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k-2;\,-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ , and let $P_1,\dots , P_k$ be the zeros of $\omega $ of orders $2m_1,\dots ,2m_{k-1},2m_k-2$ respectively. Let $P_i$ be a zero that realises
Let $s_1$ be a saddle connection joining them and orient it from $P_i$ to $P_k$ . Let $s_o$ and $s_2$ be two paths leaving from $P_i$ such that $s_o,\,s_1,\,s_2$ are pairwise twins; $s_o$ forms a wedge of angle $2\pi $ with $s_1$ on its left and $s_2$ forms a wedge of angle $2\pi $ with $s_1$ on its right. For simplicity, rename momentarily $P_k$ as $Q_1$ , and then denote by $Q_o$ and $Q_2$ the extremal points of $s_o$ and $s_2$ other than $P_i$ . There are three mutually disjoint possibilities that we now discuss
-
1. The extremal points $Q_o$ , $Q_1$ and $Q_2$ are pairwise distinct,
-
2. Two out of three extremal points coincide,
-
3. $Q_o$ , $Q_1$ and $Q_2$ all coincide.
Remark 8.43. Notice that, in principle, the extremal points $Q_o$ and $Q_2$ might be zeros of $\omega $ . In the case where the extremal points $Q_o$ and $Q_2$ do not coincide with $Q_1$ , they are not regular points. For simplicity, suppose $Q_o=P_j$ for some $j\neq i,k$ . We proceed exactly as above by ignoring the fact that $Q_o$ is not regular. The resulting structure lies in the stratum
We eventually break the the zero of order $2m_j+2m_k$ into two zeros of orders $2m_j$ and $2m_k$ to get the desired result. A similar consideration holds if both $Q_o$ and $Q_2$ are not regular points. Since the constructions we are going to described do not depend on the nature of the extremal points, we suppose them to be regular for simplicity, unless otherwise specified, as the general case follows from the present remark. As an alternative, one may deform a little the given structure by ‘moving’ the branch points so that the vertices $Q_o$ and $Q_2$ are both regular. Topologically, this kind of deformation has been described in [Reference TanTan94, Section §6], and it is the geometric counterpart of the well-known Schiffer variations (see [Reference NagNag85]), a classical tool in the study of Riemann surfaces and their moduli spaces.
The case $1$ is the simplest one to deal with, and it does not have exceptional subcases. We bubble a handle with trivial periods as described in §8.1.2. After slitting, we get an hexagon with vertices $V_1,\dots ,V_6$ ; see Figure 40 above for a reference. We may define $V_1$ as the vertex arising from the branch point $P_i$ , and then we label the remaining vertices in cyclic positive order. Two of these vertices, namely $V_1$ and $V_4$ , have magnitude $(4m_{i}-2)\pi $ and $(4m_k-2)\pi $ , respectively. All the other vertices, instead, have magnitude $2\pi $ . Once we glue the ‘opposite’, we get the desired handle with trivial periods, and hence, the resulting space is a translation surface $(X_{h+1},\,\omega _{h+1})\in \mathcal H_{h+1}(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k;\,-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ with trivial absolute periods.
We now discuss the second case of the list above. Suppose in the first place that $Q_1$ coincides with $Q_o$ without loss of generality. Since two twins close up, we cannot immediately bubble a handle with trivial periods as in the previous case. We first need the following intermediate step. Suppose $2m_k-2\ge 4$ , that is, $m_k\ge 3$ . The residual case $m_k=2$ needs a special treatment we shall consider later. Break $Q_1$ into two zeros $Q_{11}$ and $Q_{12}$ of orders $2$ and $2m_k-4\ge 2$ , respectively. Once the zero is broken, there are three twins with extremal points given by $Q_o$ , $Q_{11}$ and $Q_{12}$ which are now all distinct. In this way, we have reduced the construction to the case $1$ above with the only difference that, after slitting, the vertex $V_4$ of the resulting hexagon has magnitude $(4m_k-6)\pi $ , and there is now another vertex, say $V_2$ , with magnitude $6\pi $ ; see Figure 53. Once we glue the ‘opposite’, we get the desired handle with trivial periods and hence a translation surface with poles $(X_{h+1},\,\omega _{h+1})\in \mathcal H_{h+1}(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k;\,-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ with trivial absolute periods. As a second possibility, we next suppose the edges $s_o$ and $s_2$ close up, that means $Q_o$ and $Q_2$ now coincide. In this case, $Q_o$ turns out to be a branch point of order $2m_j$ , with $j<k$ . Since $2m_j\ge 2m_k> 2m_k-2\ge 2$ , it follows that $2m_j\ge 4$ , and hence, we can break it into two zeros of even order each; for example, $2$ and $2m_j-2$ . We now proceed as above in order to get the desired structure with trivial absolute periods.
The third case is similar to the second one. Once again we cannot immediately bubble a handle with trivial periods. Suppose $2m_k-2\ge 6$ , that is, $m_k\ge 4$ . The remaining cases $m_k=2,3$ need a special treatment and we shall consider them below. Break $Q_1$ into three zeros of orders $2$ , $2m_k-6$ and $2$ respectively. Notice that $2m_k-6\ge 2$ . After slitting, the vertices $V_1$ and $V_4$ have magnitude $(4m_i-2)\pi $ and $(4m_k-10)\pi $ and there are now two vertices, say $V_2$ and $V_5$ with magnitude $6\pi $ . Once again, we glue the opposite sides, and the resulting structure is a translation surface $(X_{h+1},\,\omega _{h+1})$ with trivial periods in $\mathcal H_{h+1}(2m_1,\dots ,2m_k;\,-2p_1,\dots ,-2p_n)$ .
In order to complete the proof, we treat the residual cases mentioned above. Let us summarise them for the reader’s convenience
-
1. $Q_1$ coincides with $Q_o$ or $Q_2$ and $m_k=2$ ,
-
2. $Q_o$ , $Q_1$ and $Q_2$ all coincides and $m_k=2$ ,
-
3. $Q_o$ , $Q_1$ and $Q_2$ all coincides and $m_k=3$ .
All constructions above were performed by defining $s_1$ as the saddle connection that joins $P_k$ with the closest zero and then defining $s_o$ and $s_2$ as the twin $2\pi $ far away from $s_1$ on the left and right, respectively. In order to deal with these residual cases, we just need to find suitable twins on order to perform the desired bubbling.
Let $s_1$ be a saddle connection that joins $P_k$ with the nearest $P_i$ , and let $s_2,\dots ,s_{2m_i+1}$ be paths leaving from $P_i$ such that $s_i,\,s_j$ are twins for all $1\le i,\,j\le 2m_i+1$ . In the case $m_k=2$ , then there are at most three edges having $P_i$ and $Q_1$ as extremal points. If $s_1$ is the sole saddle connection joining $P_i$ and $Q_1$ , then there is nothing to prove. Moreover, since $P_i$ is a branch point of even order $2m_i$ , and $2m_i\ge 2m_k=4$ , there two adjacent edges, say $s_l$ and $s_{l+1}$ such that
-
i. their extremal points other than $P_i$ are both different from $Q_1$ , and
-
ii. they, respectively, form an angle $2\pi $ and $4\pi $ with respect to a saddle connection joining $P_i$ and $Q_1$ . In fact, this is always possible unless $2m_i=4$ . However, this case has already been covered above because we can find three edges with distinct extremal points.
If $s_l$ and $s_{l+1}$ close up, then the common extremal point other than $P_i$ is a branch point, say $P_j$ , of order $2m_j\ge 2m_k>2$ . Split $P_j$ into two branch points of orders $2$ and $2m_j-2$ . Then we can bubble a handle with trivial periods as already described above. The resulting space is a genus- $h+1$ translation surface with trivial absolute periods and prescribed parity as desired. Finally, the case $m_k=3$ is similar. The only difference here is that, in this case, there are at most five edges having $P_i$ and $Q_1$ as the extremal points. Once again, since $2m_i\ge 2m_k\ge 6$ , there are two adjacent edges $s_l$ and $s_{l+1}$ such conditions i. and ii. above holds. Then we may proceed as above to bubble a handle with trivial periods and then obtain a translation surface with poles and trivial absolute periods with the desire parity. This last case completes the proof of Proposition 8.40.
We are left with the following:
Proof of Lemma 8.42
In the first place, we recall that any translation surface with poles and trivial absolute periods has at least two zeros; otherwise, the Hurwitz type inequality (103) does not hold. Let P and Q be a pair of zeros that realize
where $d(\,\cdot \,,\,\cdot \,)$ denotes the usual Euclidean distance. Let $s_1$ be a saddle connection joining them, and let $s_2$ be a twin leaving from P; see Definition 8.2. In principle, any twin path at P may contain a branch point in its interior – this is not ruled out by our definition. Nevertheless in our case, both $s_1$ and $s_2$ cannot have any branch point in their interior otherwise we would contradict the minimality of d. The extremal point of $s_2$ cannot be a point in the interior of $s_1$ . In fact, if $s_1\,\cap \,s_2\subseteq \{P,\,R\}$ with $R\neq Q$ , then $P\rightarrow R\rightarrow P$ is a simple closed geodesic loop with trivial period. Since the intersection must be transverse – otherwise $s_1$ and $s_2$ would coincide – then R must be a branch point but this contradicts the minimality of d. Therefore, the extremal point of $s_2$ other than P could be any point not in the interior of $s_1$ nor P.
8.6.3 Exceptional strata of even type
It remains to consider the exceptional cases of Proposition 8.40, that is, to prove Proposition 8.41. We have the following:
Lemma 8.44. For every $g\ge 2$ , the trivial representation can only be realized in the connected component of $\mathcal {H}_g(2^{g+2};\,-2^3)$ with parity equal to $g \,(\mathrm {mod }2)$ .
Proof. We will prove by induction on g. Denote by $\mathcal {TR}_g$ the locus of exact differentials in $\mathcal {H}_g(2^{g+2};\,-2^3)$ . Note that $\mathcal {TR}_g$ equivalently parameterises triple covers of $\mathbb {C} \mathbf {P}^1$ totally ramified at $Z_1,\ldots , Z_{g+2}$ and having $P_1+P_2+P_3$ as the fiber over infinity.
First, we show that connected components of $\mathcal {TR}_g$ correspond to integers $0\leq k \leq (g+2)/2$ such that $2k \equiv g+2 \pmod {3}$ . To see this, we use the monodromy description of triple covers parameterized in a connected component of $\mathcal {TR}_g$ . Up to permuting the branch points and relabeling the three sheets, we can assume that the monodromy cycles at the first k branch points are given by the permutation $c = (1,2,3)$ and the monodromy cycles at the last $g+2-k$ branch points are given by the permutation $c^{-1} = (1,3,2)$ , where $c^k (c^{-1})^{g+2-k} = \mathrm {id}$ . This is equivalent to requiring that $2k - g - 2$ is divisible by $3$ .
Denote by $\mathcal {TR}_g(k)$ the connected component by using k monodromy cycles of c and $g+2-k$ monodromy cycles of $c^{-1}$ . Note that relabeling any two sheets of the covers can interchange c and $c^{-1}$ . Consequently, $\mathcal {TR}_g(k) = \mathcal {TR}_g(g+2-k)$ for $0\leq k \leq g+2$ . Since $g\geq 2$ , without loss of generality, we can assume that $k \geq 2$ . Next we will exhibit a degenerate cover in the boundary of each $\mathcal {TR}_g(k)$ (in the sense of admissible covers [Reference Harris and MorrisonHM98, §3G]) by gluing an element in $\mathcal {TR}_{g-1}(k-2)$ and an element in $\mathcal {TR}_1(3)$ at a separating node. To see this, let two branch points both with monodromy cycle c approach each other in the target $\mathbb {C} \mathbf {P}^1$ . The resulting (admissible) cover is given by gluing the following two subcovers. One is over $\mathbb {C} \mathbf {P}^1$ with the two chosen branch points of monodromy cycle c, and with an extra branch point at the node out of the vanishing cycle enclosing the two merged points whose monodromy cycle is $(c \cdot c)^{-1} = c$ . The other is over $\mathbb {C} \mathbf {P}^1$ with the remaining branch points of $k-2$ monodromy cycles c and $g+2-k$ monodromy cycles of $c^{-1}$ , with an extra branch point at the node whose monodromy cycle is $c^{-1}$ .
Finally, we show that the spin parity of differentials in $\mathcal {TR}_g(k)$ is $g \pmod {2}$ . By the induction hypothesis, the spin parity of $\mathcal {TR}_{g-1}(k-2)$ is $g-1 \pmod {2}$ , and by the proof of Lemma 8.36, the spin parity of $\mathcal {TR}_1(3)$ is given by $h^0(Z_1+Z_2+Z_3 - P_1 - P_2 - P_3)= h^0(\mathcal O) = 1$ . Moreover, the degenerate differential in the boundary of $\mathcal {TR}_g(k)$ described above has the same parity as those in the interior since it is of compact type; that is, the gluing node separates the two subsurfaces. Therefore, by the fact that the spin parity on a curve of compact type is given by the sum of parities of its components [Reference CornalbaCor89, (3.2)], the parity of the interior of $\mathcal {TR}_g(k)$ is equal to $(g-1) + 1 = g \pmod {2}$ .
We finally show the following:
Lemma 8.45. For every $g\ge 2$ , the trivial representation can only be realized in the connected component of $\mathcal {H}_g(2^{g+1};\,-4)$ with parity equal to $g \,(\mathrm {mod }2)$ .
Proof. This case essentially follows from the one in the preceding lemma. In both cases, the related triple covers arise from the same description, that is, totally ramified at $g+2$ points. Let $Z_1, \ldots , Z_{g+1}$ and Q be the $g+2$ ramification points. Let $P_1 + P_2 + P_3$ be an unramified fiber divisor. Then in the former case we consider the spin line bundle associated to the divisor $Z_1 + \cdots + Z_{g+1} + Q - P_1 - P_2 - P_3$ , while in the latter case it is $Z_1 + \cdots + Z_{g+1} - 2Q$ . Since $3Q \sim P_1 + P_2 + P_3$ , the two spin line bundle classes are linearly equivalent, hence they have the same parity. Alternatively, one can just apply the same monodromy and degeneration argument as in the preceding lemma.
In $g=4$ , for instance, there are two distinct monodromy patterns corresponding to $k=0$ and $k=3$ . That means $\mathcal {TR}_4$ has two connected components in $\mathcal H_4(2^6;\,-2^3)$ as well as in $\mathcal H_4(2^5;\,-4)$ . Below we depict the realization of translation surfaces with trivial periods in both components of $\mathcal {TR}_4\subset \mathcal H_4(2^6;\,-2^3)$ . A direct computation of the Arf-invariant shows that in both cases the parity (see Section §2.2.3) is even as expected.
These pictures depict the realization of translation surfaces with trivial periods in both components of $\mathcal {TR}_4\subset \mathcal H_4(2^6;\,-2^3)$ . In both cases, by using formula (23), it is possible to see that both structures have even parity and belong to different connected components of $\mathcal {TR}_4$ .
A Proof strategy flowcharts
The proof of Theorem A is long, and it involves a case-by-case discussion according to the diagrams below.
A.1 Genus-one surfaces
Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{1,\,n},\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a representation. Suppose we want to realize $\chi $ in a connected component of the stratum $\mathcal {H}_1(m;-p_1,\dots ,-p_n)$ , namely as the holonomy of some translation surface with a single zero of maximal order. In Section §5, we provide a way for realizing $\chi $ as the holonomy of some translation surface with poles in a prescribed stratum with prescribed rotation number. Table 3 provides an outline of the strategy adopted. The multiple zero case is handled by Corollary 5.17.
A.2 Hyperelliptic translation surfaces
Let $\chi \colon \mathrm {H}_1(S_{g,n},\,\mathbb {Z})\longrightarrow {\mathbb C}$ be a representation. We want to realize $\chi $ as the holonomy of some translation surfaces with poles and a hyperelliptic involution; see Definition 2.14. Table 4 provides an outline of the strategy adopted.
Acknowledgements
This paper was initiated during the Richmond Geometry Festival in Summer 2021. We thank the conference organizers Marco Aldi, Allison Moore and Nicola Tarasca for providing a wonderful platform of online communications. We also thank Quentin Gendron, Subhojoy Gupta, Guillaume Tahar and Yongquan Zhang for helpful discussions on related topics. When this project started, the second named author was affiliated with the MPIM Bonn and subsequently with the University of Bonn and is grateful to both institutions for the pleasant and stimulating environment in which he worked. He is indebted to Ursula Hamenstädt for the invaluable support he has received from her and which has helped him bring this current partnership to fruition. Finally, we thank the referee for carefully reading the paper and providing many helpful comments that led to significant improvements of the paper itself.
Competing interest
The authors have no competing interest to declare.
Financial support
Research of Dawei Chen is supported in part by National Science Foundation grants DMS-2301030, DMS-2001040, Simons Travel Support for Mathematicians and Simons Fellowship.
Research of Gianluca Faraco is supported in part by GNSAGA of INDAM.